Study Material Chemistry-1 PDF

Achievers Academy Chemistry XI
Achievers
y
Academy
em
ad
Ac
XI Chemistry
s
er
Study Material,
ev
Support Material,
hi
Study Notes and VBQ

Ac
Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

CONTENT LIST
Chapter Chapter Name Page No Weightage
No. of chapter
By Marks
1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 1-16 5
y
2 Structure of Atom 17-34 6
m
3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity 35-47 4
de
in Properties
4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular 48-72 5
Structure
5 States of Matter
a 73-81 5
Ac
6 Thermodynamics 82-92 6
7 Equilibrium 93-100 6
8 Redox Reactions 101-108 3

s
9 Hydrogen 109-121 3
er
10 The s-block elements 122-132 5
11 The p-block Elements 133-146 5

ev
12 Organic Chemistry- Some Basic 147-162 7
Principles and Techniques

hi
13 Hydrocarbons 163-185 8
14 Environmental Chemistry 186-190 3

Ac

UNIT 1
SOME BASIC CONCEPTS OF CHEMISTRY
Chemistry: Chemistry is the branch of science that deals with the composition,
structure and properties of matter. Chemistry is called the science of atoms and
molecule
Branches of Chemistry
Organic Chemistry -This branch deals with study of carbon compounds
especially hydrocarbons and their derivatives.
Inorganic Chemistry-This branch deals with the study of compounds of all
other elements except carbon. It largely concerns itself with the study of
y
minerals found in the Earth's crust.
em
Physical Chemistry-The explanation of fundamental principles governing
various chemical phenomena is the main concern of this branch. It is basically
concerned with laws and theories of the different branches of chemistry.
Industrial Chemistry-The chemistry involved in industrial processes is studied
under this branch.
ad
Analytical Chemistry-This branch deals with the qualitative and quantitative
analysis of various substances.
Biochemistry-This branch deals with the chemical changes going on in the
Ac
bodies of living organisms; plants and animals.
Nuclear Chemistry-Nuclear reactions, such as nuclear fission, nuclear fusion,
transmutation processes etc. are studied under this branch.
PROPERTIES OF MATTER AND THEIR MEASUREMENT--Every substance
has unique or characteristic properties. These properties can be classified into two
s
categories – physical properties and chemical properties.

er
Physical properties are those properties which can be measured or observed without
changing the identity or the composition of the substance. E.g. colour, odour, melting
point, boiling point, density etc.
ev
The measurement or observation of chemical properties requires a chemical change

to occur. e.g. Burning of Mg-ribbon in air
Chemical properties are characteristic reactions of different substances; these
hi
include acidity or basicity, combustibility etc.Many properties of matter such as

length, area, volume, etc., are quantitative in nature.
Metric System was based on the decimal system.
Ac
The International System of Units (SI)

The International System of Units (in French Le Systeme International d’Unites–
abbreviated as SI) was established by the 11th General Conference on Weights and
Measures (CGPM from ConferenceGenerale des Poids at Measures). The SI system
has seven base units

Prefixes in SI system
y
em
Multiple Prefix Symbol
10-12 pico p
10-9 nano n
10-6 micro µ
10-3
ad
milli m
10-2 centi c
10-1 deci d
10 deca da
Ac
102 hecto h
103 kilo k
106 mega M
109 giga G
s
1012 tera T
er
Mass and Weight-- Mass of a substance is the amount of matter present in it while
weight is the force exerted by gravity on an object. The mass of a substance is
ev
constant whereas its weight may vary from one place to another due to change in
gravity. The mass of a substance can be determined very accurately by using an
analytical balance
hi
Volume-- Volume has the units of (length)3. So volume has units of m3 or cm3 or
dm3.A common unit, litre (L) is not an SI unit, is used for measurement of volume of
liquids. 1 L = 1000 mL, 1000 cm3 = 1 dm3
Ac
Density: Density of a substance is its amount of mass per unit volume.SI unit of
density = SI unit of mass/SI unit of volume = kg/m3 or kg m–3This unit is quite large
and a chemist often expresses density in g cm–3.
Temperature--There are three common scales to measure temperature — °C (degree
celsius), °F (degree Fahrenheit) and K (kelvin). Here, K is the SI unit.
K = °C + 273.15
Note—Temperature below 0 °C (i.e. negative values) are possible in Celsius scale
but in Kelvin scale, negative temperature is not possible.
2

Scientific Notation
In which any number can be represented in the form N × 10 n (Where n is an exponent
having positive or negative values and N can vary between 1 to 10).
e.g. We can write 232.508 as 2.32508 x102 in scientific notation. Similarly, 0.00016
can be written as 1.6 x 10–4.
Precision refers to the closeness of various measurements for the same quantity.
Accuracy is the agreement of a particular value to the true value of the result
Significant Figures
The reliability of a measurement is indicated by the number of digits used to
represent it. To express it more accuratelywe express it with digits that are known
y
with certainty. These are called as Significant figures. They contain all thecertain
digits plus one doubtful digit in a number.
em
Rules for Determining the Number of Significant Figures
All non-zero digits are significant. For example, 6.9 has two significant
figures, while 2.16 has three significantfigures. The decimal place does not
determine the number of significant figures.
ad
A zero becomes significant in case it comes in between non zero numbers. For
example, 2.003 has four significantfigures, 4.02 has three significant figures.
Zeros at the beginning of a number are not significant. For example, 0.002 has
Ac
one significant figure while 0.0045has two significant figures.
All zeros placed to the right of a number are significant. For example, 16.0 has
three significant figures, while 16.00has four significant figures. Zeros at the
end of a number without decimal point are ambiguous.
In exponential notations, the numerical portion represents the number of
s
significant figures. For example, 0.00045 isexpressed as 4.5 x 10 -4 in terms of

er
scientific notations. The number of significant figures in this number is 2,

while inAvogadro's number (6.023 x 1023) it is four.
The decimal point does not count towards the number of significant figures.
ev
For example, the number 345601 has sixsignificant figures but can be written
in different ways, as 345.601 or 0.345601 or 3.45601 all having same number
ofsignificant figures.
hi
Retention of Significant Figures - Rounding off Figures

Ac
The rounding off procedure is applied to retain the required number of significant
figures.
1. If the digit coming after the desired number of significant figures happens to
be more than 5, the precedingsignificant figure is increased by one, 4.317 is
rounded off to 4.32.
2. If the digit involved is less than 5, it is neglected and the preceding significant
figure remains unchanged, 4.312 isrounded off to 4.31.
3. If the digit happens to be 5, the last mentioned or preceding significant figure
is increased by one only in case ithappens to be odd. In case of even figure, the

preceding digit remains unchanged. 8.375 is rounded off to 8.38 while8.365 is

rounded off to 8.36.
Dimensional Analysis During calculations generally there is a need to convert units
from one system to other. This is called factor label method or unit factor method
or dimensional analysis.
For example- 5 feet and 2 inches (height of an Indian female) is to converted in SI
unit
1 inch = 2.54 x 10-2 m
then, 5 feet and 2 inch = 62 inch
y
em
Physical Classification of Matter
Properties Solid Liquid Gas
1. volume Definite Definite Indefinite
2. Shape Definite Indefinite Indefinite
ad
3. Inter molecular Very high Moderate Negligible / Very
force of attraction low
4. arrangement of Orderly arranged Free to move Free to move every
Ac
molecules within the volume where
5. Inter molecular Very small Slightly greater Very great
space
7. Compressibility Not compressible Not compressible Highly
compressible
s
8. Expansion on Very little Very little Highly expand

er
heating
9. Rigidity Very rigid Not rigid knownas Not rigid and
fluid known as fluid
ev
9. Fluidity Can’t flow Can flow Can flow

10. Diffusion They can diffuse Can diffuse And Can diffuse And
due to kinetic rate of diffusion is rate of diffusion is
hi
energy of very fast very fast

liquid/gases
Chemical Classification of matter---
Ac

Elements
An element is the simplest form of matter that cannot be split into simpler substances
or built from simpler substances by any ordinary chemical or physical method. There
are 114 elements known to us, out of which 92 are naturally occurring while the rest
have been prepared artificially.
Elements are further classified into metals, non-metals and metalloids.
Compounds
A compound is a pure substance made up of two or more elements combined in a
definite proportion by mass, which could be split by suitable chemical methods.
Characteristics of compound
y
Compounds always contain a definite proportion of the same elements by
em
mass.
The properties of compounds are totally different from the elements from
which they are formed.
Compounds are homogeneous.
Compounds are broadly classified into inorganic and organic compounds.
ad
Inorganic compounds are those, which areobtained from non-living sources
such as minerals. For example, common salt, marble and limestone.
Organiccompounds are those, which occur in living sources such as plants and
Ac
animals. They all contain carbon. Commonorganic compounds are oils, wax,
fats etc.
Mixtures
A mixture is a combination of two or more elements or compounds in any proportion
so that the components do not lose their identity. Air is an example of a mixture
s
Mixtures are of two types, homogeneous and heterogeneous.

er
Homogeneous mixtures have the same composition throughout the sample. The
components of such mixtures cannot be seen under a powerful microscope. They are
also called solutions. Examples of homogeneous mixtures are air, seawater, gasoline,
ev
brass etc.
Heterogeneous mixtures consist of two or more parts (phases), which have different
compositions. These mixtures have visible boundaries of separation between the
different constituents and can be seen with the naked eye e.g., sand and salt, chalk
hi
powder in water etc.

LAWS OF CHEMICAL COMBINATIONS
Ac
Law of Conservation of Mass (Given by Antoine Lavoisier in 1789).

It states that matter (mass) can neither be created nor destroyed.
Law of Definite Proportions or Law of Constant Composition:
This law was proposed by Louis Proust in 1799, which states that:
'A chemical compound always consists of the same elements combined together in
the same ratio, irrespective of the method of preparation or the source from where it
is taken'.
Law of Multiple Proportions Proposed by Dalton in 1803, this law states that:

'When two elements combine to form two or more compounds, then the different
masses of one element, which combine with a fixed mass of the other, bear a simple
ratio to one another'.
Gay Lussac’s Law of Gaseous Volumes (Given by Gay Lussac in 1808.)
According to this law when gases combine or are produced in a chemical reaction
they do so in a simple ratio by volume provided all gases are at same temperature and
pressure.
e.g.H2(g) + Cl2(g) ---→2HCl(g)
1V 1V 2V
All reactants and products have simple ratio 1:1:2.
y
Avogadro Law (In 1811, Given by Avogadro)
According to this law equal volumes of gases at the same temperature and pressure
em
should contain equal number of molecules.
Dalton's Atomic Theory
All substances are made up of tiny, indivisible particles called atoms.
Atoms of the same element are identical in shape, size, mass and other
ad
properties.
Atoms of different elements are different in all respects.
Atom is the smallest unit that takes part in chemical combinations.
Ac
Atoms combine with each other in simple whole number ratios to form
compound atoms called molecules.
Atoms cannot be created, divided or destroyed during any chemical or physical
change.
Atoms and Molecules
s
The smallest particle of an element, which may or may not have independent
er
existence is called an atom, while the smallest particle of a substance which is

capable of independent existence is called a molecule.
Molecules are classified as homoatomic and heteroatomic. Homoatomic molecules
ev
are made up of the atoms of the same element and heteroatomic molecules are made
up of the atoms of the different element have different atomicity (number of atoms in
a molecule of an element) like monoatomic, diatomic, triatomic and polyatomic.
hi
Atomic Mass Unit

One atomic mass unit is defined as a mass exactly equal to one twelfth the mass of
one carbon -12 atom. And 1 amu = 1.66056×10–24 g.
Ac
Today, ‘amu’ has been replaced by ‘u’ which is known as unified mass.
Atomic Mass
Atomic mass of an element is defined as the average relative mass of an atom of an
element as compared to the mass of an atom of carbon -12 taken as 12.
Gram Atomic Mass

The quantity of an element whose mass in grams is numerically equal to its atomic
mass. In simple terms, atomic mass of an element expressed in grams is the gram
atomic mass or gram atom.
6

For example, the atomic mass of oxygen = 16 amu

Therefore gram atomic mass of oxygen = 16 g
Molecular Mass
Molecular mass of a substance is defined as the average relative mass of its molecule
as compared to the mass of an atom of C-12 taken as 12. It expresses as to how many
times the molecule of a substance is heavier than 1/12th of the mass of an atom of
carbon.
For example, a molecule of carbon dioxide is 44 times heavier than 1/12th of the
mass of an atom of carbon. Therefore the molecular mass of CO2 is 44 amu.
It is obtained by adding the atomic masses of all the atoms present in one molecule.
y
Gram Molecular Mass
A quantity of substance whose mass in grams is numerically equal to its molecular
em
mass is called gram molecular mass. In simple terms, molecular mass of a substance
expressed in grams is called gram molecular mass.
e.g., the molecular mass of oxygen = 32 amu
Therefore, gram molecular mass of oxygen = 32 g
ad
Formula Mass-
Sum of atomic masses of the elements present in one formula unit of a compound. It
is used for the ionic compounds.
Ac
Mole Concept.
Mole is defined as the amount of a substance, which contains the same number of
chemical units (atoms, molecules, ions or electrons) as there are atoms in exactly 12
grams of pure carbon-12.
A mole represents a collection of 6.022 x1023( Avogadro's number) chemical units..
s
The mass of one mole of a substance in grams is called its molar mass.
Molar Volume
er
The volume occupied by one mole of any substance is called its molar volume. It is
denoted by Vm. One mole of all gaseous substances at 273 K and 1 atm pressure
ev
occupies a volume equal to 22.4 litre or 22,400 mL. The unit of molar volume is litre
per mol or millilitre per mol
PERCENTAGE COMPOSITION—
The mass percentage of each constituent element present in any compound is called
hi
its percentage composition

Mass % of the element=Mass of element in 1 molecule of the compound x 100
Ac
Molecular mass of the compound

Empirical Formula and Molecular Formula—
An empirical formula represents the simplest whole number ratio of various atoms
present in a compound. E.g. CH is the empirical formula of benzene.
The molecular formula shows the exact number of different types of atoms present
in a molecule of a compound. E.g. C6H6 is the molecular formula of benzene.
Relationship between empirical and molecular formulae
The two formulas are related as Molecular formula = n x empirical formula

Chemical Equation-
Shorthand representation of a chemical change in terms ofsymbols and formulae of
the substances involved in the reaction is called chemical equation..
The substances that react among themselves to bring about the chemical changes are
known as reactants, whereas the substances that are produced as a result of the
chemical change, are known as products.
Limiting Reagent- The reactant which gets consumed first or limits the amount of
product formed is known as limiting reagent
Reactions in Solutions-- The concentration of a solution can be expressed in any of
the following ways.
y
1. Mass Percent is the mass of the solute in grams per 100 grams of the solution.
em
A 5 % solution of sodium chloride means that 5 g of NaCl is present in 100g
of the solution.
2. Volume percent is the number of units of volume of the solute per 100 units
ad
of the volume of solution.
A 5 % (v/v) solution of ethyl alcohol contains 5 cm3 of alcohol in 100 cm3 of

Ac
the solution
3. Molarity of the solution is defined as the number of moles of solute dissolved
per litre (dm3) of the solution. It isdenoted by the symbol M. Measurements in
Molarity can change with the change in temperature because solutionsexpand
or contract accordingly.
s
Molarity of the solution = No. of moles of the solute =n

er
Volume of the solution in litre V

The Molarity of the solution can also be expressed in terms of mass and molar mass
ev
Molarity of the solution = Mass of the solute

Molar mass of the solute X volume of the solution in liter
In terms of weight, molarity of the substance can be expressed as:

hi
Ac
Molarity equation
To calculate the volume of a definite solution required to prepare solution of other
molarity, the following equation is used:
M1V1 = M2V2, where M1= initial molarity, M2= molarity of the new solution, V1=
initial volume and V2= volume of the new solution.
4. Molality- Molality is defined as the number of moles of solute dissolved per
1000 g (1 kg) of solvent. Molality is expressed as 'm'.

5. Mole Fraction is the ratio of number of moles of one component to the total
number of moles (solute and solvents) present in the solution. It is expressed as
'x'.
Mole fraction of the solute = Moles of the solute
Moles of solute + Moles of solvent
Mole fraction of the solvent = Moles of the solvent

Moles of solute + Moles of solvent
Mole fraction of the solute + Mole fraction of solvent = 1
y
One Mark questions with answers
em
1. What is the significant figures in 1.050 x 104?
Ans. Four
2. What is the S.I. unit of Density?
Ans. Kg m-3
3. What do mean by Mole fraction?
ad
Ans. Mole Fraction is the ratio of number of moles of one component to the total
number of moles (solute and solvents) present in the solution. It is
expressed as 'x'.
Ac
4. Round off up to 3 significant figure (a) 1.235 (b) 1.225
Ans. (a) 1.24 (b) 1.22
5. What is AZT?
Ans. Azidothymidine.
6. What is limiting reagent?
s
Ans.The reactant which gets consumed first or limits the amount of product
er
formed is known as limiting reagent

7. What is the relation between temperature in degree Celsius and degree
fahrenheit?
ev
Ans.
8. Define one mole?

hi
Ans. One mole is the amount of a substance that contains as many particles as
there are atoms in exactly 12 g of the carbon-12.
Ac
9. Calculate the formula mass calcium chloride.

Ans. Formula mass of CaCl2= 40+2 x35.5=40+71 = 111 u
10. What is the law called which deals with the ratios of the volumes of the
gaseous reactants and products?
Ans. Gay Lussac’s law of gaseous volumes.
Two Marks questions with answers

1. Give the two points of differences between homogeneous and heterogeneous
mixtures.
Ans.
9

Homogeneous mixture Heterogeneous mixture

1. Homogeneous mixtures 1. Heterogeneous mixtures consist of
have the same composition two or more parts (phases), which
throughout the sample. have different compositions.
2. These mixtures have visible
2. The components of such boundaries of separation between the
mixtures cannot be seen different constituents and can be seen
under a powerful with the naked eye
microscope.
2. Copper oxide obtained by heating copper carbonate or copper nitrate contains
y
copper and oxygen in the same ration by mass. Which law is illustrated by this
em
observation? State the law.
Ans.Law of Definite Proportions This law states that: A chemical compound
always consists of the same elements combined together in the same ratio,
irrespective of the method of preparation or the source from where it is taken.
3. Write the empirical formula of the following:
ad
(a) N2O4 (b) C6H12O6 (c) H2O (d) H2O2
Ans. (a)NO2 (b) CH2O (c) H2O (d) HO
4. Briefly explain the difference between precision and accuracy.
Ac
Ans. Precision refers to the closeness of various measurements for the same
quantity. However, accuracy is the agreement of a particular value to the true
value of the result.
5. Define the law of multiple proportions. Explain it with one example.
Ans.When two elements combine to form two or more compounds, then the
s
different masses of one element, which combine with a fixed mass of the
other, bear a simple ratio to one another. For example- carbon combines
er
with oxygen to form two compounds CO and CO2.

Compound CO CO2
ev
Mass of C 12 12
Mass of O 16 32
Masses of oxygen which combine with a fixed mass of carbon (12g) bear a
simple ratio of 16:32 or 1:2.
hi
6. Chlorine has two isotopes of atomic mass units 34.97 and 36.97. The relative
abundance of the isotopes is 0.755 and 0.245 respectively. Find the average atomic
Ac
mass of chlorine.
Ans. Average atomic mass = 34.97 x 0.755 +36.97 x 0.245 = 35.46 u
7. Calculate the percentage composition of water.
Ans. Mass % of an element = mass of that element in the compound × 100
molar mass of the compound
Molar mass of water = 18.02 g
Mass % of hydrogen = 2× 1.008 × 100
18.02
= 11.18
Mass % of oxygen = 16.00 × 100 = 88.79
18.02
10

8. State the number of significant figures in each of the following:

(i) 208.91 (ii) 0.00456 (iii) 453 (iv) 0.346
Ans.
(i) 208.91 has five significant figures.
(ii) 0.00456 has three significant figures.
(iii) 453 has three significant figures.
(iv) 0.346 has three significant figures.
8. Express the results of the following calculations to the appropriate number of
significant figures.
y
em
Ans.
= 0.05608 = 0.0561
ad
`
= 0.2615 x 10-4 = 0.3 x 10-4
9. How are 0.50 mol Na2CO3 and 0.50 M Na2CO3 different?
Ac
Ans. Molar mass of Na2CO3= 2 x 23 +12 + 3 x 16 = 106 g / mol
0.50 molNa2CO3means 0.50 x 106 = 53 g
0.50 M Na2CO3 means 0.50 mol i.e. 53 g of Na2CO3 are present in I L of the
solution.
s
Three Marks questions with answers-

1. What is unit factor method? Express the following in SI units - 93 million
er
miles (distance between earth and sun)

Ans. Method to convert units from one system to other is called unit factor
method.
ev
93 million miles = 93 x 106 miles

1 mile = 1.60934 km = 1.60934 x 103 m
hi
Ac
= 1.5 x 1011 m
2. Write the three points of difference between compound and mixture.
Ans.
Compound Mixture
Constituents are always present in a Constituents may be present in any
fixed ratio by mass ratio
May or may not be homogeneous in Always homogeneous in nature
nature
Constituents can be easily separated Constituents cannot be easily
11

by simple mechanical means separated by simple mechanical means

Properties are midway between those Properties are entirely different from
of its constituents. those of its constituents.
3. What do mean bygram atomic mass.One million silver atoms weigh 1.79 x
1016 g. Calculate the gram atomic mass of silver.
Ans.atomic mass of an element expressed in grams is the gram atomic mass
Number of silver atoms = 1 million = 1 x 106
Mass of one million Ag atoms = 1.79 x 1016 g
y
Mass of 6.023 x 1023 atoms of silver = 1.79 x 1016 g x 6.023 x 1023
1 x 106
em
= 107.8 g
4. What is the percentage of carbon, hydrogen and oxygen in ethanol?
ad
Ans. Molecular formula of ethanol is : C2H5OH
Molar mass of ethanol is : (212.01 + 61.008 + 16.00) g = 46.068 g
Mass per cent of carbon = (24.02g / 46.068g) ×100 = 52.14%
Ac
Mass per cent of hydrogen = (6.048g / 46.068g)×100 = 13.13% Mass per cent of
oxygen = (16.00 g / 46.068g)×100 = 34.73%
5. What do mean by molarity .Calculate the molarity of NaOH in the solution

prepared by dissolving its 4 g in enough water to form 250 mL of the solution.
s
Ans.The number of moles of solute dissolved per litre (dm3) of the solution is
er
called molarity
Since molarity (M) = No. of moles of solute /Volume of solution in litres
=(Mass of NaOH/Molar mass of NaOH)/0.250 L
ev
=(4 g / 40 g 0.1 mol)/0.250L =0.1 mol/0.250 L

= 0.4 mol L-1
= 0.4 M
hi
6. Classify the following as pure substances or mixture-

(a) ethyl alcohol (b) oxygen (c) blood (d) carbon (e) steel (f)
Ac
distilled water
Ans. Pure substance- ethyl alcohol ,oxygen , carbon, distilled water
Mixture- blood, steel
7. What are the rules for rounding off?
Ans.1. If the digit coming after the desired number of significant figures happens
to be more than 5, the precedingsignificant figure is increased by one,
2. If the digit involved is less than 5, it is neglected and the preceding
significant figure remains unchanged,
12

3.If the digit happens to be 5, the last mentioned or preceding significant figure
is increased by one only in case it happens to be odd. In case of even figure,
the preceding digit remains unchanged.
8. Define –(a) Average atomic mass (b) Molecular mass (c) Formula mass
Ans. (a) Average atomic mass- Atomic mass of an element is defined as the
average relative mass of an atom of an element as compared to the mass of an
atom of carbon -12 taken as 12.
(b) Molecular mass- it is sum of atomic masses of the elements present in a
molecule.
(c) Formula mass- it is sum of atomic masses of the elements present in a
y
formula unit of a compound.
9. Express the following in the scientific notation with 2 significant figures-
em
(a) 0.0048 (b) 234,000 (c) 200.0
Ans. (a) 4.8 x 10-3 (b) 2.3 x 105 (c) 2.0 x 102
10. Calculate the number of atoms in each of the following (i) 52 moles of Ar
(ii) 52 u of He (iii) 52 g of He
ad
Ans. (i) 1 mole of Ar = 6.022 × 1023 atoms of Ar
52 mol of Ar = 52 × 6.022 × 1023 atoms of Ar
= 3.131 × 1025 atoms of Ar
Ac
(ii)1 atom of He = 4 u of He
Or,
4 u of He = 1 atom of He
1 u of He = 1/4 atom of He
s
52u of He = 52/4 atom of He

= 13 atoms of He
er
(iii) Molar mass of He = 4 g/mol

4 g of He contains = 6.022 × 1023 atoms of He
52 g of He contains = 6.022 × 1023 x 52 = 78.286 x 1023 atoms of He
ev
Five Marks questions with answers-

hi
1. What is the difference between empirical and molecular formula? A compound

Ac
contains 4.07 % hydrogen, 24.27 % carbon and 71.65 % chlorine. Its molar
mass is
98.96 g. What are its empirical and molecular formulas?
Ans. An empirical formula represents the simplest whole number ration of various
atoms present in a compound whereas the molecular formula shows the exact number
of different types of atoms present in a molecule of a compound.
13

The empirical formula of the above compound is CH2Cl.

empirical formula mass is 12 + (1x2) + 35.5 = 49.5
n= molecular mass/ empirical formula mass =98.96/49.5 = 2
y
Hence molecular formula is C2H4Cl2
em
2. Dinitrogen and dihydrogen react with each other to produce ammonia
according to the following chemical equation:
N2(g) + H2(g) → 2NH3(g)
ad
(i) Calculate the mass of ammonia produced if 2.00 × 10 3 g dinitrogen reacts
with 1.00 × 103 g of dihydrogen.
(ii) Will any of the two reactants remain unreacted?
Ac
(iii) If yes, which one and what would be its mass?
Ans. (i) Balancing the given chemical equation,

s
From the equation, 1 mole (28 g) of dinitrogen reacts with 3 mole (6 g) of

er
dihydrogen to give 2 mole (34 g) of ammonia.

ev
⇒ 2.00 × 103 g of dinitrogen will react with dihydrogen i.e.,
2.00 × 103 g of dinitrogen will react with 428.6 g of dihydrogen.

hi
Given,
Ac
Amount of dihydrogen = 1.00 × 103 g
Hence, N2 is the limiting reagent.
28 g of N2 produces 34 g of NH3.
Hence, mass of ammonia produced by 2000 g of N2
= 2428.57 g
14

(ii) N2 is the limiting reagent and H2 is the excess reagent. Hence, H2 will
remain unreacted.
(iii) Mass of dihydrogen left unreacted = 1.00 × 103 g – 428.6 g
= 571.4 g
3. A welding fuel gas contains carbon and hydrogen only. Burning a small
sample of it in oxygen gives 3.38 g carbon dioxide, 0.690 g of water and no
other products. A volume of 10.0 L (measured at STP) of this welding gas is
y
found to weigh 11.6 g. Calculate (i) empirical formula, (ii) molar mass of the
gas, and (iii) molecular formula.
em
Ans. (i) 1 mole (44 g) of CO2 contains 12 g of carbon.
3.38 g of CO2 will contain carbon
ad
= 0.9217 g
18 g of water contains 2 g of hydrogen.
Ac
0.690 g of water will contain hydrogen
= 0.0767 g
Since carbon and hydrogen are the only constituents of the compound,
the total mass of the compound is:= 0.9217 g + 0.0767 g= 0.9984 g
s
Percent of C in the compound

er
= 92.32%
Percent of H in the compound

ev
= 7.68%
Moles of carbon in the compound

hi
= 7.69
Ac
Moles of hydrogen in the compound =

= 7.68
Ratio of carbon to hydrogen in the compound = 7.69: 7.68= 1: 1
Hence, the empirical formula of the gas is CH.
(ii) Given,
Weight of 10.0L of the gas (at S.T.P) = 11.6 g
Weight of 22.4 L of gas at STP

= 25.984 g≈ 26 g
Hence, the molar mass of the gas is 26 g.
15

(iii) Empirical formula mass of CH = 12 + 1 = 13 g
n=2
Molecular formula of gas = (CH)n= C2H2
HOTS (Higher Order Thinking Skills)
y
em
1. What is the difference between 160 cm and 160.0 cm
Ans. 160 has three significant figures while 160.0 has four significant figures.
Hence, 160.0 represents greater accuracy.
2. In the combustion of methane, what is the limiting reactant and why?
Ans. Methane is the limiting reactant because the other reactant is oxygen of the
ad
air which is always present in excess. Thus, the amounts of CO 2 and H2O formed
depend upon the amount of methane burnt.
3. A compound made up of two elements A and B has A= 70 %, B = 30 %. Their
Ac
relative number of moles in the compound are 1.25 and 1.88. calculate
a. Atomic masses of the elements A and B
b. Molecular formula of the compound , if its molecular mass is found to
be 160
Ans. Relative no. of moles of an element = % of the element
s
Atomic mass
er
Or atomic mass = % of the element = 70 = 56

Relative no. of moles 1.25
Atomic mass of B = 30/1.88 = 16
ev
Calculation of Empirical formula
Element Relative no. of Simplest molar Simplest whole no.

hi
moles ratio molar ratio

A 1.25 1.25/1.25 = 1 2
B 1.88 1.88/1.25 = 1.5 3
Ac
Empirical formula = A2B3

Calculation of molecular formula-
Empirical formula mass = 2 x 56 + 3x 16 = 160
n= molecular mass / Empirical formula mass = 160/160 = 1
Molecular formula = A2B3
16

CHAPTER 2
STRUCTURE OF ATOM
• Atom is the smallest indivisible particle of the matter. Atom is made of electron,
proton and neutrons.
PARTICLE ELECTRON PROTON NEUTRON
Discovery Sir. J. J. Thomson Goldstein (1886) Chadwick (1932)
(1869)
Nature of charge Negative Positive Neutral
-19 -19
Amount of charge 1.6 x 10 Coloumb 1.6 x 10 Coloumb 0
y
Mass 9.11 x 10-31kg 1.672614 x 10-27kg 1.67492 x10-27kg
em
Electrons were discovered using cathode ray discharge tube experiment.
Nucleus was discovered by Rutherford in 1911.
Cathode ray discharge tube experiment: A cathode ray discharge tube madeof
glass is taken with two electrodes. At very low pressure and high
ad
voltage,current starts flowing through a stream of particles moving in the tube
fromcathode to anode. These rays were called cathode rays. When a
perforatedanode was taken, the cathode rays struck the other end of the glass
tube atthe fluorescent coating and a bright spot on the coating was developed
Ac
Results:
a. Cathode rays consist of negatively charged electrons.
b. Cathode rays themselves are not visible but their behavior can be
observed with
s
help of fluorescent or phosphorescent materials.

c. In absence of electrical or magnetic field cathode rays travel in
er
straight lines
d. In presence of electrical or magnetic field, behaviour of cathode rays
is similar to that shown by electrons
ev
e. The characteristics of the cathode rays do not depend upon the

material of the electrodes and the nature of the gas present in the cathode ray
tube.
hi
Charge to mass ratio of an electron was determined by Thomson. The chargeto

mass ratio of an electron as 1.758820 x 1011 C kg-1
Ac
Charge on an electron was determined by R A Millikan by using an oil

dropexperiment. The value of the charge on an electron is -1.6 x 10-19C.
The mass on an electron was determined by combining the results
ofThomson’s experiment and Millikan’s oil drop experiment. The mass of
anelectron was determined to be 9.1094 x 10-31kg.
Discovery of protons and canal rays: Modified cathode ray tube
experimentwas carried out which led to the discovery of protons.
Characteristics of positively charged particles:
a. Charge to mass ratio of particles depends on gas from which these originate
17

b. The positively charged particles depend upon the nature of gas present in the
cathode ray discharge tube
c. Some of the positively charged particles carry a multiple of fundamental of
electrical charge.
d. Behaviour of positively charged particles in electrical or magnetic field is
opposite to that observed for cathode rays
Neutrons were discovered by James Chadwick by bombarding a thin sheet of
beryllium by α- particles. They are electrically neutral particles having a mass
slightly greater than that of the protons.
Atomic number (Z) : the number of protons present in the nucleus
y
(Moseley1913).
em
Mass Number (A) :Sum of the number of protons and neutrons present in
thenucleus.
Thomson model of an atom: This model proposed that atom is considered asa
uniform positively charged sphere and electrons are embedded in it.An
important feature of Thomson model of an atom was that mass of atom
ad
isconsidered to be evenly spread over the atom.Thomson model of atom is also
called as Plum pudding, raisin pudding orwatermelon modelThomson model
of atom was discarded because it could not explain certainexperimental results
Ac
like the scattering of α- particles by thin metal foils.
Observations from α- particles scattering experiment by Rutherford:
a. Most of the α- particles passed through gold foil un deflected
b. A small fraction of α- particles got deflected through small angles
s
c. Very few α- particles did not pass through foil but suffered large deflection
nearly180o
er
Conclusions Rutherford drew from α- particles scattering experiment:

a. Since most of the α-particles passed through foil undeflected, it means most
of the space in atom is empty
ev
b. Since some of the α-particles are deflected to certain angles, it means that
there is positively mass present in atom
c. Since only some of the α-particles suffered large deflections, the positively
hi
charged mass must be occupying very small space

d. Strong deflections or even bouncing back of α-particles from metal foil
Ac
were due to direct collision with positively charged mass in atom

Rutherford’s model of atom: This model explained that atom consists
ofnucleus which is concentrated in a very small volume. The nucleus
comprisesof protons and neutrons. The electrons revolve around the nucleus in
fixedorbits. Electrons and nucleus are held together by electrostatic forces
ofattraction.
Drawbacks of Rutherford’s model of atom:
a. According to Rutherford’s model of atom, electrons which are negatively
charged particles revolve around the nucleus in fixed orbits. Thus,
18

b. theelectrons undergo acceleration. According to electromagnetic theory of

Maxwell, a charged particle undergoing acceleration should
emitelectromagnetic radiation. Thus, an electron in an orbit should
emitradiation. Thus, the orbit should shrink. But this does not happen.
c. The model does not give any information about how electrons
aredistributed around nucleus and what are energies of these electrons
Isotopes: These are the atoms of the same element having the same
atomicnumber but different mass number.e g 1H1,1H2,1H3
Isobars: Isobars are the atoms of different elements having the same
massnumber but different atomic number.e g 18Ar40 , 20Ca40
y
Isoelectronic species: These are those species which have the same numberof
em
electrons.
Electromagnetic radiations: The radiations which are associated
withelectrical and magnetic fields are called electromagnetic radiations. When
anelectrically charged particle moves under acceleration, alternating
electricaland magnetic fields are produced and transmitted. These fields
ad
aretransmitted in the form of waves. These waves are called
electromagneticwaves or electromagnetic radiations.
Properties of electromagnetic radiations:
Ac
a. Oscillating electric and magnetic field are produced by oscillating charged
particles. These fields are perpendicular to each other and both
areperpendicular to the direction of propagation of the wave.
b. They do not need a medium to travel. That means they can even travel in
vacuum.
s
Characteristics of electromagnetic radiations:

er
a. Wavelength: It may be defined as the distance between two

neighbouring crests or troughs of wave as shown. It is denoted by λ.
b. Frequency (ν): It may be defined as the number of waves which
ev
passthrough a particular point in one second.

c. Velocity (v): It is defined as the distance travelled by a wave in
onesecond. In vacuum all types of electromagnetic radiations travel with
hi
thesame velocity. Its value is 3 X108m sec-1. It is denoted by v

d. Wave number: Wave number is defined as the number of wavelengths
per unit length.
Ac
Velocity = frequency x wavelength c = νλ

Planck's Quantum Theory-
o The radiant energy is emitted or absorbed not continuously but
discontinuously in the form of small discrete packets of energy called
‘quantum’. In case of light , the quantum of energy is called a ‘photon’
o The energy of each quantum is directly proportional to the frequency of
the radiation, i.e. E α υ or E= hυ where h= Planck’s constant =
-27
6.626 x 10 Js
o Energy is always emitted or absorbed as integral multiple of this
quantum. E=nhυ Where n=1,2,3,4,.....
19

Black body: An ideal body, which emits and absorbs all frequencies, is calleda
black body. The radiation emitted by such a body is called black
bodyradiation.
Photoelectric effect: The phenomenon of ejection of electrons from thesurface
of metal when light of suitable frequency strikes it is calledphotoelectric effect.
The ejected electrons are called photoelectrons.
Experimental results observed for the experiment of Photoelectric effect-
o When beam of light falls on a metal surface electrons are
ejectedimmediately.
o Number of electrons ejected is proportional to intensity or brightness of
y
light
em
o Threshold frequency (vo): For each metal there is a
characteristicminimum frequency below which photoelectric effect is
not observed. Thisis called threshold frequency.
o If frequency of light is less than the threshold frequency there is
noejection of electrons no matter how long it falls on surface or how
ad
high isits intensity.
Photoelectric work function (Wo): The minimum energy required to
ejectelectrons is called photoelectric work function.Wo= hvo
Ac
Energy of the ejected electrons :
Dual behavior of electromagnetic radiation- The light possesses both particle

and wave like properties, i.e., light has dual behavior . whenever radiation
s
interacts with matter, it displays particle like properties.(Black body radiation

er
and photoelectric effect) Wave like properties are exhibited when it

propagates(interference an diffraction)
When a white light is passed through a prism, it splits into a series ofcoloured
ev
bands known as spectrum.

Spectrum is of two types: continuous and line spectrum
a. The spectrum which consists of all the wavelengths is called
continuous
hi
spectrum.
b. A spectrum in which only specific wavelengths are present is known
Ac
as a line
spectrum. It has bright lines with dark spaces between them.
Electromagnetic spectrum is a continuous spectrum. It consists of a range
ofelectromagnetic radiations arranged in the order of increasing wavelengths
ordecreasing frequencies. It extends from radio waves to gamma rays.
Spectrum is also classified as emission and line spectrum.
o Emission spectrum: The spectrum of radiationemitted by a substance
that has absorbed energy is called an emissionspectrum.
o Absorption spectrum is the spectrum obtained when radiation is
passedthrough a sample of material. The sample absorbs radiation of
20

certainwavelengths. The wavelengths which are absorbed are missing

and comeas dark lines.
The study of emission or absorption spectra is referred as spectroscopy.
Spectral Lines for atomic hydrogen:
y
Rydberg equation
em
R = Rydberg’s constant = 109677 cm-1
Bohr’s model for hydrogen atom:
a. An electron in the hydrogen atom can move around the nucleus in a circular
ad
path of fixed radius and energy. These paths are called orbits orenergy
levels. These orbits are arranged concentrically around thenucleus.
b. As long as an electron remains in a particular orbit, it does not lose or gain
Ac
energy and its energy remains constant.
c. When transition occurs between two stationary states that differ inenergy,
the frequency of the radiation absorbed or emitted can becalculated
s
d. An electron can move only in those orbits for which its angularmomentum
er
is an integral multiple of h/2π

ev
The radius of the nth orbit is given byrn =52.9 pm x n2

Z
hi
energy of electron in nth orbit is :

Ac
Limitations of Bohr’s model of atom:

a. Bohr’s model failed to account for the finer details of the hydrogen
spectrum.
b. Bohr’s model was also unable to explain spectrum of atoms containing
more than one electron.
Dual behavior of matter: de Broglie proposed that matter exhibits
dualbehavior i.e. matter shows both particle and wave nature. de Broglie’s
relation is
21

Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle: It states that it is impossible to

determine simultaneously, the exact position and exact momentum (or
velocity) of an electron.The product of their uncertainties is always equal to or
greater than h/4π.
Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle rules out the existence of definite pathsor
y
trajectories of electrons and other similar particles
Failure of Bohr’s model:
em
a. It ignores the dual behavior of matter.
b. It contradicts Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.
Classical mechanics is based on Newton’s laws of motion. It
successfullydescribes the motion of macroscopic particles but fails in the case
ad
ofmicroscopic particles.
Reason: Classical mechanics ignores the concept of dual behaviour of matter
especially for sub-atomic particles and the Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.
Ac
Quantum mechanics is a theoretical science that deals with the study of
themotions of the microscopic objects that have both observable wave like
andparticle like properties.
Quantum mechanics is based on a fundamental equation which is
calledSchrodinger equation.
s
Schrodinger’s equation: For a system (such as an atom or a molecule

er
whoseenergy does not change with time) the Schrödinger equation is written
as:
ev
hi
When Schrödinger equation is solved for hydrogen atom, the solution givesthe
Ac
possible energy levels the electron can occupy and the correspondingwave
function(s) of the electron associated with each energy level.Out of the
possible values, only certain solutions are permitted. Eachpermitted solution is
highly significant as it corresponds to a definite energystate. Thus, we can say
that energy is quantized.
ψ gives us the amplitude of wave. The value of ψhas no physicalsignificance.
Ψ2gives us the region in which the probability of finding an electron
ismaximum. It is called probability density.
22

Orbital: The region of space around the nucleus where the probability
offinding an electron is maximum is called an orbital.
Quantum numbers: There are a set of four quantum numbers which specifythe
energy, size, shape and orientation of an orbital. To specify an orbital only
three quantum numbers are required while to specify an electron all four
quantum numbers are required.
Principal quantum number (n):It identifies shell, determines sizes and
y
em
energy of orbitals
Azimuthal quantum number (l): Azimuthal quantum number. ‘l’ is also
known as orbital angular momentum or subsidiary quantum number. l. It
ad
identifies sub-shell, determines the shape of orbitals, energy of orbitals in
multi-electron atoms along with principal quantum number and orbital angular
momentum, i.e., The number of orbitals in a subshell = 2l + 1. For a
Ac
given value of n, it can have n values ranging from 0 to n-1. Total number of
subshells in a particular shell is equal to the value of n.
Subshell s p d f g
notation
s
Value of ‘l’ 0 1 2 3 4
Number of 1 3 5 7 9
er
orbitals
Magnetic quantum number or Magnetic orbital quantum number (ml):
ev
Itgives information about the spatial orientation of the orbital with respect
tostandard set of co-ordinate axis.For any sub-shell (defined by ‘l’ value) 2l+1
values of ml are possible.For each value of l, ml = – l, – (l –1), – (l–2)... 0,1...
(l – 2), (l–1), l
hi
Electron spin quantum number (ms): It refers to orientation of the spin of

theelectron. It can have two values +1/2 and -1/2. +1/2 identifies the
Ac
clockwisespin and -1/2 identifies the anti- clockwise spin.

The region where this probability density function reduces to zero is
callednodal surfaces or simply nodes.
Radial nodes: Radial nodes occur when the probability density of wave
functionfor the electron is zero on a spherical surface of a particular radius.
Numberof radial nodes = n – l – 1
Angular nodes: Angular nodes occur when the probability density
wavefunction for the electron is zero along the directions specified by a
particularangle. Number of angular nodes = l
Total number of nodes = n – 1
23

Degenerate orbitals: Orbitals having the same energy are called

degenerateorbitals.
Shape of p and d-orbitals
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
Shielding effect or screening effect: Due to the presence of electrons in

theinner shells, the electron in the outer shell will not experience the full
positivecharge on the nucleus.
So, due to the screening effect, the net positive charge experienced by
theelectron from the nucleus is lowered and is known as effective nuclear
charge. Effective nuclear charge experienced by the orbital decreases with
increase of azimuthal quantum number (l).
Aufbau Principle: In the ground state of the atoms, the orbitals are filled
inorder of their increasing energies
24

n+l rule-Orbitals with lower value of (n+l) have lower energy. If two orbitals
have the same value of (n+l) then orbital with lower value of nwill have lower
energy.
The order in which the orbitals are filled isas follows:
1s, 2s, 2p, 3s, 3p, 4s, 3d, 4p, 5s, 4d, 5p, 4f, 5d, 6p, 7s...
Pauli Exclusion Principle: No two electrons in an atom can have the same
setof four quantum numbers. Only two electrons may exist in the same
orbitaland these electrons must have opposite spin.
Hund’s rule of maximum multiplicity: Pairing of electrons in the
orbitalsbelonging to the same subshell (p, d or f) does not take place until
y
eachorbital belonging to that subshell has got one electron each i.e., it is
em
singlyoccupied.
Electronic configuration of atoms:Arrangement of electrons in different
orbitals of an atom. The electronic configuration of differentatoms can be
represented in two ways.
a. sapbdc...... notation.
ad
b. Orbital diagram:, each orbital of the subshell is represented by a box and the
electron is represented by an arrow (↑) a positive spin or an arrow (↓) a negative
spin.
Ac
Stability of completely filled and half filled subshells:
a. Symmetrical distribution of electrons- the completely filled or half filled
sub-shells have
symmetrical distribution of electrons in them and are more stable.
b. Exchange energy-The two or more electrons with the same spin present in
s
the degenerate orbitals of a sub-shell can exchange their position and the
er
energy released due to this exchange is called exchange energy. The

number of exchanges is maximum when the subshell is either half filled or
completely filled. As a result the exchange energy is maximum and so is
ev
the stability.
ONE MARK QUESTIONS
1. Neutrons can be found in all atomic nuclei except in one case. Which is this
hi
atomic nucleus and what does it consists of?

Ans. Hydrogen atom. It consists of only one proton.
2. Calculate wave number of yellow radiations having wavelength of 5800 A0.
Ac
Ans. Wave number = 1/ wavelength

Wavelength = 5800 A0= 5800 x 10-10 m
Wave number = 1/5800 x 10-10 m = 1.72 x 106 m-1
3. What are the values of n and l for 2p orbital?
Ans. n=2 and l= 1
4. Which of the following orbitals are not possible? 1p, 2s, 3f and 4d
Ans. 1p and 3f are not possible.
5. Write the electronic configuration of the element having atomic number 24.
Ans. 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5 4s1
6. What atoms are indicated by the following electronic configurations?
25

a. 1s2 2s2 2p1 b. [Ar]4s2 3d1

Ans. a. Boron b. Scandium
7. What is the relationship between frequency and wavelength of light?
Ans. velocity of light = frequency x wavelength. Frequency and wavelength are
inversely proportional to each other.
8. State Pauli Exclusion Principle.
Ans. No two electrons in an atom can have the same set of four quantum numbers
or an orbital can have maximum two electrons and these must have opposite spin.
9. When α- rays hit a thin foil of gold, very few α- particles is deflected back.
What does it prove?
y
Ans. There is a very small heavy body present within the atom.
10. What is the difference between a quantum and a photon?
em
Ans. The smallest packet of energy of any radiation is called a quantum whereas
that of light is called photon.
TWO MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Write the complete symbol for the atom with the given atomic number (Z) and
ad
mass number(A). (a) Z = 17, A = 35 (b) Z = 92 , A = 233
35 233
Ans. (a) 17Cl (b) 92U
2. Using s,p,d and f notation, describe the orbital with the following quantum
Ac
numbers-
(a) n=1,l=0 (b) n=3, l=1 (c) n=4, l=2 (d) n=4, l=3
Ans. (a) 1s (b) 3p (c)4d (d) 4f
3. How many electrons in an atom have the following quantum numbers?
a. n=4, ms= -1/2 b. n =3 , l=o
s
Ans. (a) 16 electrons (b) 2 electrons.

4. An element with mass number 81 contains 31.7 % more neutrons as compared
er
to protons. Assign the atomic symbol.

Ans. Mass number = 81, i.e., p + n = 81
ev
If protons = x, then neutrons = x + 31.7 X x = 1.317 x

100
x+1.317x = 81 or 2.317x = 81
x=35
hi
Thus proton = 35, i.e., atomic no. = 35

Hence symbol is 8135Br
Ac
5. (i) The energy associated with the first orbit in the hydrogen atom is -2.18 x
10-18J/atom. What is the energy associated with the fifth orbit
(ii) Calculate the radius of Bohr’s fifth orbit for hydrogen atom.
Ans. (i) En = -2.18 x 10-18/ n2 E5 = -2.18 x 10-18/ 52 = -8.72 x 10-20 J
(ii) For H atom, rn= 0.529 x n2 r5 = 0.529 x 52 = 13.225 A0= 1.3225 nm
6. Explain , giving reasons, which of the following sets of quantum numbers are
not possible.
(a) n=0, l=0; ml = 0, ms= + ½ (c)n=1, l=0; ml = 0, ms= - ½
(b) n=1, l=1; ml =- 0, ms= + ½ (d) n=2, l=1; ml = 0, ms= + ½
Ans. (a) Not possible because n≠ 0 (c) Not possible because when n=1, l≠1
26

(b) Possible (d) Possible

7. (a)What is the lowest value of n that allows g orbitals to exist?
(b)An electron is in one of the 3d orbitals, Give the possible values of n,l and
mlfor this electron.
Ans.(a) minimum value of n= 5
(b)n=3, l=2, ml = -2, -1, 0, +1, +2
8. Calculate the total number of angular nodes and radial nodes present in 30
orbitals.
Ans. For 3p orbitals, n=3, l= 1
Number of angular nodes = l= 1
y
Number of radial nodes = n-l-1 = 3-1-1= 1
9. Mention the draw backs of Rutherford’s atomic model.
em
Ans. 1. It could not explain the stability of an atom.
2. It could not explain the line spectrum of H- atom.
10. State de-Broglie concept of dual nature of matter. How do dual nature of
electron verified?
ad
Ans. Just as light has dual nature, every material particle in motion has dual nature
(particle nature and wave nature). The wave nature has been verified by Davisson
and Germer’sexperiment whereas particle nature by scintillation experiment.
THREE MARKS QUESTIONS
Ac
1. State (a)Hund’s Rule of maximum Multiplicity (b) Aufbau Principle (c) n+l
rule
Ans.(a) Pairing of electrons in the orbitals belonging to the same subshell (p, d or
f) does not takeplace until each orbital belonging to that subshell has got one
s
electron each i.e., it is singly occupied.

(b)In the ground state of the atoms, the orbitals are filled inorder of their
er
increasing energies
(c) Orbitals with lower value of (n+l) have lower energy.If two orbitals have the
same value of (n+l) then orbital with lower value of n will have lower energy.
ev
2. Write down the quantum numbers n and l for the following orbitals
a. 2p b. 3d c. 5f
Ans. a. n=2, l= 1 b. n= 3, l=2 c. n= 5, l=3
hi
3. Write the 3 points of difference between orbit and orbital.

Ans.
Ac
Orbit orbital
1. An orbit is a well defined 1. An orbital is the three dimensional
circular path around the space around the nucleus within
nucleus in which the which the probability of finding an
electrons revolve electron is maximum(upto 90 %)
2. It represents the planar 2. It represents the three dimensional
motion of an electron around motion of an electron around the
the nucleus nucleus
3. All orbits are circular and 3. Different orbitals have different
disc like shapes, i.e., s-orbitals are spherically
symmetrical, p-orbitals are dumb-bell
shaped and so on.
27

4. State Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.calculate the uncertainty in the

position of an electron if the uncertainty in its velocity is 5.7 x 10 5 m/s.
Ans. It states that it is impossible to determine simultaneously, the exact position
and exact momentum (or velocity) of an electron. The product of their
uncertainties is always equal to or greater than h/4π.
Δx x (m x Δv) = h/4ᴨ
Δx = h/4ᴨ x m x Δv = 6.6 x 10-34 = 1.0 x 10-10 m
4 x 3.14 x 9.1 x 10-31 x 5.7 x 105
5. Write 3 points of differences between electromagnetic waves and matterwaves.
y
Electromagnetic waves Matter waves
em
1. These are associated with 1. These are not associated with
electric and magnetic electric and magnetic field.
fields
2. They do not require any 2. They require medium for
medium for propagation. propagation
ad
3. They travel with the same 3. They travel with lower speeds
speed a that of light not constanr for all matter
waves
Ac
6. (i) Calculate the number of electrons which will together weigh one gram.
(ii) Calculate the mass and charge of one mole of electrons
Ans. (i) Mass of one electron = 9.10939 × 10–31 kg

s
Number of electrons that weigh 9.10939 × 10–31 kg = 1

er
Number of electrons that will weigh 1 g = (1 × 10–3kg)

ev
hi
= 0.1098 × 10–3 + 31
= 0.1098 × 1028
Ac
= 1.098 × 1027
(ii) Mass of one electron = 9.10939 × 10–31 kg
Mass of one mole of electron = (6.022 × 1023) × (9.10939 ×10–31 kg)
= 5.48 × 10–7 kg
28

Charge on one electron = 1.6022 × 10–19coulomb
Charge on one mole of electron = (1.6022 × 10–19C) (6.022 × 1023)
= 9.65 × 104 C
7. Find energy of each of the photons which

(i) correspond to light of frequency 3× 1015Hz.
(ii) have wavelength of 0.50 Å.
y
Ans.(i) Energy (E) of a photon is given by the expression,
em
E=
Where,
h = Planck’s constant = 6.626 × 10–34Js ν = frequency of light = 3 × 1015Hz
Substituting the values in the given expression ofE:
E = (6.626 × 10–34) (3 × 1015) E = 1.988 × 10–18J
ad
(ii) Energy (E) of a photon having wavelength (λ)is given by the expression,
Ac
h = Planck’s constant = 6.626 × 10–34Js
c = velocity of light in vacuum = 3 × 108m/s
s
Substituting the values in the given expression of E:

er
ev
8. What is the wavelength of light emitted when the electron in a hydrogen atom
undergoes transition from an energy level with n = 4 to an energy level with n
hi
= 2?
Ans.Theni= 4 to nf= 2 transition will give rise to a spectral line of the Balmer
Ac
series. The energy involved in the transition is given by the relation,
29

Substituting the values in the given expression of E:
E =– (4.0875 × 10–19 J)
y
The negative sign indicates the energy of emission.
em
Wavelength of light emitted
ad
Substituting the values in the given expression of λ:
Ac
s
er
9. An atom of an element contains 29 electrons and 35 neutrons. Deduce (i)the

number of protons and (ii) the electronic configuration of the element (iii)
ev
Identify the element .
Ans.(i)For an atom to be neutral, the number of protons is equal to the number

hi
of electrons.
∴ Number of protons in the atom of the given element = 29
(ii) The electronic configuration of the atom is 1s22s2 2p6 3s2 3p64s2 3d10
Ac
(iii) Copper
10. Give the number of electrons in the species , H2 and
Ans. Number of electrons present in hydrogen molecule (H2) = 1 + 1 = 2
∴ Number of electrons in =2–1=1
Number of electrons in H2 = 1 + 1 = 2
Number of electrons present in oxygen molecule (O 2) = 8 + 8 = 16
∴ Number of electrons in = 16 – 1 = 15
FIVE MARKS QUESTIONS WITH ANSWERS

30

1. What are the draw backs of Bohr’s atomic model? Show that the
circumference of the Bohr orbit for the hydrogen atom is an integral multiple
of the de Broglie wavelength associated with the electron revolving around the
orbit.
Ans.1.Bohr’s model failed to account for the finer details of the hydrogen spectrum.
2. Bohr’s model was also unable to explain spectrum of atoms containing more
than one electron.
3. Bohr’s model was unable to explain Zeeman effect and Stark effect i
4. Bohr’s model could not explain the ability of atoms to form molecules by
chemical bonds
y
Since a hydrogen atom has only one electron, according to Bohr’s
postulate, the angular momentum of that electron is given by:
em
Where, n = 1, 2, 3, …
According to de Broglie’s equation:
ad
Substituting the value of ‘mv’ from expression (2) in expression (1):
Ac
Since‘2πr’represents the circumference of the Bohr orbit (r), it is proved by
s
equation (3) that the circumference of the Bohr orbit of the hydrogen atom is
an integral multiple of de Broglie’s wavelength associated with the electron
er
revolving around the orbit.

2. State photo electric effect. The work function for caesium atom is 1.9 eV.
ev
Calculate (a) the threshold wavelength and (b) the threshold frequency of the
radiation. If the caesium element is irradiated with awavelength 500 nm,
calculate the kinetic energy and the velocity of the ejected photoelectron.
hi
Ans. Photoelectric effect: The phenomenon of ejection of electrons from the

surface of metal when light of suitable frequency strikes it is called
photoelectric effect. The ejected electrons are called photoelectrons.
Ac
It is given that the work function (W0) for caesium atom is 1.9 eV.
(a) From the expression, , we get:
Where,
λ0 = threshold wavelength
h = Planck’s constant
c = velocity of radiation
Substituting the values in the given expression of (λ0):
31

6.53 × 10–7 m
Hence, the threshold wavelength is 653 nm.
(b) From the expression, , we get:
Where,
y
ν0= threshold frequency
em
h = Planck’s constant
Substituting the values in the given expression ofν0:
(1 eV = 1.602 × 10–19J)
ad
ν0= 4.593 × 1014s–1
Hence, the threshold frequency of radiation (ν0) is 4.593 × 1014s–1.
(c) According to the question:
Ac
Wavelength used in irradiation (λ) = 500 nm
Kinetic energy = h (ν – ν0)
s
er
ev
= 9.3149 × 10–20 J
hi
Kinetic energy of the ejected photoelectron = 9.3149 × 10 –20J

Ac
Since K.E
v = 4.52 × 105ms–1
Hence, the velocity of the ejected photoelectron (v) is 4.52 × 105ms–1.
3. (a)The quantum numbers of six electrons are given below. Arrange them in
order of increasing energies. If any of these combination(s) has/have the same
energy lists:
32

1. n= 4, l = 2, ml= –2 , ms= –1/2

2. n= 3, l = 2, ml= 1 , ms= +1/2
3. n= 4, l = 1, ml= 0 , ms= +1/2
4. n = 3, l= 2, ml= –2 , ms= –1/2
5. n = 3, l= 1, ml= –1 ,ms= +1/2
6. n = 4, l= 1, ml= 0 , ms= +1/2
(b)Among the following pairs of orbitals which orbital will experience the
larger effective nuclearcharge? (i) 2s and 3s, (ii) 4d and 4f, (iii) 3d and 3p
Ans.(a)Forn = 4 and l = 2, the orbital occupied is 4d.
For n = 3 and l = 2, the orbital occupied is 3d.
y
For n = 4 and l = 1, the orbital occupied is 4p.
Hence, the six electrons i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are present in the 4d, 3d, 4p,
em
3d, 3p, and 4p orbitals respectively.
Therefore, the increasing order of energies is 5(3p) < 2(3d) = 4(3d) < 3(4p) =
6(4p) < 1 (4d).
(b)Nuclear charge is defined as the net positive charge experienced by an
ad
electron in the orbital of a multi-electron atom. The closer the orbital, the greater
is the nuclear charge experienced by the electron (s) in it.
(i) The electron(s) present in the 2s orbital will experience greater nuclear
Ac
charge (being closer to the nucleus) than the electron(s) in the 3s orbital.
(ii) 4d will experience greater nuclear charge than 4fsince 4d is closer to the
nucleus.
(iii) 3p will experience greater nuclear charge since it is closer to the nucleus
than 3f.
s
4. (i) The unpaired electrons in Al and Si are present in 3p orbital. Which

electrons will experience more effective nuclear charge from the nucleus?
er
(ii) Indicate the number of unpaired electrons in: (a) P, (b) Si, (c) Cr, (d) Fe
Ans. (i) the electrons in the 3p orbital of silicon will experience a more
ev
effective nuclear charge than aluminium.

(ii) (a) Phosphorus (P):
Atomic number = 15
The electronic configuration of P is:1s2 2s2 2p63s2 3p3
hi
The orbital picture of P can be represented as:

Ac
From the orbital picture, phosphorus has three unpaired electrons.

(b) Silicon (Si):
Atomic number = 14
The electronic configuration of Si is:1s2 2s2 2p6 3s23p2
The orbital picture of Si can be represented as:
From the orbital picture, silicon has two unpaired electrons.

(c) Chromium (Cr):
Atomic number = 24
33

The electronic configuration of Cr is:1s2 2s2 2p6 3s23p6 4s1 3d5

The orbital picture of chromium is:
From the orbital picture, chromium has six unpaired electrons.

(d) Iron (Fe):
Atomic number = 26
The electronic configuration is:1s2 2s2 2p6 3s23p6 4s2 3d6
The orbital picture of chromium is:
y
From the orbital picture, iron has four unpaired electrons.
em
HOTS QUESTIONS WITH ANSWERS
1. Give the name and atomic number of the inert gas atom in which the total
ad
number of d-electrons is equal to the difference between the numbers of total p
and total s electrons.
Ans. electronic configuration of Kr ( atomic no.=36) =1s2 2s2 2p6 3s23p63d104s24p6
Total no. of s-electrons = 8, total no. of p-electrons = 18. Difference = 10
Ac
No. of d- electrons = 10
2. What is the minimum product of uncertainty in position and momentum of an
electron?
Ans.h/4π
3. Which orbital is non-directional ?
s
Ans. s- orbital
er
4. What is the difference between the notations l and L ?

Ans. l represents the sub-shell and L represent shell.
5. How many electrons in an atom can have n + l = 6 ?
ev
Ans. 18
6. An anion A3+has 18 electrons. Write the atomic number of A.
Ans.15
hi
7. Arrange the electron (e), protons (p) and alpha particle (α) in the increasing
order for the values of e/m (charge/mass).
Ans..α<p < e
Ac
34

CHAPTER-3
CLASSIFICATION OF ELEMENTS AND PERIODICITY IN

PROPERTIES OF ELEMENTS
Mandeleev’s Periodic Law:- The properties of the elements are the periodic
function of their atomic masses.
Moseley, the English physicist showed that atomic number is more fundamental
property of an element than its atomic mass. Therefore, the position of an element
y
in the periodic table depends on its atomic number than its atomic mass.
em
Modern Periodic Law: The physical and chemical properties of elements are the
periodic functions of their atomic numbers.
Types of Elements: s-, p-, d- and f- blocks.
ad
MAIN GROUP ELEMENTS/ REPRESENTATIVE ELEMENTS:
The s- and p- block elements are called main group elements or representative
Ac
elements.
s- block elements: Group-1 (Alkali metals) and Group-2 elements (Alkaline

earth metals) which respectively have ns 1 and ns2 outermost electronic
configurations.
s
er
p- Block elements: They belongs to group- 13 to 18. The outer most electronic
configuration is ns2 np1-6. He (1s2) is a s- block element but is positioned with the
group 18 elements (ns2 np6) because it has completely filled valence shell and as
ev
a result, exhibits properties characteristic of other noble gases.
d- block elements (Transition elements) are the elements of group 3 to 12

hi
having outer electronic configuration (n-1) d1-10 ns1-2. Four transition series are
3d, 4d, 5d and 6d. The 6d- series is incomplete. Atomic radius generally
Ac
decreases across a period and increases as we descend the group.
f-Block elements (Inner- transition Series)
Lanthanoids charecterised by the filling of4 f-orbitals, are the elements following
lanthanum from 58Ce to 71Lu. Actinoids characterised by filling of 5f-orbitals, are
the elements following actinium from 70Th to 103Lr. Characteristic outer electronic
configuration is (n-2) f1-14 (n-1) d0-1 ns2.
35

Noble Gases: The gaseous elements of group 18 are called noble gases. The
general outermost electronic configuration of noble gases (except He) is ns 2 np6.
He exceptionally has 1s2 configuration. Thus the outermost shell of noble gases is
completely filled.
PERIODICITY: The repetition of similar properties after regular intervals is

called periodicity.
Cause of Periodicity: The properties of elements are the periodic repetition of

similar electronic configuration of elements as the atomic number increases.
y
em
ATOMIC PROPERTIES: The physical characteristics of the atom of an
element are called atomic properties. The properties such as atomic radius, ionic
radius, ionisation energy, electro-negativity, electron affinity and valence etc.,
called atomic properties.
ad
ATOMIC RADIUS- The distance from the centre of the nucleus to the
outermost shell of the electrons in the atom of any element is called its atomic
radius.
Ac
Periodicity- (a) In period- Atomic radius of elements decreases from left to right
in a period.
(b) In Group- Atomic radius of elements increases on moving top to bottom in a

s
group.
er
COVALENT RADIUS- Half the inter-nuclear distance between two similar

atoms of any element which are covalently bonded to each other by a single
ev
covalent bond is called covalent radius.
VAN DER WAALS’ RADIUS: Half the inter-nuclear separation between two
hi
similar adjacent atoms belonging to the two neighbouring molecules of the same
substance in the solid state is called the van der waals’radius of that atom.
Ac
METALLIC RADIUS: Half the distance between the nuclei of the two adjacent
metal atoms in a close packed lattice of the metal is called its metallic radius.
Van der Waals’radius > Metallic radius > Covalent radius
IONIC RADIUS: The effective distance from the centre of the nucleus of an ion
upto which it has an influence on its electron cloud is called its ionic radius.
36

A cation is smaller but the anion is larger than the parent atom. In case of iso-
electronic species, the cation with greater positive charge has smaller radius but
anion with greater negative charge has the larger radii.
IONISATION ENTHALPY: The ionisation enthalpy is the molar enthalpy

change accompanying the removal of an electron from a gaseous phase atom or
ion in its ground state. Thus enthalpy change for the reaction; M(g)→ M+(g) + e-
Is the ionisation enthalpy of the element M. Like ionisation energies for

successive ionisation, the successive ionisation enthalpy may also be termed as
y
2nd ionisation enthalpy (∆rH2), third ionisation enthalpy (∆rH3) etc. The term
em
ionisation enthalpy is taken for the first ionisation enthalpy, (∆ rH1) is expressed
in kg mol- or in eV.
Periodicity:
ad
i) Generally the ionisation enthalpies follow the order ( there are few
exceptions):
(∆rH1) < (∆rH2) < (∆rH3)
Ac
ii) The ionisation enthalpy decreases on moving top to bottom in a group.
iii) The ionisation enthalpy increases on moving from left to right in a period.
ELECTRON GAIN ENTHALPY: The electron gain enthalpy ((∆egH) is the

s
molar enthalpy change when an isolated gaseous atom or ion in its ground state
adds an electron to form the corresponding anion thus the enthalpy change for the
er
reaction; X(g) + e- → X-(g)
Is called the electron gain enthalpy (∆ eg H) of the element X. The∆eg H may be

ev
positive or negative.
The successive values for the addition of second, third etc. Electron, these are
hi
called second, third etc. electron gain enthalpies. For example,
e- → X-(g) ∆H= ∆eg H1 is called first electron gain

Ac
X(g) +
enthalpy
X-(g) + e- → X2-(g) ∆H= ∆eg H2 is called second electron gain

enthalpy
X2-(g) + e- → X3-(g) ∆H= ∆eg H3 is called third electron gain

enthalpy Usually the term electron gain enthalpy (∆egH) means the first electron
gain enthalpy.
37

Periodicity:
(i) In period- The electron gain enthalpy increases from left to right in a
period.
(ii) In group- The electron gain enthalpy decreases from top to bottom in a
group.
ELECTRONEGATIVITY: “The relative tendency of an atom in a molecule to

attract the shared pair of electrons towards itself is termed as its electro-
negativity.”
y
em
Periodicity:
(i) In period- The electro-negativity increases from left to right in a period.

(ii) In group- The electro-negativity decreases from top to bottom in a group.
ad
VALENCE ELECTRONS: The electrons present in outermost shell are called
as valence electron. Because the electrons in the outermost shell determine the
valency of an element.
Ac
VALENCY OF AN ELEMENT: The number of hydrogen or halogen atom or
double the number of oxygen atom, which combin with one atom of the element
is taken as its valency. According to the electronic concept of valency, “ the
number of electrons which an atom loses or gains or shares with other atom to
s
attain the noble gas configuration is termed as its valency.”

er
Periodicity:
ev
(i) In period- The valency first increases then decreases from left to right in a
period.
(ii) In group- The valency remains constant from top to bottom in a group.
hi
ELECTROPOSITIVE OR METALLIC CHARACTER: The tendency of an

element to lose electrons and forms positive ions (cations) is called
Ac
electropositive or metallic character. The elements having lower ionisation

energies have higher tendency to lose electrons, thus they are electropositive or
metallic in their behaviour.
Alkali metals are the most highly electropositive elements.
Periodicity: In period- The electropositive or metallic characters decreases from

left to right in a period.
38

In group- The electropositive or metallic characters increases from top

to bottom in a group.
ELECTRO-NEGATIVE OR NON- METALLIC CHARACTERS: the

tendency of an element to accept electrons to form an anion is called its non
metallic or electronegative character. The elements having high electro-negativity
have higher tendency to gain electrons and forms anion. So, the elements in the
upper right hand portion of the periodic table are electro-negative or non-metallic
in nature.
y
Periodicity:
em
(i) In period- The electro-negative or non- metallic characters increases from
left to right in a period.
(ii) In group- The electro-negative or non-metallic characters decreases from
ad
top to bottom in a group.
REACTIVITY OF METALS:
Ac
Periodicity:
(i) In period- The tendency of an element to lose electrons decreases in a

period. So the reactivity
s
of metals decreases from left to right in a period.

(ii) In group- The tendency of an element to lose electrons increases in a
er

of metals increases from top to bottom in a group.
ev
REACTIVITY OF NON- METALS:

hi
(i) In period- The tendency of an element to gain electrons increases in a

Ac
of non-metals increases from left to right in a period.

(ii) In group- The tendency of an element to gain electrons decreases in a
group. So the reactivity
of non-metals increases from top to bottom in a group.
39

SOLUBILITY OF ALKALI METALS CARBONATES AND

BICARBONATES:
PERIODICITY IN GROUP: The solubility of alkali metal carbonates and

bicarbonates in water increases down the group (From Lithium to Caesium).
SOLUBILITY OF ALKALINE EARTH METAL HYDROXIDES AND

SULPHATES:
PERIODICITY IN GROUP: The solubility of alkaline earth metal hydroxide
y
and sulphates in water increases down the group (From Beryllium to Barium).
em
BASIC STRENGTH OF ALKALINE EARTH METAL HYDROXIDES:
PERIODICITY IN GROUP: The basic strength of alkaline earth metal

hydroxide in water increases down the group (From Beryllium to Barium), i.e.,
ad
Be(OH)2 < Mg(OH)2 < Ca(OH)2 < Sr(OH)2 < Ba(OH)2
Basic strength increases

Ac
THERMAL STABILITY OF CARBONATES OF ALKALI AND
ALKALINE EARTH METALS:
Except lithium carbonate, (LiCO3), the carbonates of all other alkali metals are
s
stable towards heat, i.e., carbonates of alkali metals (except LiCO 3) do not
er
decompose on heating. LiCO3 decomposes on heating to give lithium oxide

(LiCO3).
ev
The carbonates of alkaline earth metals are relatively less stable. On heating, they
decompose to give corresponding oxide and CO 2 gas. The decomposition
temperature for alkaline earth metal carbonates increases as we go down the
hi
group.
Anomalous Properties of Second Period Elements

Ac
Their anomalous behaviour is attributed to their small size, large charge/radius

ratio, high electro negativity, non- availability of d- orbitals in their valence shell.
the first member of each group of p-Block elements displays greater ability to
form pp-pp multiple bonds to itself (e.g. C=C, C≡C O=O, N≡N) and to other
second period elements (e.g. C=O, C≡N, N=O) compared to subsequent member
of the group.
40

ONE MARK QUESTIONS
Q1. Select the species which are iso-electronic (same number of electron) with
each other.
(1) Ne (2) Cl- (3) Ca2+ (4) Rb+
Ans-The Cl- and Ca2+. Both have 18 e_ each.
Q.2. What the elements of a group have common among them?
y
em
Ans- They have same number of electrons in the valence shell.
Q.3. What the s- and p- block elements are collectively called?
Ans- Representative elements.
ad
Q.4. Define atomic radius.
Ans- The one-half the distance between the nuclei of two covalently bonded
Ac
atoms of the same element in a molecule is called as atomic radius.
Q.5. State the modern periodic law.
Ans- The physical and chemical properties of the elements are the periodic
s
function of their atomic numbers.

er
Q.6. Name the groups of elements classified as s-, p- and d- blocks.
Ans- s- block= 1,2 (including He), p- block= 13 to 18 (except He), d- block= 3 to

ev
12.
Q.7. Define the term ionisation enthalpy.

hi
Ans- The energy required to remove the outer most electron from the valence
shell of an isolated gaseous atom is called as ionisation enthalpy.
Ac
Q.8.In how many groups and periods the elements in modern periodic table are
classified?
Ans- In 18 groups and 7 periods.
Q.9. What do you mean by electronic configuration of the elements?
41

Ans- The systematic distribution of the electrons among the orbitals of an atom
of an element according to increasing order of their energies is called as
electronic configuration of that element.
TWO MARKS QUESTIONS
Q.1. Describe the two merits of long form periodic table over the Mendeleev’s
periodic table?
Ans- 1. It removed the anomalies about the position of isotopes which existed in
y
the Mendeleev’s table.
2. It relates the position of an element in the periodic table with its electronic
em
configuration.
Q.2. What is a period in the periodic table? How do atomic sizes change in a
period with an increase in atomic number?
ad
Ans- The horizontal rows in periodic table are called as periods. The atomic sizes
decrease in a period with an increase in atomic number.
Q.3. The outer electronic configuration of some elements are:

Ac
(a) 3s2 3p4 (b) 3d104s2 (c) 3s2 3p6 4s2 (d) 6s2 4f3
To which block of elements in the periodic table each of these belongs?

s
Ans- (a) p- Block (b) d- Block (c) s- Block (d) f- Block

er
Q.4. What is meant by periodicity in properties of elements? What is the reason

behind this?
ev
Ans- The repetition of similar properties after regular intervals is called as

periodicity. It is due to the similarity in the outer electronic configurations which
gives rise to the periodic properties of the elements.
hi
Q.5. How do atomic radii vary in a group and a period?

Ac
Ans- In group- Atomic size increases on moving from top to bottom.
In period- Atomic size decreases on moving left to right in a period.
Q.6. Arrange the following in the order of increasing radii:
(a) I, I+, I- (b) F, Cl, Br
Ans- (a) I+ < I < I+ (b) O < N< P

42

Q.7. Name the factors which affect the ionisation enthalpy of an element.
Ans- (i) Size of atom or ion (ii) Nuclear charge (iii) Electronic configuration
(iv) Screening effect (v) Penetration effect of the electrons
Q.8. How does ionisation enthalpy vary in a group and a period?

Ans- In Period- It increases from left to right
In group- It decreases down the group.
Q.9. Noble gases have zero electron gain enthalpy values. Explain.
y
Ans- Because the outer most shell of noble gases is completely filled and no
em
more electrons can be added.
Q.10. Elements in the same group have equal valency. Comment on it.
Ans- Because the general outer most electronic configurations of the elements of
ad
a group remain same and they contain equal number of electrons in their
respective outer most shells.
Ac
Q.1. The first ionisation enthalpy of magnesium is higher than that of sodium. On the
other hand, the second ionisation enthalpy of sodium is very much higher than that of
magnesium. Explain.
s
Ans- The 1st ionisation enthalpy of magnesium is higher than that of Na due to higher
er
nuclear charge and slightly smaller atomic radius of Mg than Na. After the loss of first
electron, Na+ formed has the electronic configuration of neon (2,8). The higher stability
ev
of the completely filled noble gas configuration leads to very high second ionisation
enthalpy for sodium. On the other hand, Mg+ formed after losing first electron still has
one more electron in its outermost (3s) orbital. As a result, the second ionisation
enthalpy of magnesium is much smaller than that of sodium.
hi
Q.2. What are the major differences between metals and non- metals?
Ac
Ans-
Property Metal Non- Metal
Nature Electropositive Electronegative
Type of ion Cation (Positively Charged) Anion (Negatively
formed Charged)
Reaction with Active metals displace Do not displace hydrogen
acids hydrogen
Oxides Basic Acidic
43

Q.3. Among the elements of the second period Li to Ne pick out the element:
(i) with the highest first ionisation energy(ii) with the highest electronegativity
(iii) with the largest atomic radius Give the reason for your choice.
Ans- (i) The ionisation energy increases on going from left to right. Therefore,
the element with the highest ionisation energy is Ne.
(ii) The electro negativity is electron- accepting tendency. This increases on

going from left to right and decreases down the group. Therefore, the element
y
with the highest electronegativity is F.
em
(iii) The atomic radius decreases across a period on going from left to right.
Thus, the first element of any period should have the largest atomic radii. Here,
Li has the largest atomic radii.
ad
Q.4. Arrange the following as stated:
(i)N2, O2, F2, Cl2 (Increasing order of bond dissociation energy)

Ac
(ii) F, Cl, Br, I (Increasing order of electron gain enthalpy)
(iii) F2, N2, Cl2, O2 (Increasing order of bond length)
Ans- (i) F2 < Cl2 < O2 < N2
(ii) I < Br < F < Cl

s
(iii) N2 < O2 < F2 < Cl2

er
Q.5. Why does the first ionisation enthalpy increase as we go from left to right
through a given period of the periodic table?
ev
Ans- In a period, the nuclear charge (the number of protons) increases on going
from left to right. The electron added to each element from left to right enters the
hi
same shell. This results in an increase of the effective nuclear charge across the
period on moving from left to right. As a result, the electron get more firmly
Ac
bound to the nucleus. This causes an increase in the first ionisation enthalpy
across the period.
Q.6. Use the periodic table to answer the following questions.
(i) Identify the element with five electrons in the outer sub-shell.
(ii) Identify an element that would tend to lose two electrons.
(iii) Identify an element that would tend to gain two electrons.

44

Ans- (i) Chlorine (ii) Magnesium (iii) Oxygen
Q.7. Explain why are cations smaller and anions larger in size than their parent
atoms?
Ans- (a) The cations are smaller than their parent atoms due to the following
reasons:
(i) Disappearance of the valence shell.
(ii) Increase of effective nuclear charge
(b) The anions are larger than their parent atoms due to the following
y
reason:
An increase in the number of electrons in the valence shell reduces
em
the effective nuclear charge due to greater mutual shielding by the electrons. As
a result, electron cloud expands, i.e., the ionic radius increases.
Q.8. Describe the theory associated with the radius of an atom as it
ad
(a) gains an electron (b) loses an electron
Ans- (a) When an atom gains an electron, its size increases. When an electron is
Ac
added, the number of electrons goes up by one. This results in an increase in
repulsion among the electrons. However, the number of protons remains the
same. As a result, the effective nuclear charge of the atom decreases and the
radius of the atom increases.
s
(b) When an atom loses an electron, the number of electrons decreases by one
er
while the nuclear charge remains the same. Therefore, the interelectronic
repulsions in the atom decrease. As a result, the effective nuclear charge
increases. Hence, the radius of the atom decreases.
ev
Q.9. How does atomic radius vary in a period and in a group? How do you
explain the variation?
hi
Ans- Atomic radius generally decreases from left to right across a period. This is
because within a period, the outer electrons are present in the same valence shell
Ac
and the atomic number increases from left to right across a period, resulting in an
increased effective nuclear charge. As a result, the attraction of electrons to the
nucleus increases.
On the other hand, the atomic radius generally increases down a group. This is
because down a group, the principal quantum number (n) increases which results
in an increase of the distance between the nucleus and valence electrons.
45

Q.10. Consider the following species:
N3–, O2–, F–, Na+, Mg2+ and Al3+
(a) What is common in them?
(b) Arrange them in the order of increasing ionic radii.
Ans- (a) the same number of electrons (10 electrons). Hence, the given species
are isoelectronic.
y
(b) Al3+ < Mg2+ < Na+ < F– < O2– < N3–
em
FIVE MARKS QUESTIONS
Q.1. What is the cause of the periodicity in the properties of the elements? How
do the following properties vary in (a) a group and (b)in a period
ad
(i) electronegativity (ii) ionisation enthalpy (iii) Atomic size
Ans- It is due to the similarity in the outer electronic configurations which gives
Ac
rise to the periodic properties of the elements.
(a) In a group:
(i) Electronegativity- It decreases down the group.
s
(ii) Ionisation enthalpy- It decreases down the group.

er
(iii) Atomic size- It increases down the group.

(b) In a period:
(i) Electronegativity- Increases
ev
(ii) Ionisation enthalpy- Increases

(iii) Atomic size- Dereases.
hi
Q.2. The first (ΔiH1) and the second (ΔiH) ionization enthalpies (in kJ mol–1) and
the (ΔegH) electron gain enthalpy (in kJ mol–1) of a few elements are given
Ac
below:
Elements ΔiH ΔiH ΔegH

I 520 7300 –60
II 419 3051 –48
III 1681 3374 –328
IV 1008 1846 –295
V 2372 5251 +48
VI 738 1451 –40
46

Which of the above elements is likely to be :
(a) the least reactive element. (b) the most reactive metal.
(c) the most reactive non-metal. (d) the least reactive non-metal.
(e) the metal which can form a stable binary halide of the formula MX2,
(X=halogen).
(f) the metal which can form a predominantly stable covalent halide of the
formula MX (X=halogen)?
Ans- (a) Element V is likely to be the least reactive element. This is because it has
the highest first ionization enthalpy (ΔiH1) and a positive electron gain enthalpy
y
(ΔegH).
(b) Element II is likely to be the most reactive metal as it has the lowest first
em
ionization enthalpy (ΔiH1) and a low negative electron gain enthalpy (Δ egH).
(c) Element III is likely to be the most reactive non–metal as it has a high first
ionization enthalpy (ΔiH1) and the highest negative electron gain enthalpy (ΔegH).
(d) Element V is likely to be the least reactive non–metal since it has a very high
ad
first ionization enthalpy (ΔiH2) and a positive electron gain enthalpy (ΔegH).
(e) Element VI has a low negative electron gain enthalpy (Δ egH). Thus, it is a
metal. Further, it has the lowest second ionization enthalpy (Δ iH2). Hence, it can
form a stable binary halide of the formula MX2(X=halogen).
Ac
(f) Element I has low first ionization energy and high second ionization energy.
Therefore, it can form a predominantly stable covalent halide of the formula MX
(X=halogen).
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
47

CHAPTER-4
CHEMICAL BONDING AND MOLECULAR STRUCTURE
OCTET RULE- During a chemical reaction the atoms tend to adjust their
electronic arrangement in such a way that they achieve 8 e - in their outermost
electron. This is called octet rule.
CHEMICAL BOND- the chemical force which keeps the atoms in any molecule
together is called a chemical bond.
y
IONIC BOND- The columbic force of attraction which holds the appositively
em
charged ions together is called an ionic bond. An ionic bond is formed by the
complete transfer of one or more electrons from the atom of a metal to an atom of
non- metal.
ad
LATTICE ENTHALPY- The molar enthalpy change accompanying the complete
separation of the constituent particles that compose of the solids (such as ions for
ionic solid, molecules for molecular solids) under standard conditions is called
Ac
lattice enthalpy (∆lHo). The lattice enthalpy is a positive quantity.
ELECTRO VALENCY: The number of electrons lost or gain by an atom of an

element is called as electrovalency.
s
The element which give up electrons to form positive ions are said to have positive
valency, while the elements which accept electrons to form negative ions are said to
er
have negative valency.

ev
FORMATION OF AN IONIC BOND: It is favoured by, (i) the low ionisation

enthalpy of a metallic element which forms the cations, (ii) High electron gain
enthalpy of non- metallic element which forms the anions, (iii) Large lattice
hi
enthalpy i.e; the smaller size and the higher charge of the atoms.
COVALENCY:The number of electrons which an atom contributes towards

Ac
mutual sharing during the formation of a chemical bond called its covalency in that
compound.
SINGLE COVALENT BOND: A covalent bond formed by the mutual sharing of

one pair of electrons is called a single covalent bond, or simply a single bond. A
single covalent bond is represented by a small line (−) between the two atoms.
48

DOUBLE COVALENT BOND: A covalent bond formed by the mutual sharing of

two pair of electrons is called a double covalent bond, or simply a double bond. A
double covalent bond is represented by two small horizontal lines (=) between the
two atoms. E.g. O=O, O=C=O etc.
TRIPLE COVALENT BOND: A covalent bond formed by the mutual sharing of

three pair of electrons is called a triple covalent bond, or simply a triple bond. A
triple covalent bond is represented by three small horizontal lines (≡) between the
two atoms. E.g. N≡N, H-C≡C-H etc.
y
FORMATION OF A COVALENT BOND: Formation of a covalent bond is
em
favoured by
(i) High ionisation enthalpy of the combining elements.

(ii) Nearly equal electron gain enthalpy and equal electro-negativities of
ad
combining elements.
(iii) High nuclear charge and small atomic size of the combining elements.
POLAR COVALENT BOND: The bond between two unlike atoms which differ
Ac
in their affinities for electrons is said to be polar covalent bond. E.g. H-Cl
COORDINATE BOND: The bond formed when one sided sharing of electrons
take place is called a coordinate bond. Such a bond is also known as dative bond. It
s
is represented by an arrow (→) pointing towards the acceptor atom. E.g. H3N→BF3
er
Bond Length: Bond length is defined as the equilibrium distance between the
nuclei of two bonded atoms in a molecule
Bond Angle: It is defined as the angle between the orbitals containing bonding
ev
electron pairs around the central atom in a molecule/complex ion

Bond Enthalpy: It is defined as the amount of energy required to break one mole
of bonds of a particular type between two atoms in a gaseous state.
hi
Bond Order: In the Lewis description of covalent bond, the Bond Order is given
by the number of bonds between the two atoms in a molecule
Resonance:whenever a single Lewis structure cannot describe a molecule
Ac
accurately, a number of structures with similar energy, positions of nuclei, bonding

and non-bonding pairs of electrons are taken as the canonical structures of the
hybrid which describes the molecule accurately
Dipole moment : The product of the magnitude of the charge and the distance
between the centres of positive and negative charge.It is a vector quantity and is
represented by an arrow with its tail at the positive centre and head pointing towards
a negative centre. Dipole moment (μ) = charge (Q) × distance of separation (r)
49

SIGMA BOND: A covalent bond formed due to the overlapping of orbitals of the
two atoms along the line joining the two nuclei (orbital axis) is called sigma (σ)
bond. For example, the bond formed due to s-s and s-p, p-p overlapping along the
orbital axis are sigma bonds.
Pi- BOND: A covalent bond formed by the side wise overlapping of p- or d-

orbitals of two atoms is called as pi (π) bond. For example, the bond formed due to
the sideways overlapping of the two p- orbitals is a pi- bond.
HYDROGEN BOND: The bond between the hydrogen atom of one molecule and
y
a more electronegative element of same or another molecule is called as hydrogen
em
bond.
HYBRIDIZATION: The process of mixing of the atomic orbitals to form new

hybrid orbitals is called hybridization. All hybrid orbitals of a particular kind have
ad
equal energy, identical shapes and are symmetrically oriented in shape.
The hybrid orbitals are designed according to the type and the atomic orbitals
merging together, e.g.,
Ac
Electron
Molecu
Shape arrangeme Geometry Examples
s
le Type
nt† ‡
er
AX2E0 Linear BeCl2, HgCl2, CO2

ev
AX2E1 Bent
NO2−, SO2, O3, CCl2
hi
AX2E2 Bent
Ac
H2O, OF2
AX2E3 Linear
XeF2, I3−, XeCl2
50

Trigonal
AX3E0
planar
BF3, CO32−, NO3−, SO3
Trigonal
AX3E1
pyramidal
NH3, PCl3
y
AX3E2 T-shaped
em
ClF3, BrF3
Tetrahedr
AX4E0
ad
al
CH4, PO43−, SO42−, ClO4−
, XeO4
Ac
AX4E1 Seesaw
SF4
s
Square
AX4E2
planar
er
XeF4
ev
Trigonal
AX5E0 bipyramid
al
hi
PCl5
Square
Ac
AX5E1
pyramidal
ClF5, BrF5, XeOF4
Pentagon
AX5E2
al planar
XeF5-
51

Octahedra
AX6E0
l
SF6, WCl6
Pentagon
AX6E1 al XeOF5−, IOF52− [7]
pyramidal
y
Pentagon
al
em
AX7E0
bipyramid
al
IF7
ONE MARK QUESTIONS
ad
Q.1. What is the total number of sigma and pi bonds in the following molecules?
(a) C2H2 (b) C2H4

Ac
Ans- there are three sigma and two pi-bonds in C2H2.
there are five sigma bonds and one pi-bond in C2H4.

s
Q.2. Write the significance of a plus and a minus sign shown in representing the
er
orbitals.
Ans- Molecular orbitals are represented by wave functions. A plus sign in an orbital
ev
indicates a positive wave function while a minus sign in an orbital represents a

negative wave function.
Q.3. How do you express the bond strength in terms of bond order?
hi
Ans- Bond strength represents the extent of bonding between two atoms forming a
Ac
molecule. The larger the bond energy, the stronger is the bond and the greater is the
bond order.
Q.5. Define the bond length.
Ans- Bond length is defined as the equilibrium distance between the nuclei of two
bonded atoms in a molecule.
52

Q.6. Arrange the bonds in order of increasing ionic character in the molecules:
LiF, K2O, N2, SO2 and ClF3.
Ans- N2 < SO2 < ClF3 < K2O < LiF.
Q.7. The skeletal structure of CH3COOH as shown below is correct, but some of the
bonds are shown incorrectly. Write the correct Lewis structure for acetic acid.
y
em
Ans- The correct Lewis structure for acetic acid is as follows:
ad
Ac
Q.8. Define octet rule.
Ans- The elements tend to adjust the arrangement of their electrons in such a way
that they (except H and He) achieve eight electrons in their outermost shell. This is
called octet rule.
s
Q.9. Define lattice enthalpy.

er
Ans- The energy required when one mole of an ionic compound in crystalline form
is split into the constituent ions is called lattice enthalpy.
ev
Q.10. Which type of bond is formed when the atoms have zero difference in
electronegativity?
hi
Ans- Covalent bond.

Ac
TWO MARKS QUESTIONS
Q.1. Define hydrogen bond. Is it weaker or stronger than the van der Waals forces?
Ans- A hydrogen bond is defined as an attractive force acting between the hydrogen
attached to an electronegative atom of one molecule and an electronegative atom of
a different molecule (may be of the same kind).
There are two types of H-bonds:

53

(i) Intermolecular H-bond e.g., HF, H2O etc.
(ii) Intramolecular H-bond e.g., o-nitrophenol
Hydrogen bonds are stronger than Van der Walls forces since hydrogen bonds are
y
regarded as an extreme form of dipole-dipole interaction.
em
Q.2. Write the favourable factors for the formation of ionic bond.
Ans-(i) Low ionization enthalpy of metal atom.
ad
(ii) High electron gain enthalpy (Δeg H) of a non-metal atom.
(iii) High lattice energy of the compound formed.

Ac
Q.3. Although geometries of NH3 and H2O molecules are distorted tetrahedral, bond
angle in water is less than that of ammonia. Discuss.
Ans- The molecular geometry of NH3 and H2O can be shown as:
s
er
ev
The central atom (N) in NH3 has one lone pair and there are three bond pairs. In
H2O, there are two lone pairs and two bond pairs.
hi
The two lone pairs present in the oxygen atom of H2O molecule repels the two bond
pairs. This repulsion is stronger than the repulsion between the lone pair and the
three bond pairs on the nitrogen atom.
Ac
Since the repulsions on the bond pairs in H2O molecule are greater than that in NH3,
the bond angle in water is less than that of ammonia.
Q.4. Explain the important aspects of resonance with reference to the ion.
54

Ans- According to experimental findings, all carbon to oxygen bonds in are

equivalent. Hence, it is inadequate to represent ion by a single Lewis structure
having two single bonds and one double bond.
Therefore, carbonate ion is described as a resonance hybrid of the following

structures:
y
em
Q.5. H3PO3 can be represented by structures 1 and 2 shown below. Can these two
structures be taken as the canonical forms of the resonance hybrid representing
H3PO3? If not, give reasons for the same.
ad
Ac
Ans- The given structures cannot be taken as the canonical forms of the resonance
hybrid of H3PO3 because the positions of the atoms have changed.
s
er
Q.6. Use Lewis symbols to show electron transfer between the following atoms
to form cations and anions: (a) Ca and O (c) Al and N.
ev
Ans(a) Ca and O:
The electronic configurations of Ca and O are as follows:

hi
Ca: 2, 8, 8, 2 O: 2, 6
Ac
Oxygen requires two electrons more to complete its octet, whereas calcium has two
electrons more than the nearest noble gas i.e., Argon. Hence, the electron transfer
takes place as:
(b) Al and N:
55

The electronic configurations of Al and N are as follows:
Al: 2, 8, 3 N: 2, 5
Nitrogen is three electrons short of the nearest noble gas (Neon), whereas
aluminium has three electrons more than Neon. Hence, the electron transference can
be shown as:
y
Q.7. Although both CO2 and H2O are triatomic molecules, the shape of H2O
em
molecule is bent while that of CO2 is linear. Explain this on the basis of dipole
moment.
Ans- According to experimental results, the dipole moment of carbon dioxide is
ad
zero. This is possible only if the molecule is linear so that the dipole moments of C–
O bonds are equal and opposite to nullify each other.
Ac
Resultant μ = 0 D
H2O, on the other hand, has a dipole moment value of 1.84 D (though it is a
s
triatomic molecule as CO2). The value of the dipole moment suggests that the
er
structure of H2O molecule is bent where the dipole moment of O–H bonds are
unequal.
ev
hi
Q.8. Write the significance/applications of dipole moment.

Ac
Ans- Dipole moment is the measure of the polarity of a bond. It is used to

differentiate between polar and non-polar bonds since all non-polar molecules (e.g.
H2, O2) have zero dipole moments. It is also helpful in calculating the percentage
ionic character of a molecule.
56

Q.9. Use molecular orbital theory to explain why the Be 2 molecule does not exist.
Ans- The electronic configuration of Beryllium is .
The molecular orbital electronic configuration for Be 2 molecule can be written as:
Hence, the bond order for Be2 is
Where,
y
Nb = Number of electrons in bonding orbitals
em
Na = Number of electrons in anti-bonding orbitals
Bond order of Be2 =0
ad
A negative or zero bond order means that the molecule is unstable.
Hence, Be2 molecule does not exist.
Ac
Q.10. Distinguish between a sigma and a pi bond.
Ans- The following are the differences between sigma and pi-bonds:
s
Sigma (σ) Bond Pi (π) Bond

er
(a) It is formed by the end to end overlap It is formed by the lateral overlap of
of orbitals. orbitals.
ev
(b) The orbitals involved in the These bonds are formed by the overlap
overlapping are s–s, s–p, or p–p. of p–porbitals only.
hi
(c) It is a strong bond. It is weak bond.
(d) The electron cloud is symmetrical The electron cloud is not symmetrical.
Ac
about the line joining the two nuclei.
(e) It consists of one electron cloud, There are two electron clouds lying
which is symmetrical about the above and below the plane of the atomic
internuclear axis. nuclei.
(f) Free rotation about σ bonds is Rotation is restricted in case of pi-

possible. bonds.
Q.11. Explain with the help of suitable example polar covalent bond.
57

Ans- When two dissimilar atoms having different electronegativities combine to

form a covalent bond, the bond pair of electrons is not shared equally. The bond
pair shifts towards the nucleus of the atom having greater electronegativity. As a
result, electron distribution gets distorted and the electron cloud is displaced
towards the electronegative atom.
As a result, the electronegative atom becomes slightly negatively charged while the
other atom becomes slightly positively charged. Thus, opposite poles are developed
in the molecule and this type of a bond is called a polar covalent bond.
y
HCl, for example, contains a polar covalent bond. Chlorine atom is more
electronegative than hydrogen atom. Hence, the bond pair lies towards chlorine and
em
therefore, it acquires a partial negative charge.
ad
Ac
Q.1. Write Lewis dot symbols for atoms of the following elements: Mg, Na, B, O,
N, Br.
Ans- Mg: Na :
s
er
Q.3. Draw diagrams showing the formation of a double bond and a triple bond
between carbon atoms in C2H4 and C2H2 molecules.
ev
Ans- C2H4 :The electronic configuration of C-atom in the excited state is:
hi
In the formation of an ethane molecule (C2H4), one sp2 hybrid orbital of carbon
overlaps a sp2hybridized orbital of another carbon atom, thereby forming a C-C
sigma bond. The remaining two sp2 orbitals of each carbon atom form a sp2-s sigma
Ac
bond with two hydrogen atoms. The unhybridized orbital of one carbon atom
undergoes sidewise overlap with the orbital of a similar kind present on another
carbon atom to form a weak π-bond.
58

y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
C2H2 :
ev
In the formation of C2H2 molecule, each C–atom is sp hybridized with two 2p-
orbitals in an unhybridized state.
One sp orbital of each carbon atom overlaps with the other along the internuclear
hi
axis forming a C–C sigma bond. The second sp orbital of each C–atom overlaps a
half-filled 1s-orbital to form a σ bond.
Ac
The two unhybridized 2p-orbitals of the first carbon undergo sidewise overlap with
the 2p orbital of another carbon atom, thereby forming two pi (π) bonds between
carbon atoms. Hence, the triple bond between two carbon atoms is made up of
one sigma and two π-bonds.
59

y
em
ad
Ac
Q.4. Explain the formation of H2 molecule on the basis of valence bond theory.
Ans- Let us assume that two hydrogen atoms (A and B) with nuclei (N A and NB) and
electrons (eA and eB) are taken to undergo a reaction to form a hydrogen molecule.
When A and B are at a large distance, there is no interaction between them. As
s
they begin to approach each other, the attractive and repulsive forces start
operating.
er
Attractive force arises between:

(a) Nucleus of one atom and its own electron i.e., NA – eA and NB – eB.
ev
(b) Nucleus of one atom and electron of another atom i.e., NA – eB and NB – eA.
Repulsive force arises between:
(a) Electrons of two atoms i.e., eA – eB.
(b) Nuclei of two atoms i.e., NA – NB.
hi
The force of attraction brings the two atoms together, whereas the force of repulsion
tends to push them apart.
Ac
60

y
em
ad
The magnitude of the attractive forces is more than that of the repulsive forces.
Hence, the two atoms approach each other. As a result, the potential energy
decreases. Finally, a state is reached when the attractive forces balance the repulsive
Ac
forces and the system acquires minimum energy. This leads to the formation of a
dihydrogen molecule.
Q.5. Write the important conditions required for the linear combination of
atomic orbitals to form molecular orbitals.
s
Ans- The given conditions should be satisfied by atomic orbitals to form molecular
er
orbitals:
(a) Thecombining atomic orbitals must have the same or nearly the same energy.
ev
This means that in a homonuclear molecule, the 1s-atomic orbital of an atom can
combine with the 1s-atomic orbital of another atom, and not with the 2s-orbital.
(b) The combining atomic orbitals must have proper orientations to ensure that the
hi
overlap is maximum.
(c) The extent of overlapping should be large.
Ac
Q.6. Describe the hybridisation in case of PCl5. Why are the axial bonds longer as
compared to equatorial bonds?
Ans- The ground state and excited state outer electronic configurations of
phosphorus (Z = 15) are:
Ground state:
61

Excited state:
Phosphorus atom is sp3d hybridized in the excited state. These orbitals are filled by
the electron pairs donated by five Cl atoms as:
y
PCl5
em
The five sp3d hybrid orbitals are directed towards the five corners of the trigonal
ad
bipyramidals. Hence, the geometry of PCl5 can be represented as:
Ac
s
er
ev
There are five P–Cl sigma bonds in PCl5. Three P–Cl bonds lie in one plane and
make an angle of 120° with each other. These bonds are called equatorial bonds.
The remaining two P–Cl bonds lie above and below the equatorial plane and make
an angle of 90° with the plane. These bonds are called axial bonds.
hi
As the axial bond pairs suffer more repulsion from the equatorial bond pairs, axial
bonds are slightly longer than equatorial bonds.
Ac
Q.7. What is meant by the term bond order? Calculate the bond order of: N 2,
O2, and .
Ans- Bond order is defined as one half of the difference between the number of
electrons present in the bonding and anti-bonding orbitals of a molecule.
62

Bond order =
Bond order of N2
Number of bonding electrons, Nb = 10
Number of anti-bonding electrons, Na = 4
y
em
Bond order of nitrogen molecule =3
Bond order of O 2
Bond order =2
ad
Ac
Hence, the bond order of oxygen molecule is 2.
Similarly, the electronic configuration of can be written as:

s
er
Bond order of = 2.5

ev
The electronic configuration of ion will be:

hi
Ac
Bond order of = = 1.5
Q.8. Discuss the shape of the following molecules using the VSEPR model:
BeCl2, BCl3, SiCl4, AsF5, H2S, PH3
Ans- BeCl2: The central atom has no lone pair and there are two bond
pairs. i.e., BeCl2 is of the type AB2. Hence, it has a linear shape.
63

BCl3: The central atom has no lone pair and there are three bond pairs.
Hence, it is of the type AB3. Hence, it is trigonal planar.
SiCl4: The central atom has no lone pair and there are four
bond pairs. Hence, the shape of SiCl4 is tetrahedral being the AB4 type molecule.
y
em
AsF5: The central atom has no lone pair and there
ad
are five bond pairs. Hence, AsF5 is of the type AB5. Therefore, the shape is trigonal
bipyramidal.
H2S: The central atom has one lone pair and there are two bond
Ac
pairs. Hence, H2S is of the type AB2E. The shape is Bent.
PH3: The central atom has one lone pair and there are three bond
s
pairs. Hence, PH3 is of the AB3E type. Therefore, the shape is trigonal bipyramidal.
er
Q.9. Write the resonance structures for SO3, NO2 and .

ev
Ans- The resonance structures are:
(a) SO3:
hi
Ac
(b)
64

(c) :
Q.10. What do you understand by bond pairs and lone pairs of electrons? Illustrate
by giving example.
y
Ans- The shared pairs of electrons present between the bonded atoms are
em
called bond pairs. All valence electrons may not participate in bonding. The
electron pairs that do not participate in bonding are calledlone pairs of electrons.
In H2O, there are two bond pairs and two lone pairs on the central atom (oxygen).
ad
Ac
Q.1. Define octet rule. Write its significance and limitations.
Ans-- The octet rule or the electronic theory of chemical bonding was developed by
s
Kossel and Lewis. According to this rule, atoms can combine either by transfer of
er
valence electrons from one atom to another or by sharing their valence electrons in
order to attain the nearest noble gas configuration by having an octet in their
valence shell.
ev
The octet rule successfully explained the formation of chemical bonds depending
hi
upon the nature of the element.

Ac
Limitations of the octet theory:
The following are the limitations of the octet rule:
(a) The rule failed to predict the shape and relative stability of molecules.
(b) It is based upon the inert nature of noble gases. However, some noble gases like
xenon and krypton form compounds such as XeF2, KrF2 etc.
65

(c) The octet rule cannot be applied to the elements in and beyond the third period
of the periodic table. The elements present in these periods have more than eight
valence electrons around the central atom. For example: PF 5, SF6, etc.
y
(d) The octet rule is not satisfied for all atoms in a molecule having an odd number
of electrons. For example, NO and NO2 do not satisfy the octet rule.
em
(e) This rule cannot be applied to those compounds in which the number of
ad
electrons surrounding the central atom is less than eight. For example, LiCl, BeH 2,
AlCl3 etc. do not obey the octet rule.
Ac
Q.2. Which hybrid orbitals are used by carbon atoms in the following molecules?
CH3–CH3; (b) CH3–CH=CH2; (c) CH3-CH2-OH; (d) CH3-CHO (e) CH3COOH

s
Ans- (a)
er
ev
hi
Both C1 and C2 are sp3 hybridized.

Ac
(b)
66

C1 is sp3 hybridized, while C2 and C3 are sp2 hybridized.
(c)
y
Both C1 and C2 are sp3 hybridized.
em
(d)
ad
Ac
C1 is sp3 hybridized and C2 is sp2 hybridized.
(e)
s
er
ev
C1 is sp3 hybridized and C2 is sp2 hybridized.

hi
Q.3. Compare the relative stability of the following species and indicate
their magnetic properties;
Ac
O2, , (superoxide), (peroxide)
Ans- There are 16 electrons in a molecule of dioxygen, 8 from each oxygen atom.
The electronic configuration of oxygen molecule can be written as:
67

Since the 1s orbital of each oxygen atom is not involved in boding, the number of
bonding electrons = 8 = Nb and the number of anti-bonding orbitals = 4 = Na.
Bond order
=2
y
Similarly, the electronic configuration of can be written as:
em
Nb = 8
ad
Na = 3
Ac
Bond order of
= 2.5
s
Electronic configuration of ion will be:

er
ev
Nb = 8
Na = 5
hi
Bond order of =
Ac
= 1.5
Electronic configuration of ion will be:
Nb = 8
68

Na = 6
Bond order of =
=1
Bond dissociation energy is directly proportional to bond order. Thus, the higher the
bond order, the greater will be the stability. On this basis, the order of stability
is .
y
HOTS
em
Q.1. Apart from tetrahedral geometry, another possible geometry for CH4 is square
planar with the four H atoms at the corners of the square and the C atom at its
centre. Explain why CH4 is not square planar?
ad
Ans- Electronic configuration of carbon atom: 6C: 1s2 2s2 2p2
Ac
In the excited state, the orbital picture of carbon can be represented as:
Hence, carbon atom undergoes sp3 hybridization in CH4 molecule and takes a
s
tetrahedral shape.
er
ev
For a square planar shape, the hybridization of the central atom has to be dsp2.
hi
However, an atom of carbon does not have d-orbitalsto undergo dsp2 hybridization.
Hence, the structure of CH4 cannot be square planar.
Ac
Moreover, with a bond angle of 90° in square planar, the stability of CH4 will be
very less because of the repulsion existing between the bond pairs. Hence, VSEPR
theory also supports a tetrahedral structure for CH4.
Q.2. Explain why BeH2 molecule has a zero dipole moment although the Be–H
bonds are polar.
69

Ans- The Lewis structure for BeH2 is as follows:
There is no lone pair at the central atom (Be) and there are two bond pairs. Hence,
BeH2 is of the type AB2. It has a linear structure.
Dipole moments of each H–Be bond are equal and are in opposite directions.
Therefore, they nullify each other. Hence, BeH2 molecule has zero dipole moment.
y
Q.3. Which out of NH3 and NF3 has higher dipole moment and why?
em
Ans- In both molecules i.e., NH3 and NF3, the central atom (N) has a lone pair
electron and there are three bond pairs. Hence, both molecules have a pyramidal
shape. Since fluorine is more electronegative than hydrogen, it is expected that the
net dipole moment of NF3 is greater than NH3. However, the net dipole moment of
ad
NH3 (1.46 D) is greater than that of NF3 (0.24 D).
This can be explained on the basis of the directions of the dipole moments of each
individual bond in NF3 and NH3. These directions can be shown as:
Ac
s
er
Thus, the resultant moment of the N–H bonds add up to the bond moment of the
lone pair (the two being in the same direction), whereas that of the three N – F
bonds partly cancels the moment of the lone pair.
ev
Hence, the net dipole moment of NF3 is less than that of NH3.
hi
Q.4. What is meant by hybridisation of atomic orbitals? Describe the shapes

of sp, sp2, sp3 hybrid orbitals.
Ac
Ans- Hybridization is defined as an intermixing of a set of atomic orbitals of

slightly different energies, thereby forming a new set of orbitals having equivalent
energies and shapes.
For example, one 2s-orbital hybridizes with two 2p-orbitals of carbon to form three
new sp2 hybrid orbitals.
70

These hybrid orbitals have minimum repulsion between their electron pairs and
thus, are more stable. Hybridization helps indicate the geometry of the molecule.
Shape of sp hybrid orbitals: sp hybrid orbitals have a linear shape. They are
formed by the intermixing of s and p orbitals as:
y
em
ad
Shape of sp2 hybrid orbitals:
sp2 hybrid orbitals are formed as a result of the intermixing of one s-orbital and two
Ac
2p-orbitals. The hybrid orbitals are oriented in a trigonal planar arrangement as:
s
er
ev
Shape of sp3 hybrid orbitals:
Four sp3 hybrid orbitals are formed by intermixing one s-orbital with three p-
hi
orbitals. The four sp3hybrid orbitals are arranged in the form of a tetrahedron as:
Ac
Q.5. Describe the change in hybridisation (if any) of the Al atom in the
following reaction.
71

Ans- The valence orbital picture of aluminium in the ground state can be
represented as:
The orbital picture of aluminium in the excited state can be represented as:
y
em
Hence, it undergoes sp2 hybridization to give a trigonal planar arrangement (in
AlCl3).
To form AlCl4–, the empty 3pz orbital also gets involved and the hybridization
ad
changes from sp2 to sp3. As a result, the shape gets changed to tetrahedral.
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
72

CHAPTER 5
STATES OF MATTER
1. Change in state : It is over all effect of Intermolecular
forces, molecular Interactional energy & thermal energy:
2. Measurable properties of gases : P,V, T, n, Viscosity,
y
specific heat are some measurable properties.
em
3. Gas Laws : The quantitative relationship b/w any two of
the variables (V, n, P,T) when other two are constant.
4. Boyle’s Law : The pressure of fixed msss of gas varies
ad
inversely with the volume at constant T. P α 1/V(n,T const.)
P1V1 = P2 V2
Ac
5. Charle’s Law : At constant P, the volume of fixed amount
of gas varies directly with its absolute temperature.
V V1 V2
VαT or cons tan t ,
T T1 T2
s
6. Gay lussac’s Law : At constant V, The pressure of fixed

er
amount of gas varies directly with its absolute temperature.

ev
P P1 P2
PαT or const ,
T T1 T2
7. Ideal gas equation : The relationship b/w P, V and T by

hi
Gas Laws PV= nRT.

8. Avogadro’s Law : At given T and P, the volume of gas
Ac
varies directly to the amount of gas . V α n ( P, T constant)

9. Dalton’s Law of partial persure : The pressure enerted by a
mixture of non reacting gases is equal to the sum of their
partial pressure at constant (V,T)
73

P (total ) = P1 + P2 + P3 + ………. (T, V, constant)

10. Kinetic Molecular theory :
a. Gases consist of large number of identical particles
(atoms or molecules) that are so small that the actual
volume of the molecules is negligible in comparison to
the empty space between them.
y
b. There is no force of attraction between the particles of a
gas at ordinary temperature and pressure
em
c. Particles of a gas are always in constant and random
motion
d. Pressure is exerted by the gas as a result of collision of
the particles with the walls of the container
ad
e. Collisions of gas molecules are perfectly elastic
f. At any particular time, different particles in the gas have
different speeds and hence different kinetic energies
g. Average kinetic energy of the gas molecules is directly
Ac
proportional to the absolute temperature
11. Real Gases : The gases which deviates from Ideal behavior
at higher pressure and low temperature b/c of force of
attraction b/w molecules increases .
s
12. Compressibility factor (Z) : It determine extent of devation

er
PV
of real gases from Ideal gas behavior : Z = for ideal
n.R.T .
gas Z=1, for Nonideal gas Z< 1, Z > 1
ev
n2a
13. Vander waal’s Equation : P V nb nRT.
V2
hi
14. Critical Temperature : (Tc) The temperature above which a

gas cannot be liquefied whatever high pressure may be
Ac
15. Critical Pressure : The minimum pressure required to liquity

a gas at its critical temperature.
16. Critical Volume : The volume of 1 mole of gat at Tc, Pc.
17. Super cooled liquids : The liquids which are cooled to a
temperature below its freezing point without freezing .
74

18. Elastic Collision : The collisions in which no loss of K.E.

only there is transfer of energy.
19. Vapour pressure : The equilibrium pressure by vapour of
liquid in a container at given temperature (T)
20. At higher altitude : The b.p. of water decreases b/c the
y
atmospheric pressure is less than one atmosphere.
em
21. Surface Tension (V) : It is force acting per unit length
perpendicular to the line drawn on the surface : (Nm-1) : It
decreases with increases in T, it increases with increase in
ad
external pressure, b/c of it falling drops of liquid are
spherical, liquid in capillary tube rises.
Ac
22. Viscosity (η) : It is resistance offered to the flow of liquid
dv
due to friction b/w layer of fluids . F n. A.
dn
23. Effect of T & P on viscosity : It decreases with increase in
s
T, and increases with increase in P.

er
24. Low M.P. & B.P. of molecular liquids is due to low

magnitude of molecular interaction energy.
ev
One mark questions

1. At what condition surface tension vanishes ?
hi
2. Why Helium is used in balloons in place of hydrogen?

3. At what temperature below which a gas does not obey ideal
Ac
gas law?
4. At what temperature the volume of a gas is supposed to be
zero?
5. What is the molar volume at 0oC and 1 bar pressure?
75

6. Name the temperature above which a gas cannot be

liquefied by any amount of pressure.
7. What is the effect of increase of temperature on surface
tension and viscosity in a liquid?
8. How is the partial pressure of a gas in a mixture is related to
y
the total pressure of the gaseous mixture?
em
9. Why vegetables are cooked with difficulty at hill station.
10. What is the value of Z (compressibility factor) for an Ideal
gas?
ad
Answers to One mark questions
Ans 1 At critical temperature, meniscus b/w liquid and vapours
Ac
disappears.
Ans 2. He is incombustible , though heavier than H2 .
Ans 3. Below Boyle Temperature.
s
Ans 4. At absolute zero (O K) temperature.

er
Ans 5. It 22400 ml.

Ans 6. It is critical temperature (Tc)
ev
Ans 7. Both decreases with increase in temperature

Ans 8. P1 = X1 x P (total)
Ans 9. At hill station the atmospheric pressure is less and so
hi
boiling point decreases.

Ac
Ans10. For ideal gas Z=1.
Two Marks Questions

Q.1 How do you convert pressure in atmosphere in to SI unit.
76

Q.2 What type graph will you get when PV is plotted against P
at constant temperature.
Q.3 What would have happened to the gas if the molecular
collisions were not elastic?
Q.4 At a particular temperature, why vapour pressure of acetone
y
is less than of ether?
em
Q.5 Why liquids diffuse slowly as compared to gases?
P.V 2 .T 2
Q.6 What would be the SI unit for quantity ?
n
ad
Q.7 In terms of Charle’s law explain why -273o C is the lowest
temperature?
Q.8 For real gases the relation b/w P,V,T is given by vander
Ac
Waal’s equation, write it for n moles?
Q.9 What correction is applied to obtain pressure of dry gas
with the total pressure & aqueous tension?
s
Q.10 Name two phenomena that can be explained on the basis

er
of surface tension.
Answers to two marks questions
ev
Ans 1. 1atm = 101325 Pa or Nm-2, 1 bar = 105 Pa.

Ans 2 .A straight line parallel to pressure axis.
hi
Ans 3. On every collision there is loss of energy, so molecules

would have slowed down & settled down in vessel and
Ac
pressure reduce to O.
Ans 4. b/c molecular force of attraction in acetone is stronger
than those present in ether.
77

Ans 5. In liquids the molecules are less free than in a gas. i. e

intermolecular forces in liquid are greater than in gas.
2
P.V 2 .T 2 N .m (m 3 ) 2 ( K ) 2
Ans 6. N .m 4 k 2 mal 1
n mal
Ans 7 At -273o C, the Volume of gas becomes equal to zero i. e.
y
gas ceases to exist.
Vander waal’s equation
em
Ans 8.
n2 a
P V nb n.R.T .
v2
P (dryygas) = P (Total) – Aqueous tension
ad
Ans 9.
Ans 10. Surface tension can explain (i) capillary action. (ii)
Spherical shape of small drops of liquid.
Ac
Three Marks Questions
Q.1 Calculate temperature of 4.0 moles of gas occupying 5dm3
volume at 3.32 bar. (R= 0.083 bar dm3 k-1 mol-1)
s
PV
Ans PV nRT , or T
er
nR
3.32 bar x 5dm3

Or T 50. Ans
ev
4.0mol x 0.083bar dm3 k 1 mol 1
Q.2 34.05 ml of phosphorus vapours weight 0.0625g at 543 o C

and 1 bar pressure what is molar mass of phosphorous?
hi
P1V1 P2 V2 1 x 34 .05 1 x v2
Ans. , at 0 o C
Ac
T1 T2 (54 b 273 ) 273
Or V2 = 11.35 ml
Now 11.35 ml of vapours at 0 oC and 1 bar pressure weight
0.0625 gm
78

Now 22700 ml of vapors at 0o C and 1 bar pressure weight

0.0625
x 22700
11.35
Q.3 A mixture of dihydrogen and dinitrogen at 1 bar pressure
contains 20% by weight of H2. Calculate partial pressure of
y
H2.
em
Ans The mixture of H2 and O2 contain 20% H2 means 20 gm H2
& 80gm O2
20 80
n2 (H2) = 10moles, n(O2 ) 2.5contest.
2 32
ad
n( H 2 ) 10
P(H2) = x P( total ) x 1bar 0.8bar
n ( H 2 ) n (V2 ) 10 2.5
Ac
Q.4 What will be minimum pressure required compressing
500dm3 of air at 1 bar to 200 dm3 at 30o C?
Ans. P1 = 1bar. V1 = 500dm3
V2 =200 dm3 & temp. constant 30oC
s
P2 = ?
So by Boyle’s low P1V1 = P2 V2
er
500
1 x 500 = P2 x 200 or P2 2.5 bar
200
ev
Q.5 Calcutate the total pressure in mixture of 4g of O 2 and 2gm.

Of H2 can fixed to a total volume of IL at 0o C. (R =
hi
0.0821) Latm. Mol-1

RT
Ac
Ans P no2 nH 2 x
V
4 2 0.0821 x 273 1
= x 1 22 .4 25 .2 atm. Ans
32 2 1 8
Q.6 Account for the following :
79

(i) The size of weather balloon becomes longer and larger

as it ascend up into higher altitudes.
Ans (i) At higher altitudes atmospheric pressure decreases, but

inside the balloon gas exerts pressure and size becomes larger.
y
Q.8 What do you mean by ideal gas and real gas? Why do real
em
gases deviate from ideal behaviors?
Ans. Ideal gas follows gas laws at all P & T
Real gas donot “ gas laws at all P & T.
ad
Real gas deviate from ideal behaviour due to force of attraction
and because of volume of molecules of gases are not
Ac
negligible.
Q.9 Using the equation of state PV=nRT Show that at given T,
density of gas proportional to gas pressure P.
s
n
Ans PV n RT P . RT
v
er
m 1 m RT
P , , R.T . .
M V V M
ev
RT m
P P. (Where P )
M v
RT
hi
PxP  const.
M
Q.10 Critical temperature of CO2 and CH4 gases are 31.10C and -
Ac
81.90C respectively. Which of these has strong intermolecular

forces & why?
Ans CO2 has strong vander waal’s forces of attraction than CH4. b/c
of greater polarity and high molecular wt.
80

Hots Questions with Answers.

Q.1 (a)Why aerated water bottles kept under water during summer?
(b) Which property of liquid is responsible for spherical
shape of drop?
(c) Why is moist air lighter than dry air?
(d) Define aqueous tension?
(e) What is units of a and b which are vander waal’s
y
constant?
em
Ans (a) To reduce temperature so to reduce pressure, other wise
bottle may burst.
(b) Surface Tension.
(c) Moist air has water vapours which lowers vapour density,
so it is lighter.
ad
(d) It is pressure of water vapours at given T.
(e)Unit of a in atm. L2 mol-2, b is L mol-1.
Q.2 Why does sharpened edge becomes smooth on heating up to
Ac
melting point?
Ans On heating the glass it melts and take up rounded shape at
edges which has minimum surface area. b/c of surface tension.
Q.3 Arrange following in order of increasing density:
s
PM
d , O2 at 250 C , 1atm, O2 at O 0 C , 2 atm, O2 at 2730 C , 1 atm.
RT
er
PM P
Ans d , R, M are constant, so d depends upon so at 250C,
RT T
ev
P 1 o P 1
1Atm , At 273 C, 1atm Hence increasing order of
T 298 T 546
density will be: O2 at 2730 C, 1atm < O2 at 250 C, 2atm.
hi
Q.4 An O2 cylinder has 10L O2 at 200 atm. It patient takes 0.50ml

Ac
of O2 at 1 atm in one breath at 370C. How many breaths are possible?

Ans 10L at 200 atm = ? L at 1atm P,V , P2 V2 200 x10 1 x V2 or
Total Volume 2000 L

V2 = 2000 L, No of breathes = 4 x 10 6
Volume for 1breath 0.5 x 10 3 L
81

CHAPTER 6
THERMODYNAMICS”
Brief Summary of the chapter:
1. Thermodynamics: Science which deals with study of different forms of
energy and quantitative relationship.
2. System & Surroundings: The part of universe for study is called system and
remaining portion is surroundings.
y
3. State of system & state function: State of system is described in terms of T,
em
P, V etc. The property which depends only on state of system not upon path
is called state function eg. P, V, T, E, H, S etc.
4. Extensive & Intensive Properties: Properties which depends on quantity of
ad
matter called extensive prop. eg. mass, volume, heat capacity, enthalpy,
entropy etc. The properties which do not depends on matter present
Ac
depends upon nature of substance called Intensive properties. eg. T,P,
density, refractive index, viscosity, bp, pH, mole fraction etc.
5. Internal energy: The total energy with a system.

s
i.e. U = Ee + En + Ec + Ep + Ek + ------
er
U = U2 – U1 or UP – UR & U is state function and extensive properly. If

ev
U1 > U2 energy is released.
6. Heat (q): It I a form of energy which is exchanged between system and

hi
surrounding due to difference of temperature. Unit is Joule (J) or Calorie (1

Calorie = 4.18 J).
Ac
7. First Law of Thermodynamics: It is law of conservation energy. Energy can

neither be created not destroyed, it may be converted from one from into
another.
Mathematically U = q + w, w = –p. V (work of expansion)
U = q – p. V or q = U + p. V, q,w are not state function.
82

But U is state function.
8. Enthalpy (H): At constant volume V = 0, qv = U
So H = U + p. V, qp = H2 H1 = H
H = U + P. V.
9. Relationship between qp, qv i.e. H& U
y
It is H = U+ ng.RT or qp = qv + ng.RT
em
10. Exothermic and Endothermic reactions: H = –Ve for exothermic and H
= +Ve for endothermic reaction i.e. evolution and absorption of heat.
Eg C+O2 CO2 + 393.5 KJ, H = –393.5 KJ (exothermic)
ad
N2 + O 2 2NO – 180.7 KJ, H = 180.7 KJ (Endothermic)
Ac
11. Enthalpy of reaction ( rH): The amount of heat evolved or absorbed when
the reaction is completed.
12. Standard Enthalpy of reaction ( rH0) at 1 bar pressure and specific temp.
s
(290K) i.e. standard state.

er
13. Different types of Enthalpies of reactions:

ev
(i) Enthalpy of combustion ( cH), (ii) Enthalpy of formation ( fH)
(iii) Enthalpy of neutralization (iv) Enthalpy of solution

hi
(v) Enthalpy of atomization( aH), (vi)Enthalpy of Ionisation ( iH)

Ac
(vii) Enthalpy of Hydration ( hyol. H) (viii) Enthalpy of fusion ( fus.H)
(ix) Enthalpy of vaporization ( vap.H) (x)Enthalpy of sublimation ( sub.H)
( sub.H) = fus.(H) - vap(H)
14. Hess’s Law of constant heat summation: The total amount of heat change is
same whether the reaction takes place in one step or in several steps.
i.e. H = H1 + H2 + H3 + --------
83

15. Bond enthalpy: It is amount of energy released when gaseous atoms

combines to form one mole of bonds between them or heat absorbed when
one mole of bonds between them are broken to give free gaseous atoms.
Further rH = B.E. (Reactants) - B.E. (Products)
16. Spontaneous & Non Spontaneous Processes: A process which can take
place by itself is called spontaneous process. A process which can neither
take place by itself or by initiation is called non Spontaneous.
y
em
17. Driving forces for spontaneous process: (i) Tendency for minimum energy
state. (ii) Tendency for maximum randomness.
18. Entropy (S): It is measure of randomness or disorder of system.
ad
i.e. Gas>Liquid>Solid.
q ( rev.)
J.K 1 .mol 1
Ac
Entropy change ( S) =
T
19. Spontaneity in term of ( S)
S(total) = S(universe) = S(system) + S(surrounding)

s
er
If S(total) is +ve, the process is spontaneous.
If S(total) is –ve, the process is non spontaneous.

ev
20. Second Law of thermodynamics: In any spontaneous process, the entropy of

the universe always increases. A spontaneous process cannot be reversed.
hi
21. Gibb’s free energy (G): defined as G = H – T.S & G = H – T. S (Gibb’s

Ac
Helmholts equation) it is equal useful work i.e. - G = W(useful) = W(max.)
If G = ve, process is spontaneous.
22. Effects of T on spontaneity of a process: G = H – T. S.
(i) For endothermic process may be non spontaneous at law temp.
84

(ii) For exothermic process may be non spontaneous at high temp. and
spontaneous at law temp.
23. Calculation of ( rG0)

0 0 0
rG = fG (p) - fG (r)
24. Relationship between ( rG0) & equilibrium constant (k)
G = G0 + RTlnQ & G0 = –2.303RT logk.
y
em
25. Calculation of entropy change:
0
rS = S0 (p) - S0 (r)
ad
ONE MARK QUESTIONS:
1. State First Law of thermodynamics.

Ac
2. What is a thermodynamic state function?
3. Give enthalpy (H) of all elements in their standard state.

s
4. From thermodynamic point to which system the animals and plants belong?
er
5. Predict the sign of S for the following reactions.

ev
CaCO3(s) + CO2(g) heat CaO(s) + CO2(g)
6. For the reaction 2Cl(g) Cl2(g), What will be the sign of H and S?
hi
7. State Hess’s Law for constant heat summation?

Ac
8. What is Gibb’s Helmhaltz equation?
9. Define extensive properties.
10. Give relationship between H, U for a reaction in gaseous state.
85

ANSWERS FOR ONE MARK QUESTIONS
1. Energy can neither be created nor destroyed. The energy of an isolated

system is constant. U = q + w.
2. A function whose value is independent of path. eg. P, V, E, H
3. In standard state enthalpies of all elements is zero.
4. Open system.
y
5. S is positive (entropy increases)
em
6. H: (–ve) b/c energy is released in bond formation and
S: (–ve) b/c atoms combines to form molecules.
ad
7. The change of enthalpy of reaction remains same, whether the reaction is
carried out in one step or several steps.
Ac
8. G = H – T. S
9. Properties which depends upon amount of substance called extensive

s
properties. Volume, enthalpy, entropy.

er
10. H = U + ng. RT.
TWO MARKS QUESTIONS:-

ev
Q.1 In a process, 701J heat is absorbed and 394J work is done by system. What is
change in Internal energy for process?
hi
Q.2 Given: N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g), rH

0
= –92.4KJ.mol–1. What is the standard
Ac
enthalpy of formation of NH3(g).
Q.3 Calculate entropy change in surroundings when 1.0 mol of H2O(l) is formed
under standard conditions? Given H0 = –286KJmol–1.
Q.4 Give relationship between entropy change and heat absorbed/evolved in a

reversible reaction at temperature T.
Q.5 What is spontaneous change? Give one example.

86

Q.6 A real crystal has more entropy than an Ideal Crystal. Why?
Q.7 Under what condition, the heat evolved/absorbed in a reaction is equal to its
free energy change?
Q.8 Predict the entropy change in-
(i) A liquid crystallizes into solid
(ii) Temperature of a crystallize solid raised from OK to 115K
y
Q.9 What is bond energy? Why is it called enthalpy of atomization?
em
Q.10 Calculate entropy change for the following process.
H2O(s) H2O(l), is 6.0 KJ mol-1 at 00C.
ad
ANSWER FOR TWO MARKS QUESTIONS:
Ac
1. q = 701J, w = 394J, so U = q + w = 701 – 394 = 307J.
92.4
2. fH NH3(g) = – 46.2KJ .mol 1
2
s
q(rev.) = – H0 = –286 KJmol-1 = 286000Jmol-1

er
3.
1
q ( rev.) 286000 J.mol
S 959 J.K 1mol 1
ev
T 298 K
q ( rev)
4. S=
hi
5. A process which can take place of its own or initiate under some condition.
Ac
eg. Common salt dissolve in water of its own.
6. A real crystal has some disorder due to presence of defects in their

structural arrangement, and Ideal crystal does not have any disorder.
7. In G = H – T. S, when reaction is carried out at OK or S = 0, then G

= H.
87

8. (i) Entropy decreases b/c molecules attain an ordered state.
(ii) entropy increase b/c from OK to 115K particles begin to move.
9. It is the amount of energy required to dissociate one mole of bonds present

b/w atoms in gas phase. As molecules dissociates into atoms in gas phase so
bond energy of diatomic molecules is called enthalpy of atomization.
10. H2O(s) H2O(l) at 00C, fusH = 6KJ mol-1
y
= 6000J mol-1
em
Tf = 00C = 0 + 273 = 273K
1
H 6000 J.mol
Do fuss =
fus
21 .98 J.K 1mol 1
ad
T 273 K
THREE MARKS QUESTIONS:

Ac
Q.1 For oxidation of iron, 4Fe(s) + 3O2(g) 2Fe2O3(s)
S is –549.4J.K-1 mol-1, at 298K. Inspite of –ve entropy change of this reaction,

Why the reaction is spontaneous? ( rH0 = –1648x103 J.mol-1)
s
Q.2 Using the bond energy of Hr = 435 KJ mol-1, Br2 = 192 KJ mol-1, HBr = 368
er
KJmol-1. Calculate enthalpy change for the reaction H2(g) + Br2(g) 2HBr(g)
ev
Q.3 Enthalpies of formation of CO(g), CO2(g), N2O(g) and N2O4(g) and –110, –393, 81
and 9.7 KJ mol-1 respectively. Find value rH for the reaction N2O4(g) + 3CO(g)
hi
Q.4 For the reaction at 298K, 2A+B C, H = 400 KJ mol-1, S = 0.2 KJ mol-1 K-
1
. At what temperature will the reaction become spontaneous, considering H,
Ac
S be constant at the temp.
Q.5 The equilibrium constant for a reaction is 10. What will be the value of G0? R
= 8.314J.K-1mol-1 T = 300K.
Q.6 What do you understand by state function? Neither q nor w is a state function
but q + w is a state function? Explain.
Q.7 Justify the following statements:

88

(i) An endothermic reaction is always thermodynamically spontaneous.
(ii) The entropy always increases on going from liquid to vapour state at any
temperature T.
Q.8 Calculate the temperature above which the reduction reaction becomes spontaneous:
PbO(s) + C(s) Pb(s) + CO(g), given [ H = 108.4 KJ mol-1, S = 190J.K-1 mol-1].
Q.9 From the data given below at 298K for the reaction:
y
CH4(g) + 2O2(g) CO2(g) +2H2O(l) Calculate enthalpy of formation of CH4(g) at
em
298K. Given:[ rH = -890.5KJ,
[ f H(CO2 ) 393.5KJ.mol 1, f H( H2O) 286.0KJ.mol 1 ]
ad
Q.10 For the reaction NH4Cl(s) NH3(g) + HCl(g) at 250C enthalpy change H =
177KJ.mol-1 and S = 285J.K-1 mol-1. Calculate free energy change G at 250C
and predict whether the reaction is spontaneous or not.
Ac
ANSWER TO THREE MARKS QUESTIONS:
H0 C 1648 x10 3 J.mol 1 )

Ans.1 (surr.) =
r
5530 JK 1mol 1.
s
T 298 K
er
& S(system) = -549.4QJK-1mol-1.
rS(total) = 5530 – 5494 = 4980.6 J.K-1mol-1

ev
Since rS(total) is +ve, so the reaction is spontaneous.

hi
0
Ans.2 rH = bond enthalpies(rect.) - bond enthalpies(prod.)
0 0 0
= H H 2 HH
Ac
H H Br Br Br
= [435 – 192] – [2 x 368] KJ mol-1
= 627 – 736 = –109KJ. Mol-1 Ans.

0 - 0
Ans.3 rH = fH (prod.) rH (rect)
= f H0( N 2O) 3 f H 0 ( CO 2 ) f H 0 N 2O 4 3 f H 0 ( CO )
= [81 + 3(–393)] – [9.7 + (–110)]

89

= [81 + 1179] – [9.7 – 330] = –777.7KJ

Ans.4 H = 400 KJ mol-1, S = 0.2 KJK-1 mol-1.
G = H – T. S
O = 400 – 0.2 x T ( G = 0 at equilibrium)
400
T= 2000K, so reaction will be spontaneous above 2000K.
0.2
0
Ans.5 = –2.303 RT logK
rG
= –2.303 x 8.314 x 300 x log10
= –19.147 x 300 x 1 = –5744.1J
0 -1
rG = –5.7441KJ.mol
y
Ans.6 The property whose value depends upon state of system and is independent of
path. q + w = U, which is a state function as value of U does not depends upon
em
path.
Ans.7 (a) It is false, exothermic reaction is not always spontaneous. If S = +ve and
T. S> H. The process will be non spontaneous even it. It is endothermic.
(b) The entropy of vapour is more than that of liquid, so entropy increases during
ad
vaporization.
Ans.8 G= H – T. S, at equilibrium G = 0, H = T. S
Ac
H 108 .4x10 3 J.mol 1
T= 570 .526 K
S 190 J.K 1mol 1
So the reaction will be spontaneous above 570.52K, as above this temperature

s
G will be –ve.
er
Ans.9 rH = f H ( CO 2 ) 2 f H CH 4 ( g ) f H ( O2 )
–890.5KJ = –393.5KJ + 2v – 286 – Hf(CH4) – O

ev
= Hf(CH4) = –75.0 KJ.mol-1.

hi
= Hf (CH ) 4
75.0KJ.mol 1 .
Ac
Ans.10 H = 177 KJ mol-1, S = 285 JK-1 mol-1
298x 285
G= H – T. S = 177KJ – KJ
1000
= 177 KJ – 84.93 KJ = 92.07 KJ.mol-1.
Since G is +ve, so the reaction is non spontaneous.
90

FIVE MARKS QUESTIONS:-
Q.1 What is entropy? Why is the entropy of a substance taken as zero at 0K?
Calculate the rG for the reaction?
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g) at 298K
The value of equilibrium constant (K) is 6.6x105, R = 8.314JK-1mol-1.
Ans: It is measure of randomness or disorder of system.
Because at O K there is complete order in the system.
y
G0 = –2.303 RT logK = –2.303 x 8.314 x 298 x log6.6 x 105
em
= -5705.8[log6.6 + log 105]
= –5705.8[0.8195 + 5.0] = –5705.8 + 5.8195J
ad
= –33204.903J
G0 = –33.205 KJ mol-1.
Ac
Q.2 (i) What are extensive property and intensive properties?
(ii)Calculate the value of equilibrium constant (K) at 400K for
2 NOCl(g) →2NO(g) + Cl2(g).

s
H0 = 77.2KJ.mol-1, S0 = 122J.K-1mol-1 at 400K, R = 8.314 J.K-1mol-1.

er
Ans. (i) An extensive property is a property whose value depends on the

quantity or size of matter present in the system Those properties which do not
ev
depend on the quantity or size of matter present are known as intensive

properties
400x122
(ii) H0 = H0 – T. S0 = 77.2KJ - KJ .mol 1
hi
1000
= 77.2 – 48.8 = 28.4 KJ mol-1

Ac
and G0 = –2.303 RT logK.
28400 = –2.303 x 8.314 x 400 log K.
7.1
logK = 3.7081 4.2919K
2.303x8.314
K – antilog ( 4.2919 ) 1.95 x10 4 Ans.
91

Q.3 Define standard enthalpy of formation. Calculate the enthalpy of formation of

benzene from data
15
C 6 H 6(l) O 2( g ) 6CO 2( g ) 3H 2 O ( l) , c H0 3266.0KJ
2
C(s) + O2(g) CO2(g) f H0 393 .1KJ
1
H2(g)+ O2(g) H2O(l) f H0 286 .0KJ
2
y
Ans. Ans. The standard enthalpy change for the formation of one mole of a
em
compound from its elements in their most stable states of aggregation (also
known as reference states) is called Standard Molar Enthalpy of Formation.
15
c H0 6 f H (0co22 ) 3 f H 0 ( H 2O ) f H (0C6 H 6 ) H 0 f (O2 )
2
ad
= –3266KJ = 6 x – 393.1 + 3x – 286 – f H(0C H ) - 0 6 6
= -3218 kJ/mol
Ac
HOTS QUESTIONS
1. Why standard entropy of an elementary substance is not zero whereas standard

s
enthalpy of formation is taken as zero?

Ans. A substance has a perfectly ordered arrangement only at absolute zero.
er
Hence , entropy is zero only at absolute zero. Enthalpy of formation is the heat
change involved in the formation of one mole of the substance from its
elements. An element formed from it means no heat change.
ev
2. The equilibrium constant for a reaction is one or more if ∆G° for it is less than
zero. Explain
Ans. ―∆G° = RT ln K, thus if ∆G° is less than zero. i.e., it is negative, then ln
hi
K will be positive and hence K will be greater than one.

3. Many thermodynamically feasible reactions do not occur under ordinary
conditions. Why?
Ac
Ans. Under ordinary conditions, the average energy of the reactants may be
less than threshold energy. They require some activation energy to initiate the
reaction.
92

CHAPTER-7
EQUILIBRIUM
 Equilibrium state- When rate of formation of a product in a process is in

competition with rate of formation of reactants, the state is then named as
“Equilibrium state” .
 Equilibrium in physical processes: solid ⇌ liquid ⇌ gas
H2O(s )⇌ H2O(l) ⇌ H2O(vap)
 Law of chemical equilibrium: At a given temperature, the product
y
ofconcentrations of the reaction productsraised to the respective
em
stoichiometriccoefficient in the balanced chemicalequation divided by the
product ofconcentrations of the reactants raised totheir individual
stoichiometric coefficientshas a constant value. This is known asthe
Equilibrium Law or Law of ChemicalEquilibrium.
aA +bB⇌cC + dD
ad
Kc =[C]c [D]d/[A]a [B]b
Chemical equation Equilibriumconstant

Ac
aA + b B⇌c C + D K
cC + d D⇌a A + b B K′c=(1/Kc)
na A + nb B ⇌ncC + ndD K′″c= (Kcn)
Concentrations or partial pressure of pure solids orliquids do notappear in the
expression of the equilibriumconstant. In the reaction,
s
Ag2O(s) + 2HNO3(aq) ⇌2AgNO3(aq) +H2O(l)

er
 If Qc >Kc, the reaction will proceed in thedirection of reactants (reverse

reaction).If Qc <Kc, the reaction will proceed in thedirection of the products
ev
(forward reaction)
 Kp is equilibrium constant in terms of partial pressure of gaseous reactants and
products.
 Kc is equilibrium constant in terms of molar concentration of gaseous
hi
reactants and products.

 Kp =Kc (RT)∆n here R is gas constant, T is temperature at which the
Ac
process is carried out &∆n is no. of moles of gaseous product minus no. of
moles of gaseous reactants.
 If Kc> 103; Kc is very high i.e. the reaction proceeds nearly to completion.
 If Kc<103; Kc is very small i.e. the reaction proceeds rarely.
 If Kcis ranging in the range of 103 to 10-3; i.e. reactants and products are just
in equilibrium.
 ΔG0 = – RT lnK or ΔG0 = – 2.303RT log K
 Factors affecting equilibrium constant:- temperature, pressure, catalyst and
molar concentration of reactants and products.
93

 Le Chatelier’s principle:- It states that a change in any of the factors

thatdetermine the equilibrium conditions of asystem will cause the system
to changein such a manner so as to reduce or tocounteract the effect of the
change.
 Arrhenius acids are the substances that ionize in water to form H+.
 Arrhenius bases are the substances that ionize in water to form OH-.
 Lewis acids are lone pair (of e-) accepters while Lewis bases are lone pair
donators.
y
 Proton donor are acids while proton accepters are bases(Bronsted-Lowry
concept).
em
 The acid-base pair thatdiffers only by one proton is called a conjugateacid-
base pair. IfBrönsted acid is a strong acid then itsconjugate base is a weak
base and viceversa.
 Ionic product of water.Kw = [H+][OH–]
ad
 pH = -log [H+] ; here[H+] is molar concentration of hydrogen ion.
 pH + pOH =14
 pKa + pKb =14
Ac
 Ka x Kb = Kw = ionic product of water=1 x 10-14
 Buffer solution :The solutions which resist change in pH on dilution or with

the addition of small amounts of acid or alkali are called Buffer Solutions.
s
 common ion effect: It can be defined as a shift in equilibrium on adding a

substance that provides more of an ionic species already present in the
er
dissociation equilibrium.
 Hydrolysis of Salts: process of interaction between water andcations/anions or
both of salts is calledhydrolysis.
ev
 The cations (e.g., Na+, K+,Ca2+, Ba2+, etc.) of strong bases and anions(e.g., Cl–,
Br–, NO3–, ClO4– etc.) of strong acids simply get hydrated but do not
hydrolyse, andtherefore the solutions of salts formed fromstrong acids and
hi
bases are neutral i.e., theirpH is 7.

 Salts of weak acid and strong base e.g.,CH3COONa are basic in nature.
 Salts of strong acid and weak base e.g.,NH4Cl, are acidic
Ac
 Salts of weak acid and weak base, e.g.,CH3COONH4. The pH is determined by

the formula pH = 7 + ½ (pKa – pKb)
 Solubility product- product of the molar concentrations of the ions in a
saturated solution, each concentration term raised to the power equal to the no.
of ions produced.
ONE MARK QUESTIONS
Q.1. Mention the factors that affect equilibrium constant.
94

Ans. Temperature, pressure, catalyst and molar concentration of reactants and

products.
Q.2. Whatis ionic products of water?
Ans. Kw = [H+] [OH-]
Q.3. Write conjugate acids of H2O & NH3.

Ans. H3O+& NH4+.
Q.4. Define Arrhenius acids.

Ans. Arrhenius acids are the substances that ionize in water to form H+.
y
Q.5. Define the term degree of ionization.
em
Ans.Extent up to which an acid/base/salt ionize to form ions.
Q.6. What are Buffer solutions?

Ans.The solutions which resist change in pH on dilution or with the addition of small
ad
amounts of acid or alkali are called Buffer Solutions.
Q.7. Write Kc for the gaseous reaction- N2 + 3H2⇌ 2NH3

Ans. Kc=[NH3]2/[N2] [H2]3
Ac
Q.8. Out of H2O & H3O+ which is stronger acid?
Ans. H3O+.
s
Q.9. What is common ion effect?

Ans. Shift in equilibrium on adding a substance that provides more of an ionic
er
species already present in the dissociation equilibrium.

Q.10. Write relationship between Kp and Kc for the gaseous reaction - N2 + O2 ⇌
ev
2NO
Ans.Kp = Kc as∆n is zero for the above said reaction.
hi
TWO MARKS QUESTIONS
1. What is effect of catalyst on equilibrium constant „Kc‟?

Ac
Ans . A catalyst does not affect equilibrium constant because it speeds up

both forward and backward reactions to the same extent.
2. State Le Chatelier‟r principle.
Ans.It states that a change in any of the factors thatdetermine the equilibrium
conditions of asystem will cause the system to changein such a manner so as to
reduce or tocounteract the effect of the change.
3. What is meant by conjugate acid –base pairs? Explain.
Ans:- H2O + HCl⇌H3O+ + Cl-
base acid conjugate acid conjugate base
95

4. Classify the following bases as strong and weak bases: NaHCO3, NaOH,
KOH, Ca(OH)2, Mg(OH)2.
Ans:-strong base NaOH, KOH ; weak bases NaHCO3,Ca(OH)2, Mg(OH)2.
–3
5. The concentration of hydrogen ion in a sample of soft drink is 3.8 × 10 M.
What is its pH ?
Ans:-pH = – log[3.8 × 10–3]
= – {log[3.8] + log[10–3]}
= – {(0.58) + (– 3.0)} = – { – 2.42} = 2.42
Therefore, the pH of the soft drink is 2.42and it is acidic.
y
– –
6. The species: H2O, HCO3 , HSO4 and NH3can act both as Bronsted acids and
em
bases.For each case give the correspondingconjugate acid and conjugate base.
Ans:-
Species Conjugate acid Conjugate base
ad
H2O H3O+ OH-
HCO3- H2CO3 CO32-
HSO4– H2SO4 SO42–
Ac
NH3 NH4+ NH2-
7. Explain Lewis acids and bases with suitable examples.

Ans:-Lewis acids are lone pair (of e-) accepters while Lewis bases are lone
pair donators.
s
AlCl3 is a Lewis acid while NH3 is a Lewis base.

er
8. What is difference between alkali and bases? Give examples.

Ans:- An alkali is a water soluble base. All the alkalis are bases but all the
ev
bases are not alkali. Ex- NaOH is an alkali/base.

Ca(OH)2 is a base but not an alkali.
9. Explain homogeneous and heterogeneous equilibrium giving examples.
hi
Ans:- If all the reactants and products present in an equilibrium mixture are in
same phase→homogeneous equilibrium.
If all the reactants and products present in an equilibrium mixture are in
Ac
different phase→ heterogeneous equilibrium.

N2 (g) + 3H2(g) ⇌2NH3(g) homogeneous equilibrium
CaCO3(s)⇌CaO(s) + CO2(g)heterogeneous equilibrium
96

THREE MARK QUESTIONS
1. The pH of some common substances is given bellow. Classify the

substances as acidic/basic
Name of fluid pH
Lime water 10
Milk of magnesia 10
Human saliva 6.4
Lemon juice 2.2
Sea water 7.8
y
Vinegar 3
em
milk 6.8
Ans.:- acidic-Human saliva, Lemon juice, milk, vinegar
Basic- Lime water, sea water, milk of magnesia.
2. Explain general characteristics of acids and bases.
Ans.:- Most of the acids taste sour.Acids are known to turn blue litmus paper
ad
into red and liberate dihydrogen on reacting with some metals.
Bases are known to turn red litmus paper blue, tastebitter and feel soapy.
3. Water is amphoteric in nature. Explain.
Ac
Ans.:- Water can react with acid as well as base
H2O + HCl → H3O+ +Cl- water is basic
- +
H2O + NH3 → OH + NH4 water is acidic
s
4. Describe the effect of :

a) addition of H2
er
b) addition of CH3OH
c) removal of CO
d) removal of CH3OH
ev
on the equilibrium of the reaction:

2H2(g) + CO (g )⇌CH3OH (g)
hi
Ans.:- a) addition of H2 equilibrium will shift on RHS

b) addition of CH3OH equilibrium will shift on LHS
c) removal of CO equilibrium will shift on LHS
Ac
d) removal of CH3OH equilibrium will shift on RHS
5. Classify the following species into Lewisacids and Lewis bases and show
howthese act as such:
(a) HO– (b)F – (c) H+ (d) BCl3
Solution
(a) Hydroxyl ion is a Lewis base as it candonate an electron lone pair (:OH – ).
(b) Flouride ion acts as a Lewis base asit can donate any one of its fourelectron
lone pairs.
97

(c) A proton is a Lewis acid as it canaccept a lone pair of electrons frombases

like hydroxyl ion and fluorideion.
(d) BCl3 acts as a Lewis acid as it canaccept a lone pair of electrons
fromspecies like ammonia or aminemolecules.
6. For the equilibrium,2NOCl(g) ⇌2NO(g) + Cl2(g)the value of the

equilibrium constant, Kcis 3.75 × 10–6 at 1069 K. Calculate the Kpfor the
reaction at this temperature?
Solution
We know that,Kp= Kc(RT)∆n
y
For the above reaction,∆n= (2+1) – 2 = 1
Kp= 3.75 ×10–6 (0.0831 × 1069)
em
Kp= 0.033.
7. Hydrolysis of sucrose gives,Sucrose + H2O →Glucose + Fructose
Equilibrium constant Kcfor the reaction is 2 ×1013 at 300K. Calculate ∆G0at
300K.
ad
Solution
∆G0= – RT lnKc
∆G0= – 8.314J mol–1K–1J x 300K × ln(2×1013)
∆G0= – 7.64 ×104 J mol–1
Ac
8. Explain the following :
(i) Common ion effect (ii) solubility products (iii) pH
Ans. (i) Suppression of ionization of weak electrolyte by adding a strong
electrolyte having an ion common.
s
(ii) Product of the molar concentrations of the ions in a saturated solution,

each concentration term raised to the power equal to the no. of ions produced.
er
(iii) Negative logarithm of hydrogen ion concentration.

9. The values of Ksp of two sparingly solublesalts Ni(OH)2 and AgCN are 2.0
× 10–15and 6 × 10–17 respectively. Which salt ismore soluble? Explain.
ev
Solution
AgCN⇌Ag+ + CN-
Ksp = [Ag+][CN–] = 6 × 10–17
hi
Ni(OH)2⇌Ni2+ + 2OH–
Ksp = [Ni2+][OH–]2 = 2 × 10–15
Ac
Let [Ag+] = S1, then [CN-] = S1

Let [Ni2+] = S2, then [OH–] = 2S2
S12 = 6 × 10–17 , S1 = 7.8 × 10–9
(S2)(2S2)2 = 2 × 10–15, S2 = 0.58 × 10–4
Ni(OH)2 is more soluble than AgCN.
98

1. At 473 K, equilibrium constant Kcfor decomposition of phosphorus

pentachloride,PCl5 is 8.3 ×10-3. If decomposition is depicted as,
PCl5 (g) ⇌PCl3 (g) + Cl2 (g) ∆rH0= 124.0 kJ mol–1

a) Write an expression for Kcfor the reaction.
b) What is the value of Kcfor the reverse reaction at the same temperature?
c)what would be the effect on Kc if (i) more PCl5is added (ii) pressure is
y
increased(iii) the temperature is increased ?
em
Ans: (a) Kc=[PCl3][ Cl2]
[ PCl5]
(b)120.48
ad
(c) (i) equilibrium will shift on RHS
(ii) equilibrium will shift on LHS
(iii) equilibrium will shift on RHS
2. Dihydrogen gas is obtained from natural gas by partial oxidation with steam
Ac
asper following endothermic reaction:CH4 (g) + H2O (g) ⇌CO (g) + 3H2 (g)
(a) Write as expression for Kpfor the above reaction.
(b) How will the values of Kpand composition of equilibrium mixture be
affectedby(i) increasing the pressure(ii) increasing the temperature(iii) using a
catalyst?
s
Ans. (a) Kp=p(CO).p(H2)3/ p(CH4).p(H2O)

er
(b)(i) value of Kp will not change, equilibrium will shift in backward

direction.
(ii) Value of Kp will increase and reaction will proceed in forward
ev
direction.
(iii)no effect.
3. What is meant by the conjugate acid-base pair? Find the conjugate
acid/basefor the following species:HNO2, CN–, HClO4, F –, OH–, CO32–, and
hi
S2–
Ans.The acid-base pair thatdiffers only by one proton is called a conjugate
Ac
acid-base pair
Species Conjugate
acid/base
HNO2 NO2–
CN– HCN
HClO4 ClO4–
F– HF
OH– H2O
CO32- HCO32-
99

S2– HS–
HOTS QUESTIONS
1. The value of Kcfor the reaction2A ⇌B + C is 2 × 10-3. At a given time,the

composition of reaction mixture is[A] = [B] = [C] = 3 × 10 -4 M. In
whichdirection the reaction will proceed?
Solution
For the reaction the reaction quotient Qcis given by,Qc = [B][C]/ [A]2
as [A] = [B] = [C] = 3 × 10–4M
Qc = (3 ×10–4)(3 × 10–4) / (3 ×10–4)2 = 1
y
asQc>Kcso the reaction will proceed inthe reverse direction.
2. PCl5, PCl3 and Cl2 are at equilibrium at500 K and having concentration 1.59M
em
PCl3, 1.59M Cl2 and 1.41 M PCl5. Calculate Kcfor the reaction,PCl5⇌PCl3 + Cl2
Solution
The equilibrium constant Kcfor the abovereaction can be written as,
Kc =[PCl3][ Cl2]
ad
[ PCl5]
2
= (1.59) / 1.41 = 1.79
3. Why is ammonia termed as a base though it does not contain OH- ions?
Ans.ammona is termed as a base on the basis of Lewis concept it can donate a
Ac
lone pair of electrons.
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
100

CHAPTER-8
REDOX REACTIONS
oxidation reduction
1. Addition of oxygen 1. Removal of oxygen
2. Removal of hydrogen 2. Addition of hydrogen
3. Addition of an electronegative 3. Removal of an electronegative
element element
4. Removal of an electropositive 4. Addition of an electropositive
element element
y
5. Loss of electron 5. Gain of electron
em
Oxidation number denotes theoxidation state of an element in a compound
ascertained according to a setof rules formulated on the basis thatelectron in a
covalent bond belongsentirely to more electronegative element.
Calculation of oxidation number-
ad
1. O. S. of all the elements in their elemental form (in standard state) is taken as
zero O. S. of elements in Cl2, F2, O2, P4, O3, Fe(s), H2, N2, C(graphite) is zero.
2. Common O. S. of elements of group one (1st) is one. Common O. S. of
Ac
elements of group two (2nd) is two.
3. For ions composed of only one atom, theoxidation number is equal to the
chargeon the ion.
4. The oxidation number of oxygen in most compounds is –2.While in peroxides
s
(e.g., H2O2, Na2O2), eachoxygen atom is assigned an oxidationnumber of –1,

in superoxides (e.g., KO2,RbO2) each oxygen atom is assigned anoxidation
er
number of –(½).
5. In oxygendifluoride (OF2) and dioxygendifluoride (O2F2), the oxygen is
assignedan oxidation number of +2 and +1,respectively.
ev
6. The oxidation number of hydrogen is +1 but in metal hydride its oxidation no.
is–1.
7. In all its compounds, fluorine has anoxidation number of –1.
hi
8. The algebraic sum of the oxidation numberof all the atoms in a compound
must bezero.
Ac
9. In polyatomic ion, the algebraic sumof all the oxidation numbers of atoms
ofthe ion must equal the charge on the ion.
Stocknotation:the oxidationnumber is expressed by putting a Romannumeral
representing the oxidation numberin parenthesis after the symbol of the metal
inthe molecular formula. Thus aurous chlorideand auric chloride are written as
Au(I)Cl andAu(III)Cl3. Similarly, stannous chloride andstannic chloride are
written as Sn(II)Cl2andSn(IV)Cl4.
Oxidation: An increase in the oxidationnumber

Reduction: A decrease in the oxidationnumber
101

Oxidising agent: A reagent which canincrease the oxidation number of an

elementin a given substance. These reagents are calledas oxidants also.
Reducing agent: A reagent which lowers the oxidation number of an element
in a givensubstance. These reagents are also called asreductants.
Redox reactions: Reactions which involvechange in oxidation number of the
interactingspecies
Balancing of redox reactions:
Oxidation Number Method:
Write the net ionic equation for the reaction of potassium dichromate(VI),
K2Cr2O7 with sodium sulphite,Na2SO3, in an acid solution to give
y
chromium(III) ion and the sulphate ion.
Step 1: The skeletal ionic equation is:
em
Cr2O72–(aq) + SO32–(aq) → Cr3+(aq)+ SO42–(aq)
Step 2: Assign oxidation numbers forCr and S
+6 –2 +4 –2 +3 +6 –2
Cr2O72–(aq) + SO32–(aq) → Cr3+(aq)+ SO42–(aq)
ad
Step 3: Calculate the increase anddecrease of oxidation number, and make
them equal:
+6 –2 +4 –2
Ac
+3 +6
Cr2O7 aq) + 3SO3 (aq) → 2Cr (aq)+ 3SO42–(aq)
2–( 2– 3+
Step 4: Balance the charge by adding H+as the reaction occurs in theacidic
medium,
s
Cr2O72–(aq) + 3SO32–(aq) 8H+→ 2Cr3+(aq)+ 3SO42–(aq)

er
Step 5: Balance the oxygen atom by adding water molecule.

Cr2O72–(aq) + 3SO32–(aq) 8H+→ 2Cr3+(aq)+ 3SO42–(aq)+ 4H2O(l)
ev
Half Reaction Method

balance the equation showing the oxidation of Fe 2+ ions to Fe3+ ions by
dichromate ions (Cr2O7)2– in acidic medium,wherein, Cr2O72– ions are reduced
hi
to Cr3+ ions.
Step 1: Produce unbalanced equation for thereaction in ionic form :
Ac
Fe2+(aq) + Cr2O72– (aq) → Fe3+ (aq) + Cr3+(aq)

Step 2: Separate the equation into halfreactions:
+2 +3
Oxidation half : Fe2+ (aq) → Fe3+(aq)
+6 –2 +3
Reduction half :Cr2O72–(aq) → Cr3+(aq)
Step 3: Balance the atoms other than O andH in each half reaction
individually.
Cr2O72– (aq) → Cr3+(aq)
102

Step 4: For reactions occurring in acidicmedium, add H2O to balance O atoms

and H+to balance H atoms.Cr2O72– (aq) +14 H+→ Cr3+(aq) + 7H2O (l)
Step 5: Add electrons to one side of the halfreaction to balance the charges. If
need be,make the number of electrons equal in the twohalf reactions by
multiplying one or both halfreactions by appropriate coefficients.
Fe2+ (aq) → Fe3+ (aq) + e–
Cr2O72– (aq) + 14H+ (aq) + 6e– → 2Cr3+(aq) +7H2O (l)
6Fe2+ (aq) →6 Fe3+ (aq) +6 e–
Step 6: We add the two half reactions toachieve the overall reaction and
cancel theelectrons on each side. This gives the net ionicequation as :
y
6Fe2+(aq) + Cr2O72– (aq) + 14H+(aq) → 6 Fe3+(aq) +2Cr 3+(aq) + 7H2O(l)
A redox couple is defined as havingtogether the oxidised and reduced forms
em
of asubstance taking part in an oxidation orreduction half reaction.
Represented as Zn2+/Zn and Cu2+/Cu.
 Electrochemical cells are the devices which are used to get electric current by
using chemical reaction.
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
The potential associated with eachelectrode is known as electrode potential. Ifthe

concentration of each species taking partin the electrode reaction is unity (if any
gasappears in the electrode reaction, it is confinedto 1 atmospheric pressure) and
further thereaction is carried out at 298K, then thepotential of each electrode is said
hi
to be theStandard Electrode Potential.

SHE is used to measure electrode potential and its standard electrode potential
Ac
is taken as 0.00 V.
ONE MARK QUESTIONS
1. Define oxidation and reduction in terms of oxidation number.
Ans Increase in Oxidation Number is Oxidation and decrease in Oxidation
Number is called reduction.
2. What is meant by disproportionation? Give one example.
Ans : In a disproportionation reaction an element simultaneously oxidized and
reduced.
P4 + 3OH- +3H2O→ PH3 +3H2PO2-
3. What is O.N. of sulphur in H2SO4?Ans: +6
103

4. Identify the central atom in the following and predict their O.S.
HNO3
Ans: central atom:- N; O.S. +5
5. Out of Zn and Cu which is more reactive?
Ans: Zn.
6. What is galvanization?
Ans: Coating of a less reactive metal with a more reactive metal e.g.- coating
of iron surface with Zn to prevent rusting of iron.
7. How is standard cell potential calculated using standard electrode potential?
Ans: E0cell = E0cathode – E0anode
y
8. What is O.S. of oxygen in H2O2?
Ans: - -1.
em
9. The formation of sodium chloride from gaseous sodium and gaseous chloride
is a redox process justify.
Ans: Na atom get oxidize and Cl is reduced.
ad
TWO MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Write the balanced redox reaction .
(I) MnO4–(aq) + Fe2+(aq) → Mn2+(aq)+ Fe3+(aq) [acidic medium]
(II) Cr2O72– + Fe2+ →Cr3+ + Fe3+ [Acidic medium]
Ac
Ans:- (i) MnO4–(aq) +5Fe2+(aq) + 8H+(aq) → Mn2+(aq)+ 5Fe3+(aq) + 4H2O(l)
(ii) Cr2O72– +6Fe2+ + 14H+→ 2Cr3+ + 6Fe3+ + 7H2O
2. Identify the strongest & weakest reducing agent from the following metals:
s
.Zn, Cu, Na, Ag, Sn

Ans: Strongest reducing agent: Na, weakest reducing agent: Ag.
er
3. Determine the oxidation no. of all the atoms in the following oxidants:KMnO4,
K2Cr2O7 and KClO4
Ans :
ev
In KMnO4 K = +1, Mn = +7, O = -2

In K2Cr2O7K = +1, Cr = +6, O = -2
In KClO4K = +1, Cl = =+7, O = -2
hi
4. Determine the oxidation no. of all the atoms in the following species:Na2O2
and OF2.
Ac
Ans: In Na2O2Na = +1, O = -1

InOF2, F = -1, O = +2
5. Is it possible to store :
(i) H2SO4 in Al container?(ii) CuSO4 solution in Zn vessel?
Ans : (i) yes. (ii) No.
6. Calculate the standard e.m.f. of the cell formed by the combination of
Zn/Zn2+⎤⎤ Cu2+/Cu.
Solution- : E0cell = E0cathode – E0anode
=0.34 – (-0.76) = 1.10V.
7. Identify the oxidizing and reducing agents in the following equations:
104

(i) MnO4–(aq) +5Fe2+(aq) + 8H+(aq) → Mn2+(aq)+ 5Fe3+(aq) + 4H2O(l)

(ii) Cr2O72– +6Fe2+ + 14H+→ 2Cr3+ + 6Fe3+ + 7H2O
Ans : (i) O.A. = MnO4– ; R.A.= Fe2+
(ii)O.A.=Cr2O72–; R.A.= Fe2+
8. Predict all the possible oxidation states of Cl in its compounds.
Ans:- 0, -1, +1, +3, +5, +7
9. Formulate possible compounds of „Cl‟ in its O.S.is: 0, -1, +1, +3, +5, +7
Ans: Cl2, HCl, HOCl, HOClO, HOClO2, HOClO3 respectively.
10. List three measures used to prevent rusting of iron.
Ans: (i) galvanization(coating iron by a more reactive metal)
y
(ii) greasing/oiling
(iii) painting.
em
THREE MARK QUESTIONS
1. Write short notes on :
(a) Electrochemical series(b) redox reactions (c) oxidizing agents
ad
Ans :(a) Electrochemical series :- arrangement of metals(non-metals also)
in increasing order of their reducing power or vice versa.
(b) Reactions in which both Oxidation and reduction take place simultaneously
Ac
are REDOX REACTIONS.
(c)oxidizing agents : chemical specie which can oxidize the other one or can
reduce itself.
2. Calculate O. S. of sulphur in the following oxoacids of „S‟ :
H2SO4 ,H2SO3H2S2O8and H2S2O7
s
Ans : +6, +4, +6 and +6 respectively.

er
(calculate by considering x of ‟S‟ and taking +1 of H, -2 0f “O” and -1 of

“O” in peroxide bond.)
ev
3. Explain role of salt bridge in Daniell cell.

Ans : (a) it completes the electric circuit in the cell.
(b) it maintains the electric neutrality in the cell.
hi
4. Account for the followings :

(i) sulphur exhibits variable oxidation states.
Ac
Ans. Due to the presence of vacant „d‟ orbitals in „S‟

(ii) Fluorine exhibits only -1 O.S.
Ans . It is most electronegative element
(iii) oxygen can‟t extend its valency from 2.
Ans. Small size/unavailabilityof vacant „d‟ orbitals in O
5. Balance the equation MnO4– + I-→ Mn2+ +I2 + H2Oby ion electron
method in acidic medium.
Ans :Step-I Balancing of reduction half reaction by adding protons and
electrons on LHS and more water molecules on RHS:
8H++ MnO4– +5e-→ Mn2+ + 4H2O
105

Step-II Balancing of oxidation half reaction by adding electrons on RHS:

2I-→ I2 +2e-
Step-III To multiply the OHR by 5; RHR by2 andto add OH & RH reactions to
get overall redox reaction(cancellation of electrons of RH & OH r eactions):
[8H+(aq)+ MnO4–(aq) +5e-→ Mn2+(aq) + 4H2O(l)] x 2
[ 2I-→ I2 +2e-] x 5
MnO4–(aq) +5Fe2+(aq) + 8H+(aq) → Mn2+(aq)+ 5Fe3+(aq) + 4H2O(l)
6. complete and balance the following equations:
y
H+ + Cr2O72-+ Br-→ 2Cr3+ + Br2+ -----
em
(i)
(ii) H2O2 + Cl-→ OH- + Cl2
(iii) Zn + Cu2+ → ?
ad
Ans :(i) 14H+ + Cr2O72-+6 Br-→ 2Cr3+ + 3Br2 + 7H2O
(ii) H2O2 + 2Cl-→ 2OH- + Cl2

Ac
(ii) Zn + Cu2+ → Zn2+ + Cu
7. Identify the oxidizing and reducing agents in the following equations:
(i) Fe + H2SO4→FeSO4 + H2
(ii)H2 + Cl2 →2HCl
s
(iii) MnO2 + 4HCl→MnCl2 + 2H2O + Cl2

er
Ans :(i) O.A. =H2SO4 ; R.A.= Fe

(ii) O.A. = Cl2; R.A.=H2
(iii)O.A. = MnO2; R.A. =HCl
ev
8. . Arrange the following in increasing order of their reducing power:
Cu, Ag, Au, Zn, Fe, Al, Na, Mg, Pt(SHE), Hg, Ca, K
hi
Ans : Au, Hg, Ag, Cu, Pt(SHE), Fe, Zn, Al, Mg, Na, Ca, K
Ac
9.
Indicate O.S. of each atom present in given structure of peroxodisulphuric
acid
O O
+
+ S
S
O O OH
HO
OH
HO
106

Ans: -2 -2 +6
O O
+
+ S
S
O O OH
HO
OH
HO
y
+1 -2
em
-1
ad
10.What is SHE? What is its use?
Ans :Standard Hydrogen Electrode (SHE) has beenselected to have zero standard
potential at alltemperatures. It consists of a platinum foilcoated with platinum black
Ac
(finely dividedplatinum) dipping partially into an aqueous solution in which the
activity (approximateconcentration 1M) of hydrogen ion is unity andhydrogen gas is
bubbled through the solutionat 1 bar pressure.The potential of the other half cell is
measuredby constructing a cell in which reference electrode is standard hydrogen
s
electrode. The potential of the other half cell is equal to thepotential of the cell.
er
ev
hi
Ac
Fig: SHE
HOTS QUESTIONS
1. Is rusting of iron an electrochemical phenomenon? How ?explain.
Ans : Yes. Rusting of iron is an electrochemical phenomenon because this is

possible due to formation of a small electrochemical cell over rough surface of
iron and the following redox reaction takes place there in that cell-
107

Oxidation Fe(s) → Fe2+(aq) + 2e-

Reduction O2+ 4H+ 4e- → 2H2O
e- + ½ O2 + 2H2O +2Fe2+→Fe2O3 + 4H+
y
em
2. We expand croreof Rupees and even thousands of lives every year due to
corrosion. How can be preventing it. Explain.
ad
Ans : (i) By Galvanization: Coating of a less reactive metal with a more reactive
metal e.g.- coating of iron surface with Zn to prevent rusting of iron.
(ii) By greasing /oiling (to keep away the object from the contact of air &
Ac
moisture.)
(iii)By painting (to keep away the object from the contact of air &
moisture.)
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
108

CHAPTER 9
HYDROGEN
 Position of Hydrogen in Periodic Table
 Lightest element known having atomic number 1.
 Dihydrogen
 It resembles both alkali metals and halogens and therefore, its position is
anomalous.
 In modern periodic table it is located separately
y
Resemblance with alkali metals:-
em
1. Electronic configuration
1 2 2 6 1 2 2 6 2 6 1
1H = 1s 11Na = 1s , 2s , 2p , 3s 19K = 1s , 2s , 2p , 3s 3p , 4s
2. Electropositive character: H+, Na+, K+ etc.
3. Oxidation state: +1
ad
4. Combination with electronegative elements: form binary compounds with
electronegative elements like alkali metals.
Halides: HClNaCl, KCletc
Sulphides: H2S Na2S, K2S etc
Ac
Resemblance with halogens:-
1. Electronic configuration:
Both contain one electron less than the nearest noble gas configuration
1
1H = 1s (near to 2He)
2 2 5
9F = 1s , 2s , 2p (near to 8Ne)
s
2 2 6 2 5
17K = 1s , 2s , 2p , 3s 3p (near to 18Ar)
er
2. Non-metallic character: like halogens, hydrogen is non-metallic in nature.

3. Atomicity: Diatomic molecules.
4. Formation of similar types of compounds:
ev
i. Halides: CCl4, SiCl4, GeCl4

ii. Hydrides: CH4, SiH4, GeH4
5. Oxidation state: –1
Na+1H-1 Na+1Cl-1
hi
Difference from alkali metals:-

1) Ionization enthalpy: - the ionization enthalpy of hydrogen is very high in
Ac
comparison to alkali metals.

2) Non- metallic character: alkali metals are typical metals while hydrogen is
non-metal
3) Atomicity: hydrogen is diatomic while alkali metals are monoatomic.
4) Nature of compounds: the compounds of hydrogen are predominantly
covalent while those of alkali metals are ionic. For example: HCl is covalent
while NaCl is ionic.
The oxides of alkali metals are basic while hydrogen oxide is neutral.
109

Difference from halogens:-

1) Less tendency for hydride formation:Hydrogen has less tendency to take up
electron to form hydride ion (H-) as compared to the halogens which from
halide ions (X-) very easily.
2) Absence of unshared pairs of electrons :
3) Nature of oxides: The oxides of halogens are acidic while hydrogen oxide is
neutral.
y
 Occurrence of Hydrogen:
em
 Hydrogen, the most abundant element in the universe and the third most
abundant on the surface of the globe, is being visualised as the major future
source of energy
Isotopes of hydrogen:-
ad
S.N. Property Protium Deuterium Tritium
1 Relative abudance 99.985 % 0.015 % 10-15%
2 Relative atomic mass 1.007825 2.014102 3.016
3 Radioactive stability Non- Non- Radioactive
Ac
radioactive radioactive t1/2 = 12.334
yrs
 Preparation:
Methods for commercial production of dihydrogen
s
1. Electrolysis of water
er
2H2O(l) 2H2(g) O2(g)
 The hydrogen prepared by this method is of very high purity. However, this
ev
method is not commonly used because it is very expensive. This method is can
be used only at those places where the electricity is cheap.
2. By the reaction of steam on coke :-
hi
C + H2O(g) CO + H2
Water gas
Ac
 Since the mixture of CO and H2 is used for the synthesis of methanol and a
number of hydrocarbons, it is also called synthesis gas or syn gas.
 The process of producing syn gas from coal or coke is called coal gasification.
CO + H2 + H2O CO2 + 2H2

Water gas steam
 This reaction is called water gas shift reaction.
110

Properties of Hydrogen:-
Physical Properties:-
1) It is slightly soluble in water (about 2 %)
2) It is highly combustible and therefore should be handled carefully.
3) It lightest substance. The weight of one litre hydrogen at NTP is only 0.0899 g.
Chemical properties:-Not very reactive due to high bond dissociation energy
(435.88 kJ mol-1 at 298.2 K)
(i)Combustion: - It burns with pale blue flame
y
2H2 (g) + O2 (g) 2H2O(l)
em
(ii) Reaction with metals:-Reactive metals like Na, K, Ca, Li and form hydrides.
Ca + H2CaH2
 Metals like Pt, Pd, Ni (elements of d block) form interstitial hydrides by
absorbing large volume of hydrogen. Such hydrogen is called ‘occluded
ad
hydrogen and this property of adsorption of a gas by a metal is called occlusion.
(iii) Reaction with metal oxides:-Hydrogen reduces oxides of less active metals to
corresponding metal. Ac
Fe3O4 + 4H23Fe + 4H2O
CuO + H2 Cu + H2O
(iv) Reaction with non-metals:-
3H2 (g) + N2 (g) →2NH3(g) { Haber process}
s
H = - 92.6 kj/mole
er
2H2 (g)+ O2 (g) 2H2OH = - 285.9 kj/mole

ev
(v) Reaction with carbon monoxide:-

CO + H2 CH3OH
hi
(vi) Reaction with unsaturated Hydrocarbons:-

Ac
(a) H2C = CH2 + H2 H3C – CH3

(b) Hydroformylation of olefins to aldehydes:Hydroformilation or Oxo process
RCH = CH2 + H2 + CO RCH2CH2CHO
(c) Hydrogenation of oils:-Vegetable oils are polyun-saturated in nature. The C

=C bonds in oils can easily undergo oxidation and the oil becomes rancid i.e.,
111

unpleasant in taste. Hydrogenation reduces the number of double bonds but

completely.
Vegetable Oil + H2 Fat (Solid)
Uses of Hydrogen:-it itused ..
1. as a reducing agent.
2. In the manufacture of vanaspati fat, ammonia, metal hydrides, methanol,
y
fertilizers such as urea etc.
3. In the manufacture of synthetic petrol.
em
4. In the atomic hydrogen torch and oxy hydrogen torches for cutting and welding.
Dihydrogen is dissociated with the help of an electric arc and the
hydrogen atoms produced are allowed to recombine on the surface
to be welded. High temperature of about 4000 k is generated.
ad
5. In the fuel cell for generating electrical energy.
Ortho and parahydrogens:-A molecules of dihydrogen …….abc
Ac
Ortho hydrogen Para hydrogen
s
 They show different physical properties. For example :
(i) The thermal conductivity of para hydrogen is about 50 % greater than
er
that of ortho hydrogen.

(ii) The melting point of para hydrogen is 0.15 k below that of hydrogen
containing 75% ortho hydrogen.
ev
 They show similar chemical properties.

Atomic hydrogen:-
 Because of high H—H bond enthalpy, atomic hydrogen is produced only at
hi
high temp in an electric arc or under ultraviolet radiation.

H2 (g) 2H (g) H = + 435.9 kj
Ac
(Atomic hydrogen)
 Highly reactive.
 Half life period is 0.3 sec and therefore, it immediately gets converted into the
molecular form liberating a large amount of energy which is used for cutting
and welding purposes.
112

Nascent hydrogen:-The hydrogen produced in contact with the substance to be

reduced is known as ‘nascent hydrogen’. It is very reactive form of hydrogenBetter
reducing agent than ordinary dihydrogen.
Hydrides:-Under certain conditions H2 combines with almost all the elements ,except
noble gases to form compounds called hydrides.
 There are three types of hydrides ,they are
(i) Ionic or saline hydrides
(ii) Covalent or molecular hydrides (iii) Metallic or non-stoichiometric hydrides(i)
y
Ionic or saline hydrides:-
em
 These are the compounds of H2 formed with most of the s-block elements
which are highly electro positive.
(ii) Covalent or molecular hydrides:-These are the compounds of hydrogen
formed with most of the p-block elements
ad
[a]Electron deficient:- The hydrides which do not have sufficient number of
electrons to form normal covalent bonds is called electron deficient hydride. For
example, hydride of group 13 (BH3, AlH3, etc.).They are known as Lewis acids
i.e., electron acceptors. To make up their deficiency they generally exist in
Ac
polymeric forms such as B2H6, Al2H6, etc.
[b] Electron precise:-The hydrides which have sufficient number of electrons
required for forming covalent bonds is called electron precise hydride. For
example, hydrides of group 14 (CH4, SiH4, GeH4, SnH4, PbH4 etc.) they have
s
tetrahedral geometry.
[c] Electron rich hydrides:-The hydrides which have excess electrons as required
er
to form normal covalent bonds is called electron rich hydride. For example,
hydrides of group 15 to 17 (NH3, PH3, H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2Te, HF etc.)
(iii) Metallic or non-stoichiometric hydrides:-
ev
 These are formed by many d-block and f-block elements

 These hydrides conducts heat and electricity though not efficient.
Water: -Water! It is the major part of all living organisms.water is also known
hi
as the river of life.

 Human body has about 65%and some plants haveasmuch as 95%water.
 STRUCTURE OF WATER:-
Ac
 In a gas phase water is bent molecule with a bond angle of 104.5 and O-H bond
length of 95.7pm It is highly polar molecule.
95.7 pm O H H H
104.5° H O
H O O
H H H H
Solid state
113

H
 Structure of ice:-Ice has a highly ordered 3D
O
hydrogen bonded structure. Each oxygen atom H H H
is surrounded tetrahedrally by four other four
O O
other oxygen atoms at a distance of 276 pm H H H H
H
O O O
H H H H H
y
O O
em
H H H
Chemical Properties of water:- O
H
[i] AMPHOTERIC NATURE:-It has the ability to act as an acid as well as base
.it acts as an acid with NH3 and as a base with H2S Vacant space
H2O(l) +NH3(aq)OH-(aq) +NH4+ (aq)
ad
H2O(l) +H2S(aq)  H3O+(aq) +HS- (aq)
[ii] REDOX REACTIONS INVOLVING WATER:-
 Water can be easily reduced to H2 by highly electropositive metals
2H2O(l) +2Na(s) 2NaOH(aq) +H2(g)
Ac
[iii] HYDROLYSIS REACTION:-Due to high dielectric constant, it has a very
strong hydrating tendency .it dissolves many ionic compounds
P4O10(s) +6H20(l) 4H3PO4(aq)
SiCl4(l) +2H2O(l) SiO2(s) + 4HCl(aq)
s
[iv] HYDRATES FORMATION:-From the aqueous solutions many salts can be
crystallized as hydrated salts. It of different types.
er
(1) Coordinated water e.g., [Cr(H2O)6]3+ 3Cl-

(2) Interstitial water e.g.,BaCl2.2H2O
(3) hydrogen-bonded water e.g. [Cu(H2O)4]2+4SO2- .H2Oin CuSO4.5H2O
ev
.
Hard & Soft Water:-
 The water which contains dissolved salts of bicarbonates, sulphates and
hi
chlorides of calcium and magnesium is called hard water. Hard water does not
produce lather with soap solution.
Ac
 Soft water is free from bicarbonates, sulphates and chlorides of calcium and
magnesium. It produces lather with soap solution easily. e.g., distilled water,
rain water..
Types of hardness:-The hardness of water is of two types
(i)Temporary hardness
 Due to presence of soluble bicarbonates of calcium and magnesium.
 Can be removed by simple boiling.
(ii)Permanent hardness
114

 Due to presence of chlorides and sulphates of calcium and magnesium.

 Requires treatment of water to remove this type hardness.
 Do you know?
Temporary hardness is also called carbonate hardness &
Permanent hardness is also called non-carbonate hardness
Softening of water:-The process of removal of Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions from water
is called softening of water.
 Removal of temporary hardness:-
y
(i) By boiling :
em
M(HCO3)2 MCO3 + H2O + CO2(M = Ca or Mg)
(Soluble) (Insoluble)
(ii) Clark’s method or calcium hydroxide method
Ca(HCO3)2 + Ca(OH)2 →2CaCO3 + 2H2O
ad
(Soluble) (Insoluble)
Mg(HCO3)2 + 2Ca(OH)2→2CaCO3 + Mg(OH)2 + 2H2
(Soluble) (Insoluble)(Insoluble)
 Removal of permanent hardness:-
(i)
Ac
By washing soda (Na2CO3.10H2O) treatment:
CaCl2 +Na2CO3→ 2CaCO3 + 2NaCl
(Insoluble)
MgSO4 +Na2CO3――→ MgCO3 + Na2SO4
s
(Insoluble)
er
(ii) By using inorganic cation exchanger (permutit method or Zeolite

method):
Na2Al2Si2O8 + CaCl2→Ca(Al2Si2O8)2 + 2NaCl
ev
Zeolite Settles at bottom

The zeolite can be regenerated by treatment with sodium chloride solution.
Ca(Al2Si2O8)2 + 2NaCl →Na2Al2Si2O8 + CaCl2
hi
(iii) By organic ion exchanger or synthetic resins (ion exchange resins):-

 Synthetic resins are the insoluble polymeric solids having giant hydrocarbon
network containing reactive acidic or basic groups. These are superior to
Ac
Zeolitebecause they can remove all types of cations as well as anions present in
water. This resulting water is known as demineralised or deionised water.
 These are two types:
(a) Cation exchanger resins: they have acidic groups such as COOH or SO3H.
they may be represented as resin—H+
Mg2 2H re sin Mg (resin)2 2H
In hard water Cation exchanger
Ca2 2H re sin Ca (resin)2 2H

Hard water Cation exchanger 115

(b) Anion exchanger resins: they have basic groups such as –OH- or –NH2.
they may be represented as resin—OH- or resin—NH3+OH-
SO24 2HO resin SO4 resin 2 2OH
Hard water Anion exchanger
Cl HO resin Cl re sin OH
y
Hard water Anion exchanger
em
Regeneration of resiners:
Ca resin 2HCl 2H re sin CaCl2
Cl re sin 2 NaOH
Exchausted resin
ReHO re sinresin
generated NaCl
Exchausted resin Re generated resin
ad
Hydrogen peroxide [H2O2]:- discovered by French chemist J.L. Thenard
 Methods of preparation
1) From sodium peroxide (Merck’s process):-
Na2O2 + H2SO4 → Na2SO4 + H2O2
(20% ice cooled solution)
Ac
(30% solution)
2. From Barium peroxide:-
 Hydrogen peroxide was first prepared by J. L. Thenard in 1818 by acidifying
barium peroxide and removal of excess water by evaporation under reduced
s
pressure.
BaO2.8H2O + H2SO4 BaSO4 + 8H2O + H2O2
er
 Barium sulphate is filtered off leaving behind H2O2.

Store of Hydrogen peroxide:-
ev
a) Itmust be kept in wax lined coloured bottles because the rough glass surface
causes its decomposition.
b) A small amount of phosphoric acid , glycerol or acetanilide is generally added
hi
which retard the decomposition of H2O2. These are also called negative
catalysts.
 Physical properties of Hydrogen peroxide:-
Ac
1. In the pure state H2O2 is an almost colourless(very pale blue) liquid.

2. H2O2 is miscible with water in allproportions and forms a hydrate H2O2.H2O
(mp 221K).
3. A 30% solution of H2O2 is marketedas ‘100 volume’ hydrogen peroxide. It
means thatone millilitre of 30% H2O2 solution will give 100 Vof oxygen at
STP. Commercially, it is marketedas 10 V, which means it contains 3%
H2O2.
Chemical properties of Hydrogen peroxide:-
116

y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
 Uses of hydrogen peroxide

1) For bleaching silk, wool, hair and leather
2) As rocket fuel
hi
 Structure of hydrogen peroxide

Ac
H H
95.0 pm 95.8 pm
147.5 pm 147.8 pm
90.2° 90.2°
101.9° 101.9°
H H
Gas phase Solid phase
Structure of hydrogen peroxide 117

Hydrogen economy (Hydrogen as fuel)

 The electricity cannot be stored to run automobiles. It is not possible to store
and transport nuclear energy. Hydrogen is an alternative source of energy and
hence called as ‘hydrogen economy’. Hydrogen has some advantages as fuel
 Available in abundance in combined form as water.
 On combustion produces H2O. Hence pollution free.
 H2-O2 fuel cell give more power.
 Excellent reducing agent. Therefore can be used as substitute of carbon in
y
reduction for processes in industry.
em
 Obstacles in hydrogen economy
 Transportation:
 Hydrogen gas is explosive and hence it is difficult to store and transport.
 Formation of hydrogen from H2O:
 The cheaper production of the hydrogen is basic requirement of hydrogen
ad
economy which is not possible now.
 The main aim and advantage of hydrogen economy is to transmit energy in four
of hydrogen. Ac
One mark question:
1. What is meant by 10 volume hydrogen peroxide?
2. Why is dihydrogen gas not preferred in balloons?
s
3. Name the constituents of water gas.
4. Name one compound each in which hydrogen exists in (i) positive oxidation
er
state, and (ii) Negative oxidation state.

5. What type of elements form interstitial hydrides?
ev
6. How many hydrogen bonded water molecule(s) are present in CuSO 4.5H2O?
7. What happens when heavy water is added to calcium carbonate?
8. Concentrated sulphuric acid cannot be used for drying H2. Why?
9. Complete the following reactions?
hi
(i) C3H8 (g) + 3H2O(g)

Ac
(ii) Zn(s) + NaOH(aq)
10. How heavy water is is obtained from ordinary water?

Solutions:
1. It means that 1 ml of H2O2 will give 10 ml of oxygen at N.T.P.
2. Dihydrogen gas is combustible in nature. Therefore, it may react with oxygen
highly violently. Thus, it is not used in balloons.
3. Carbon monoxide and hydrogen.
118

4. (i) HCl (ii) NaH

5. Elements of d-and f-block.
6. In CuSO4.5H2O, there is one hydrogen bonded water molecule which is outside
the coordination sphere. The other four molecules of water are coordinated.
7. Deutero acetylene is formed.
CaC2 + 2D2O Ca(OD)2 + C2D2
8. Conc. H2SO4 on absorbing water from moist H2 produces so much heat that H2
catches fire.
y
9.
em
(i) C3H8 (g) + 3H2O(g) 3CO + 7H2(g)
(ii) Zn(s) + NaOH(aq) Na2ZnO2(aq) + H2(g)
ad
10. Heavy water is obtained from ordinary water by repeated electrolysis in the
presence of 3% NaOH.
Two mark question
Ac
1. Can we use concentrated sulphuric acid and pure zinc in the preparation of
dihydrogen?
2. Write the chemical reactions to show the amphoteric nature of water.
3. Why is hydrogen peroxide stored in wax-lined plastic coloured bottles?
s
4. H2O2 acts as an oxidizing agent as well as reducing agent. Why?
5. What causes the temporary and permanent hardness of water?
er
Solutions:
1. (a) Conc. H2SO4 cannot be used because it acts as oxidizing agent also and gets
ev
reduced to SO2.
Zn + dil H2SO4 ZnSO4 + 2H2O + SO2
(b) Pure Zn is not used because it is non-porous and reaction will be slow. The
hi
impurities in Zn help in constitute of electrochemical couple and speed up

reaction.
2. Water is amphoteric in nature and it behaves both as an acid as well as a base.
Ac
With acids stronger than itself (eg., H2S) it behaves as a base and with bases
stronger than itself (eg. NH3) it acts as an acid.
(i) As a base: H2O(l) +H2S(aq)  H3O+(aq) +HS- (aq)
(ii) As an acid: H2O(l) +NH3(aq)  OH-(aq) +NH4+ (aq)
3. The decomposition of H2O2 occurs readily in the presence of rough surface
(acting as catalyst). It is also decomposed by exposure of light. Therefore, wax-
lined smooth surface and coloured bottles retard the decomposition of H 2O2.
119

4. In H2O2, oxygen has -1 oxidation state which lies between maximum (0 or +2 in

OF2) and minimum -2. Therefore, oxygen can be oxidized to O2 (zero
oxidation state) acting as reducing agent or can be reduced to H2O or OH- (-2
oxidation state) acting as an oxidizing agent.
-1 0
O2→O2+ 2e-
(Reducing agent)
-1 -2
y
O2 + 2e- → 2O
em
(Oxidizing agent)
5. Temporary hardness is due to presence of soluble bicarbonates of calcium and
magnesium. On the other hand, permanent hardness is due to presence of
chlorides and sulphates of calcium and magnesium.
ad
Three mark question:
Ac
1. Hard water is unsuitable for laundry, washing and dyeing. Explain.
2. What do you understand by (i) electron-deficient, (ii) electron-precise, and (iii)
electron-rich compounds of hydrogen? Provide justification with suitable
examples.
3. Compare the structures of H2O and H2O2.
s
Solutions:
1. Ans: - since we know that the soap are the sodium salts of higher fatty acids
er
like stearic acid (C17H35COOH), oleic acid (C17H33COOH) or palmitic acid

(C17H31COOH). When soap is added to hard water, the anions of soap combine
with Ca+2 and Mg+2 ions to form calcium and magnesium salt which are
ev
insoluble in water.
M+2 + 2C17H35COONa → (C17H35COO)2M + 2Na
From hard sodium stearate Metal stearate
hi
Water (Soap) (precipitate)

Therefore, no lather is produce until all the calcium and magnesium ions are
Ac
precipitated. This also results into wastage of lot of soap. So hard water is
unsuitable for laundry, washing and dyeing.
2. [a]Electron deficient:- The hydrides which do not have sufficient number of
electrons to form normal covalent bonds is called electron deficient hydride.
For example, hydride of group 13 (BH3, AlH3, etc.).
[b] Electron precise:-The hydrides which have sufficient number of electrons
required for forming covalent bonds is called electron precise hydride. For
120

example, hydrides of group 14 (CH4, SiH4, GeH4, SnH4, PbH4 etc.) they have
tetrahedral geometry.
[c] Electron rich hydrides:-The hydrides which have excess electrons as
required to form normal covalent bonds is called electron rich hydride. For
example, hydrides of group 15 to 17 (NH3, PH3, H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2Te, HF etc.)
3. In water, O atom is sp3hybridised and there are two O—H

Due toO
95.7 pm
bonds and two sp3 hybrid orbitals occupy lone pairs of electrons.
y
stronger lone pair-lone pair repulsions than bond 104.5° H
H
em
pair-bond pair repulsions, the H-O-H bond decreases from
109.5 to 104.50. Therefore, water molecule is a bent or
angular molecule. H2O2 has non-planar structure. In this structure, two O—O
oxygen atoms are bonded to each other by a single covalent bond and each O
ad
atom is further bonded to a hydrogen atom by a single covalent bond. The two
O—H bonds are in different planes in 111.50 in the gas phase.
Ac H
H
95.0 pm 95.8 pm
147.5 pm 147.8 pm
90.2° 90.2°
s
101.9° 101.9°
er
H H
Gas phase Solid phase

ev
Structure of hydrogen peroxide

hi
Ac
121

Chapter 10
The s- Block Element
Important points
 Groups (1 & 2) belong to the s-block of the Periodic Table.

 Group 1 consists of : lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, caesium and
francium and collectively known as the alkali metals.
 Group 2 include : beryllium, magnesium,calcium, strontium, barium and
radium. Except Beryllium they are known as alkaline
 Physical properties-
y
a) Large atomic radii: The atomic radii of alkali metals are the largest in their
respective periods. These increase as we travel down the group.
em
b) Large ionic radii: The ionic radii increase as we move down the group due to the
addition of a new energy shell with each succeeding element.
c) Low ionization enthalpy: The ionization enthalpies decrease as we move down
the group.The ionization enthalpies of the alkali metals are the lowest due to
ad
loosely held s- electron.
d) Hydration enthalpy: It decreases with the increase in ionic radii.The hydration
enthalpy of Li ion is the maximum and the hydration enthalpy of Cs ion is the
Ac
minimum.
e) Oxidation state: The alkali metals exhibit oxidation state of +1 in their
compounds and are strongly electropositive in character. The electropositive
character increases from Li to Cs.
f) Metallic character: The metallic character increases down the group.
s
g) Melting point and boiling point:: The m p and b p of alkali metals are very low
and decrease with increase in atomic number.
er
h) Nature of bonds formed: These metals form ionic bonds. The ionic character
increases as we down the group.
ev
i) Flame colouration: All the alkali metals impart a charactersistic colour to the
flame.
j) Photoelectric effect: Alkali metals (except Li) exhibits photoelectric effect.
 Chemical features of alkali metals:
hi
a) Reducing character: As the ionization enthalpies of the alkali metals decrease

down the group their reducing character or reactivity in the gaseous state
Ac
increases down the group. i.e., Li < Na < K < Rb < Cs .

b) Reaction with dihydrogen: Alkali metals react with dry hydrogen at about
673 K to form crystalline hydrides which are ionic in nature and have high
melting points.
Heat
2 M + H2 2M + H-
c) Oxides and hydroxides: Alkali metals when burnt in air form different
compounds, for example the alkali metals on reaction with limited quantity of
oxygen form normal oxides ( M2O) M= Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs
122

d) Reaction with halogens: The members of the family combine with halogen
to form corresponding halides which are ionic crystalline solids.
Reactivity of alkali metls with particular halogen increases from Li to Cs.
e) Reaction with water: Alkali metals react with water and other compounds
containing acidic hydrogen atoms such as hydrogen halides, acetylene etc. to
liberate hydrogen gas.
f) Solubility in liquid ammonia: All alkali metals dissolve in liquid ammonia
giving deep blue solutions which are conducting in nature.
g) Reaction with sulphur and phosphorus: Alkali metals react with sulphur and
phosphorus on heating to form sulphides and phosphides respectively.
y
 Diagonal relationship between Li and Al
Li resembles Mg mainly due to similarity in sizes of their atoms and ions. The main
em
points of similarity are:
i) Both are quite hard.
ii) Both LiOH and Mg(OH)2 are weak bases.
iii) Carbonates of both on heating decompose to produce oxides and
ad
carbondioxide.
iv) Both react with nitrogen to give ionic nitrides.
v) Nitrates of both decompose on heating to give oxides.
Ac
vi) Both Li and Mg do not form solid bicarbonates.
vii) Because of covalent character LiCl and MgCl2 are soluble in ethanol.
viii) The hydroxides, bicarbonates and fluorides of both Li and Mg are sparingly
soluble in water.
 Biological importance of Na and K
s
i) Sodium ions participate in the transmission of nerve signals.

ii) Sodium ions also regulate flow of water across the cell membranes and in
er
transport of sugars and amino acids into the cells.

iii) Potassium ions are the most abundant cations within cell fluids, where they
ev
activate many enzymes, participate in oxidation of glucose to produce ATP.

iv) Potassium ions in combination with sodium ions are responsible for
transmission of nerve signals.
v) The functional features of nerve cells depend upon the sodium potassium ion
hi
gradient that is established in the cell.

 Group 2 elements: Alkaline earth metals
Ac
(a) Atomic radii : The atomic radii of alkaline earth metals are fairly large though
smaller than the corresponding alkali metals and they increase down the group. This
is because on moving down the group, atomic radii increase primarily due to the
addition of an extra shell of electrons in each succeeding element.
(b) Ionic radii: the atoms of these elements form divalent ions which show the same
trend of increase in their size down the group.
(c) Ionization enthalpy: The alkaline earth metals have fairly low Ionizations
enthalpies though greater than those of the corresponding elements of group 1 and
this value decreases down the group.
123

(d) Hydration enthalpy: the Hydration enthalpies of alkaline earth metal ion
decrease as the size of the metal ion increases down the Group
Be2+ >Mg2+ >Ca2+ >Sr2+ >Ba2+
(e) Oxidation State: All the members of the family exhibit +2 oxidation state in their
compounded and the form divalent cations (M 2+)
(f) Electro negativity : The electro negativity values of alkaline earth metals are
quite close to those of alkali metals, though slightly more.
(g) Metallic Character : Alkaline earth metals have stronger metallic bonds as
compared to the alkali metals present in the same period.
(h) Melting and boiling point : The melting and Boiling points of these metals are
y
higher than those of alkali metals present in the same period.
(i) Colouration to the flame : With the exceptio9n of beryllium and magnesium, the
em
rest of the elements impart characters in colour to the same flame. For example,
Be Mg Ca Sr Ba Ra
- - Brick Red Crimson Grassy Green Crimson
J) Complex formation: Generally the members do not form complexes. However,
ad
smaller ions ( Be & Mg Ions) form complexes with the electron donor species
k) Formation of organo-metallic compounds: Both beryllium and magnesium
form a number of organo-metallic compounds containing M-C bond with certain
Ac
organic compounds. For example, magnesium reacts with alkyl halide in the
presence of dry ether to give Grignard reagent.
l) Reducing character: Alkaline earth metals are weak reducing agent than the
corresponding alkali metals which have lower ionization enthalpies and
comparatively bigger atomic sizes.
s
m) Reaction with oxygen: With the exception of Ba and Ra which form peroxides (
MO2) rest of the metals form normal oxides (MO) on heating with excess of
er
oxygen.
n) Reaction with halogens: The members of the family combine directly with
ev
halogen at appropriate temperature to form corresponding halides.

o) Reaction with water: The members of this group are less reactive towards water
as compared to the corresponding alkali metals because these are less
electropositive in nature.
hi
p) Reaction with hydrogen: The members except Be combine with hydrogen

directly upon heating to form metal hydrides.
Ac
Uses of some important compounds:-

(i) Caustic soda:
It is used: in soap, paper, textile, petroleum industry
ii) Sodium carbonate
It is used:
a) in glass and soap industry
b) in paper making and textile manufacturing
c) in paint and dye stuffs
d) in metal refining
124

e) in production of sodium compounds such as borax, caustic soda, sodium

phosphate etc.
iii) Quick lime:
It is used:
a. in the preparation of cement, glass and calcium carbide.
b. In the purification of sugar
c. In softening of hard water d. As a flux in the extraction of metal
iv) Lime stone: It is used
a) as building material
b) in the manufacture of quick lime
y
c) in Solvay process to prepare Na2CO3 as it is a source of CO2
d) in metallurgy for the extraction of iron
em
e) in toothpaste and certain cosmetics
v) Cement: It is an important building material. It is used in concrete and reinforced
concrete, in plastering and in the construction of bridges, dams and buildings.
vi) Plaster of paris: It is used
ad
a) in making moulds for pottery and ceramics etc.
b) in surgical bandages for setting broken bones of the body
c) for making statues, models, decorative materials and black board chalk.
 Biological importance of Ca and Mg
Ac
i) Magnesium ions are concentrated in animal cells and Calcium ions are
concentrated in body fluids, outside the cell.
ii) All enzymes that utilize ATP in phosphate transfer require magnesium ion
as cofactor.
s
iii) In green plants magnesium is present in chlorophyll.

iv) Calcium and magnesium ions are also essential for the transmission of
er
impulses along nerve fibres.

v) Calcium ions are important in blood clotting and are required to trigger the
ev
contraction of muscles.
vi) Calcium ions also regulate the beating of the heart.
One mark questions:
1. Why are halides of beryllium polymeric?
hi
Ans:- the halides of Be are electron deficient as their octets are incomplete.
Therefore, to complete their octets, the halides polymerize.
Ac
2. Name the groups which constitute s-block elements.

Ans:- group-1 and 2
3.Arrange the alkaline earth metal carbonates in the decreasing order of thermal
stability.
Ans:- BaCO3 > SrCO3 > CaCO3 > MgCO3 > BeCO3
4.Write the general electronic configuration of s-block elements.
Ans:- [Noble gas] ns1-2
5.What is the chemical formula of Plaster of Paris?
Ans:- CuSO4.1/2H2O
6.Name the compound which can be obtained by Solvay’s process.
125

Ans:- Sodium carbonate

7.How does the basic character of hydroxides of alkali metals vary down the group?
Ans:- Increases down the group
8.Which out of MgSO4 or BaSO4 is more soluble in water?
Ans:- MgSO4
9.Name radioactive elements of group 1 and 2.
Ans:- Francium and Radium.
10.Which elements of alkaline earth metals family do not give characteristic flame
colouration?
Ans:- Be and Mg
y
Two marks questions
em
1. Among the alkali metals which has
(i) Highest melting point
(ii) Most electropositive character
(iii) Lowest size of ion
ad
(iv) Strongest reducing character.
Ans:- (i) Li (ii) Cs (iii) Li (iv) Li
2. Complete the following reactions:
Ac
(i) Mg(NO3)2
(ii) LiOH
(iii) Na2O + H2O

s
(iv) Na + O2
er
Ans:-
ev
(i) 2Mg(NO3)2 2MgO + 4NO2 + O2
(ii) 2LiOH Li2O + H2O

hi
(iii) Na2O + H2O Na2CO3

(iv) 2Na + O2 Na2O2
3. Name the chief factors responsible for anomalous behaviour or lithium.
Ac
Ans:- the anomalous behaviour of lithium is because of its:

(i) Small size of atom and ion,
(ii) High ionization enthalpy, and
(iii) Absence of d-orbitals in its Valence shell.
4. Which out of Li and Na has greater value for the following properties:
(i) Hydration enthalpy
(ii) Stability of hydride
(iii) Stability of carbonate
(iv) Basic character of hydroxide
Ans:- (i) Li (ii) Li (iii) Na (iv)Na
126

5. Why are alkali metals not found in nature?

Ans. Alkali metals are highly reactive in nature due to low ionization enthalpy and
strong electropositive character. They do not occur in free state and are always
combined with other elements. As a result alkali metals are not generally found in
nature.
6. Why are lithium salts commonly hydrated and those of the other alkali ions
usually anhydrous?
Ans. In the lithium salt, the Li + ion due to very small size gets readily hydrated on
coming in contact with moisture (water). Therefore, lithium salts are commonly
hydrated. But the other alkali metal ions are comparatively big in size. They have
y
therefore, lesser tendency to get hydrated. These salts are usually anhydrous.
7. Beryllium and magnesium do not give colour to flame whereas other alkaline
em
earth metals do so why?
Ans: Beryllium and magnesium atoms in comparison to other alkaline earth metals
are comparatively smaller and their ionisation enthalpies are very high. Hence, the
energy of the flame in not sufficient to excite their electrons to higher energy levels.
ad
These elements, therefore, do not give any colour in Bunsen flame.
7. Why are alkali metals soft and have low melting points?
Ans: Alkali metals have only one valence electron per metal atom. As a result, the
Ac
binding energy of alkali metal ions in the close-packed metal lattices are weak.
Therefore, these are soft and have low melting point.
8. Which out of the following and why can be used to store an alkali metal?
H2O, C2H5OH and Benzene
Ans:- Benzene can be used to store an alkali metal because other substance react
s
with alkali metal as:

Na + H 2O NaOH + 1/2H2
er
Na + C2H5OH C2H5ONa + 1/2H2

9. Why are alkali metals not found free in nature?
ev
Ans:- alkali metals are highly reactive and therefore, are not found free in nature,
they are present in the combined state in the form of halides, oxides, silicates,
nitrates, etc.
hi
Three marks questions

Ac
1. When an alkali metal dissolves in liquid ammonia the solution can acquire
different colours. Explain the reasons for this type of colour change.
Ans. The dissolution of the metal in liquid ammonia is accompanied by their
formation of ammoniated electrons that give rise to dark colour. This is because
ammoniated electrons absorb energy corresponding to the red region of the visible
light. However, if the concentration increases above 3M, the colour changes to
copper-bronze and the solution acquires metallic luster due to the formation of metal
ion clusters.
M+(x+y)NH3 → [M(NH3)3] + [ e(NH3)]
127

2. In what ways lithium shows similarities to magnesium in its chemical

behaviour?
Ans. Li resembles Mg mainly due to similarity in sizes of their atoms and ions. The
main points of similarity are:
Both are quite hard.
1 Both LiOH and Mg(OH)2 are weak bases.
2 Carbonates of both on heating decompose to produce oxides and
carbondioxide.
3 Both react with nitrogen to give ionic nitrides.
y
3. Discuss the various reactions that occur in the Solvay process.
Ans. In Solvay ammonia process.
em
When carbon dioxide is passed through a concentrated solution of brine saturated
with NH3, NaHCO3 gets precipitated. NaHCO3 on subsequent heating gives Na2CO3.
NaCl + NH3 + CO2 + H2O → NaHCO3 + NH4Cl
2 NaHCO3 → Na2CO3 +CO2 + H2O
ad
CO2 needed for the reaction is prepared by heating calcium carbonate and the quick
lime, CaO is dissolved in water to form slaked lime, Ca(OH) 2
CaCO3 → CaO + CO2
→
Ac
CaO + H2O Ca(OH)2
NH3 needed for the purpose is prepared by heating NH4Cl and Ca(OH)2
2 NH4Cl + Ca(OH)2 → 2 NH3 + CaCl2 + H2O
4. What happen when (i) magnesium is burnt in air (ii) quick lime is heated
with silica (iii) chlorine reacts with slaked lime (iv) calcium nitrate is heated?
s
Ans. (i) A mixture of magnesium oxide and magnesium nitride is formed

5Mg + O2 + N2 → 2 MgO + Mg3N2
er
In air
(ii) Calcium silicate is formed.
→
ev
CaO + SiO2 CaSiO3

(iii) Calcium oxychloride (bleaching powder) is formed
Ca(OH)2 + Cl2 → CaOCl2 + H2O
(iv) Nitrogen dioxide is evolved.
hi
Ca(NO3)2 CaO + 2 NO2 +O2

Ac
5. Describe the importance of the following (i) limestone (ii) cement (iii) plaster
of paris.
Ans. i) Lime stone: It is used
f) as building material
g) in the manufacture of quick lime
h) in Solvay process to prepare Na2CO3 as it is a source of CO2
i) in metallurgy for the extraction of iron
j) in toothpaste and certain cosmetics
ii) Cement: It is an important building material. It is used in concrete and reinforced
concrete, in plastering and in the construction of bridges, dams and buildings.
128

iii) Plaster of paris: It is used

d) in making moulds for pottery and ceramics etc.
e) in surgical bandages for setting broken bones of the body
f) for making statues, models, decorative materials and black board chalk.
6. What happens when:
a) Sodium metal is dropped in water?
b) Sodium metal is heated in free supply of air?
c) Sodium peroxide dissolves in water?
Ans. a) Sodium metal catches fire and hydrogen gas is evolved
2Na + 2H2O 2NaOH + H2 + Heat
y
b) Sodium peroxide is formed
2Na + O2 Na2O2
em
c) (i) Sodium peroxide reacts with water at ordinary temperature to liberate
oxygen gas
Na2O2 + 2H2O 4 NaOH + O2
ii) With ice cold water, H2O2 is formed
ad
Na2O2 + 2H2O 2 NaOH +H2 O2
7. State as to why
a) a solution of Na2CO3 is alkaline?
Ac
b) alkali metals are prepared by electrolysis of their fused chlorides?
c) sodium is found to be more useful than potassium?
Ans. (a) Sodium carbonate being a salt of strong base (NaOH) and weak acid
(H2CO3) forms alkaline solution upon hydrolysis
Na2CO3 + 2H2O → 2NaOH + H2CO3
s
(b) Since the discharge potential of alkali metals is much higher than that of
hydrogen, therefore, when the aqueous solution of any alkali metal chloride is
er
subjected to electrolysis, H2 instead of the alkali metal is produced at the cathode.

Therefore, to prepare alkali metals, electrolysis of their fused chlorides is carried out.
ev
( c ) Sodium is relatively more abundant than potassium. At the same time, it is also
less reactive and its reactions with other substances can be better controlled.
8. Why are potassium and cesium, rather than lithium used in photoelectric
cells?
hi
Ans. The ionization enthalpy of lithium is quite high. The photons of light are not in
a position to eject electrons from the surface of lithium metal. Therefore
Ac
photoelectric effect is not noticed. However, both potassium and cesium have
comparatively low ionization enthalpies. This means that the electrons can quite
easily be ejected from the surface of these metals when photons of certain minimum
frequency (threshold frequency) strike against their surface
9. Why is Li2CO3 decomposed at a lower temperature whereas Na 2CO3 at
higher temperature?
Ans. Li+ ion is very small in size. It is stabilized more by smaller anions such as
oxide ion rather than large anions such as carbonate. Therefore Li2CO3 decomposes
into Li2O on mild heating. On the other hand, Na+ ion is larger in size. It is stabilized
129

more by carbonate ion than oxide ion. Hence, Na 2CO3 does not undergo thermal
decomposition easily.
10. Explain why can alkali and alkaline earth metals not be obtained by chemical
reduction methods?
Ans. The metals belonging to both these families are very strong reducing agents. It
is therefore not possible to reduce their oxides by reacting with common reducing
agents like carbon (coke), zinc etc. These are normally isolated by carrying out the
electrolysis of the salts of these metals in the molten state.
Five marks questions:
y
1. Compare the solubility and thermal stability of the following compounds of the
em
alkali metals with those of the alkaline earth metals.(a) Nitrates (b) Carbonates
(c) Sulphates.
Ans. Solubility:
In case of alkali metals: Nitrates, carbonates and sulphates of alkali metals are
ad
soluble in water. In alkali metals lattice energies decrease more rapidly than the
hydration energies, therefore their solubility increases down the group.
In case of alkaline earth metals: Nitrates of all alkaline earth metals are soluble
Ac
in water but their solubility decreases down the group because their hydration
energies decrease more rapidly than their lattice energies.
Since the size of CO32- and SO42- anions is much larger than the cations, therefore
lattice energies remain almost constant with in a particular group. Since, the
hydration energies decrease as we move down the group, therefore the solubility of
s
alkaline earth metal carbonates and sulphates decrease down the group. However, the
hydration energy of Be2+ and Mg2+ ions overcome the lattice energy factor and
er
therefore BeSO4 and MgSO4 are readily soluble in water while the solubility of other
sulphates decreases down the group from CaSO 4 to BaSO4.
ev
Thermal Stability:
a) Nitrates: Nitrates of both alkali and alkaline earth metals decompose on heating.
All alkaline earth metal nitrates decompose to form metal oxide, NO2 and O2.
2M(NO3)2 2MO + 4NO2 +O2
hi
M= Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, or Ba

The nitrates of Na, K. Rb and Cs decompose to form metal nitrites and O 2.
Ac
2MNO3 2MNO2 +O2

However, due to diagonal relationship between Li and Mg, lithium nitrate
decomposes like Mg(NO3)2 to form metal oxide, NO2 and O2.
4LiNO3 2LiO2 + 4NO2 +O2
b) Carbonates: Carbonates of alkaline earth metals decompose on heating to form

metal oxide and carbon di oxide.
2MCO3 2MO + CO2 M= Be, Mg, Ca, Ba
130

Further as the electropositive character of the metal increases down the group the
stability of these metal carbonates increases or the temperature of their
decomposition increases.
c) Sulphates: Sulphates of alkaline earth metals decompose on heating to form metal
oxide and SO3.
MSO4 2MO + SO3 M= Be, Mg, Ca, Ba
The temperature of decomposition of these sulphates increases as the electropositive
character of the metal or the basicity of the metal hydroxide increases down the
group.
y
Among the alkali metals due to diagonal relationship, Li2SO4 decomposes like
MgSO4 to form the corresponding metal oxide and SO3.
em
Li2SO4 Li2O + SO3
MgSO4 2MgO + SO3
ad
Other alkali metals are stable to heat and do not decompose easily.
2. Compare the alkali metals and alkaline earth metals with respect to (i) ionization
enthalpy (ii) basicity of oxides and (iii) solubility of hydroxides..
Ans.
Ac
(i) Ionization enthalpy (I E): I E of alkaline earth metals are higher than those of
alkali metals of group 1. This is because the atoms of alkaline earth metals have
smaller size (due to higher nuclear charge) as compared to the alkali metals.
(ii) Basicity of oxides: The oxides of alkali and alkaline earth metals dissolve in
s
water to form their respective hydroxides. These hydroxides are strong bases. The
hydroxides of alkaline earth metals are less basic than of alkali metals of the
er
corresponding periods. This is due to their (i) high ionization enthalpy (ii) small
ionic size and (iii) dipositive charge on the ions.
As a result M-O bond in these hydroxides is relatively stronger than that
ev
of corresponding alkali metals and therefore does not break.

(iii) Solubility of hydroxides: Because of smaller size and higher ionic charge, the
lattice enthalpies of alkaline earth metals are much higher than those of alkali
hi
metals and hence the solubility of alkali metal hydroxides is much higher than
that of alkaline earth metals. However the solubility of the hydroxides of both
alkali and alkaline earth metals increase down the group due to large decrease in
Ac
their lattice enthalpies as compared to their hydration enthalpies.

3. Explain the significance of sodium, potassium, magnesium and calcium in
biological fluids.
Ans. Significance of sodium and potassium:
(i) Sodium ions participate in the transmission of nerve signals.
(ii) Sodium ions also regulate flow of water across the cell membranes and in
transport of sugars and amino acids into the cells.
(iii) Potassium ions are the most abundant cations within cell fluids, where they
activate many enzymes, participate in oxidation of glucose to produce ATP.
131

(iv) Potassium ions in combination with sodium ions are responsible for
transmission of nerve signals.
(v) The functional features of nerve cells depend upon the sodium potassium ion
gradient that is established in the cell.
Significance of Magnesium and Calcium:
1. Magnesium ions are concentrated in animal cells and Calcium ions are
concentrated in body fluids, outside the cell.
2. All enzymes that utilize ATP in phosphate transfer require magnesium ion as
cofactor.
3. In green plants magnesium is present in chlorophyll.
y
4. Calcium and magnesium ions are also essential for the transmission of
impulses along nerve fibres.
em
5. Calcium ions are important in blood clotting and are required to trigger the
contraction of muscles.
6. Calcium ions also regulate the beating of the heart.
ad
HOTS QUESTIONS
1. Potassium carbonate cannot be prepared by Solvay process. Why?
Ans. This is due to the reason that potassium bicarbonate ( KHCO 3) formed as an
Ac
intermediate (when CO2 gas is passed through ammoniated solution of potassium
chloride) is highly soluble in water and cannot be separated by filtration.
2. The hydroxides and carbonates of sodium and potassium are easily soluble in
water while the corresponding salts of magnesium and calcium are sparingly
s
soluble in water. Explain.

Ans. All the compounds are crystalline solids and their solubility in water is guided
er
by both lattice enthalpy and hydration enthalpy. In case of sodium and potassium
compounds, the magnitude of lattice enthalpy is quite small as compared to hydration
ev
enthalpy since the cationic sizes are large. Therefore, the compounds of sodium and
potassium that are mentioned, readily dissolve in water. However, in case of
corresponding magnesium and calcium compounds, the cations have smaller sizes
and more magnitude of positive charge. This means that their lattice enthalpies are
hi
more as compared to the compounds of sodium and potassium. Therefore, the

hydroxides and carbonates of these metals are only sparingly soluble in water.
Ac
3. Why is LiF almost insoluble in water whereas LiCl soluble not only in water but
also in acetone?
Ans. The low solubility of LiF in water is due to its very high lattice enthalpy (F - ion
is very small in size). On the other hand, in lithium chloride (LiCl) the lattice
enthalpy is comparatively very small. This means that the magnitude of hydration
enthalpy is quite large. Therefore lithium chloride dissolves in water. It is also
soluble in acetone due to dipolar attraction. (Acetone is polar in nature)
132

CHAPTER 11
The p-block elements
Elements in which the last electron enters in the any one of the three p- orbital of
their outermost shells – p-block elements
•
Gen. electronic configuration of outer shell is ns2np1-6
The inner core of e-config.may differ which greatly influences their physical & to
some extent chemical properties.
y
• The block of elements in the periodic table consisting of the main groups :
em
• Group 13 (B to Tl)
• Group14 (C to Pb)
ad
• Group15 (N to Bi)
• Group 16 (O to Po)
Ac
• Group17 (F to At)
• Group18 (He to Rn)

s
(1) Members at the top and on the right of the p-block are nonmetals (C, N, P, O,
F, S, Cl, Br, I, At).
er
(2) Those on the left and at the bottom are metals (Al, Ga, In,Tl, Sn, Pb, Sb Bi, Po).
ev
(3) Between the two, from the top left to bottom right, lie an ill-defined group of
metalloid elements (B, Si, Ge, As, Te)
GROUP 13 : The boron group

hi
Outer Electronic Configuration:-ns2np1

Ac
• group members: boron (B), aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), indium (In)&
thallium (Tl) . All, except boron, are metals.
• Boron show diagonal relationship with Silicon; both are semiconductors

metalloids & forms covalent compounds.
• Boron compounds are electron deficient, they are lack of an octet of electrons
about the B atom .
• diborane B2H6, is simplest boron hydride

133

• Structure: three-center two-electron: the H atoms are simultaneously bonded to

two B atoms the B-H bridging bond lengths are greater than B-H terminal.
• - Boron oxide is acidic (it reacts readily with water to form boric acid)
• aluminium compounds:aluminium oxide is amphoteric
• aluminum halides, e.g., AlCl3 is dimer, an important catalyst in organic

chemistry have anincomplete octet, acts as Lewic acid by accepting lone pairs
from Lewic bases, forming adduct
y
• aluminum hydride, e.g., LiAlH4, a reducing agent
em
• Atomic Properties - Electronic Configurations
Element Symbol Atomic Electronic Abundance in Earth’s

No. Configuration Crest (in ppm)
ad
Boron B 5 [He]2s2 2p1 8
Aluminium Al 13 [Ne]3s2 3p1 81,300
Galium Ga 31 [Ar]3d104s2 4p1 15
Ac
Indium In 49 [Kr] 4d105s2 5p1 1
Thallium Tl 81 [Xe] 5d106s2 6p1 0.3
s
. Atomic and ionic radii

er
• The atomic and ionic radii of group 13 elements are compared to

corresponding elements of group 2. From left to right in the period, the
ev
magnitude of nuclear charge increases but the electrons are added to, the same
shell. These electrons do not screen each other, therefore, the electrons
experience greater nuclear charge.
hi
• In other words, effective nuclear charge increases and thus, size decreases.
Therefore, the elements of this group have smaller size than the corresponding
Ac
elements of second group.
• On moving down the group both atomic and ionic radii are expected to
increase due to the addition of new shells. However, the observed atomic
radius of Al (143 pm) is slightly more than that of Ga (l35 pm).
Ionization energies
The first ionization energies of group 13 elements are less than the corresponding
members of the alkaline earths.
134

The sharp decrease in I.E. from B to Al is due to increase in size. In case of Ga, there
are ten d-electrons in its inner electronic configuration.
The very high value of 3rd I. E. of thallium indicates that +3 O.N. state is not stable,
rather +1 is more stable for thallium .
Electropositive (or metallic) character
the elements of group 13 are less electropositive as compared to elements of group 2.

On moving down the group the electropositive (metallic) character increases because
y
ionization energy decreases. For e.g., Boron is a non-metal white the other elements
are typical metals.
em
Oxidation states
The common oxidation states of group 13 elements are +3 and + l .The stability of
ad
the + 1 oxidation state increases in the sequence Al <Ga< In <Tl, Due to Inert pair
effect.
Ac
Element B Al Ga In Tl
Oxidation state +3 +3 +3, +1 +3, +1 +3, +1
s
Chemical reactivity of Gr.13 Elements

er
All elements in their compounds exhibit the oxidation state of + 3 and +1.
Hydrides
• None of the group 13 elements reacts directly with hydrogen. However, a no.
ev
of hydrides of these elements have been prepared by indirect methods. The

boron hydrides are called boranes& classified in two series: (a) BnHn+4
called nidoboranes (b) BnHn+6 called arachnoboranes
hi
• INUDUSTRIAL PREPERATION :-
Ac
2BF3(g) + 6LiH(s) → B2H6(g) + 6LiF(s)
• Laboratory method:
(i) By the reaction of iodine with sodium borohydride in a high boiling

solvent.
2NaBH4 + I2 → B2H6 + 2NaI + H2
(ii) By reduction of BCl3 with LiAlH4
4BCl3 + 3LiAlH4 → 2 B2H6 + 3AlCl3 + 3 LiCl
135

Structure of Diborane, B2H6
y
em
ad
Some important characteristics of boranes:
Ac
i) Lower boranes are colourless gases while higher boranes are volatile liquids
or solids.
ii) They undergo spontaneous combustion in air due to strong affinity of boron
s
for oxygen.
er
B2H6 + 3O2 → B2O3 + 3H2O + Heat

ev
iii) Boranes react with alkali metal hydrides in diethyl ether to form
borohydride complexes.
B2H6 + 2MH →2M+[BH4]- (M= Li or Na)

hi
Metal borohydride
Ac
• (iv) Diborane reacts with ammonia to give borazine at 450 K.
B2H6 + 6NH3 → 3B3N3H6 + 12H2
• Borazine has a cyclic structure similar to benzene and thus is called inorganic
benzene
• The other elements of this group form only a few stable hydrides. The thermal
stability decreases as we move down the group.
136

• AlH3 is a colourless solid polymerized via Al - H - Al bridging units. These

hydrides are weak Lewis acids and readily form adducts with strong Lewis
base (B:) to give compounds of the type MH3 (M = Al or Ga). They also form
complex-tetrahydrido anions, [MH4]-. The most important tetrahydrido
compound is Li[AlH4]
ether
4LiH + AlCl3 ―――→ LiAlH4 + 3LiCl
OXIDES & HYDROXIDES
y
• M2O3& M(OH)3
em
HALIDES: Structure of boron trihalides
ad
Ac
s
er
Dimeric structure of aluminium chloride

ev
– Boron halides do not form dimers because the size of boron

is so small that it is unable to coordinate four large-sized
hi
halide ions.
Ac
Anomalous properties of boron
1. Boron is a non-metal & bad conductor of electricity whereas aluminium is a metal

& good conductor. B is hard but Al is a soft metal.
2. Boron exists in two forms-crystalline and amorphous. But Al does not exist in
different forms.
137

3. The melting and boiling point of boron are much higher than that of Al .
4. Boron forms only covalent compounds whereas Al forms even some ionic
compounds.
5. The hydroxides and oxides of boron are acidic in nature whereas those of
aluminium are amphoteric.
6. The trihalides of boron exist as monomers. On the other hand, aluminium halides
exist as dimers .
7. The hydrides of boron are quite stable while those of aluminium are unstable
y
• Boron and silicon exhibit the typical properties of non-metals. These do not
em
form cations. Both exist in amorphous as well as crystalline forms.
• Boron oxide (B2O3) and silica (SiO2) both are acidic and dissolve in alkali
solutions to form borates and silicates respectively.
ad
B2O3 + 6NaOH → 2Na2BO3 + 3H2O
SiO2 + 2NaOH → Na2SiO3 + H2O

Ac
• The chlorides of both B and Si get hydrolyzed by water to boric acid and
silicic acid respectively.
BCl3 + 3H2O →H3BO3 + 3HCl SiCl4 + 3H2O → H2SiO3 + 4HCl

s
The hydrides of Boron and Silicon are quite stable. Numerous volatile
er
hydrides are also known which catch fire on exposure to air and are easily
hydrolyzed.
Both elements are semiconductors.
ev
Behavior in Aqueous Solutions
1 Al, Ga, In and Tl exhibit a well-defined aqueous chemistry in their tripositive

hi
states. Species like [M(OH)4]-, [M(H2O)2(OH)4]-, [M(OH2)6]3+ for M = Al, Ga,

In, exist in aqueous solution.
Ac
2. Al, Ga. In and T1 ions exist as octahedral aqua ions, [M(OH2)6]3+ in aqueous
solution and many salts like halides, sulphates, nitrates and perchlorates exist as
hydrates.
3. Aluminiumsulphate forms double salts - called alum, having the general formula
M2SO4. Al2(SO4)3.12H2O, where M=Na+ or K+.
USES OF BORON & ALUMINIUM
138

• Aluminium is used extensively in industry and everyday life. It forms many

useful alloys with Cu. Mn, Mg, Si and Zn. Hence, aluminium and its alloys
find use in packaging, utensil making, construction, aerospace and other
transportation industries. It is used as a conductor for transmission of
electricity. Aluminium is alsoused in the alumino-thermite process for
production of chromium and manganese from their ores.
Group 14 Elements:-The Carbon Family
Group 14 includes carbon (C), silicon (Si), germanium (Ge), tin (Sn) and lead (Pb).
y
General electronic configuration of carbon family is ns2np2.
em
Covalent radius:-Covalent radius expected to increase from Cto Si,
From Si to Pb small increase is found.
ad
Ionization Enthalpy:-The first ionization enthalpies of group 14 elements are higher
than those of the corresponding group 13 elements.
Ac
Electronegativity:-Group 14 elements are smaller in size as compared to group 13
elements that’s why this group elements are slightly more electronegative than group
13
Chemical properties:-
s
er
Carbon and silicon mostly show +4 oxidation state. Germanium forms stable
compounds in +4 state and only few compounds in +2 state.
ev
Tin forms compounds in both oxidation states. Lead compounds in +2 state are stable
and in +4 state are strong oxidizing agents.
Exception:-Pb4 and SnF4 are ionic in nature.

hi
Except CCl4 other tetrachlorides are easily hydrolysed by water.

Ac
Since carbon does not have d-orbitals and hence cannot expand its coordination
number beyond 4
CCl4 +H2O No Reaction
SiCl4+4H2O Si(OH)4+4HCl
Silicic acid
Allotropes of Carbon:-The three types of allotropes are –
139

1-Diamond 2-Graphite 3-Fullerence
Diamond:-In diamond each carbon atom undergas SP3hybridisation.
Each carbon is tetrahedrally linked to four other carbon atoms.
Graphite:-In graphite, carbon is SP2-hyberdized graphite has a two-dimensional sheet

like structure consisting of a number of hexagonal rings fused together.
Graphite conducts electricity along the sheet.It is very soft and Slippery
y
FullerenceFullerence was discovered collectively by three scientists namely R.E
em
Smalley,R.F Curl and H.W Kroto
SOME Important Compounds Of Carbon and Silicon
Carbon monoxide:-It I prepared by direct oxdisation of C in limited supply of
ad
oxygen.
2C+O2(g) → 2CO(g)
Ac
Commercially it is prepared by the passage of steam over hot coke
Carbon Dioxide:-It is prepared by complete combustion of carbon and carbon fuels

in excess of air.
s
C(s) +O2(g) → CO2(g)

er
Laboratory method:-
In laboratory it is prepared by the treatment of dilHCl on CaCO3

ev
CaCO3(s) +2HCl(aq) → CaCl2(aq) +CO2(g)+H2O(l)
Silicon dioxide:-Silicon dioxide is a COVALENT THREE DIMENSIONAL

hi
NETWORK SOLID.
Ac
Each silicon atom is covalently bonded in a tetrahedral manner to four oxygen atoms.
Silicones:-Silicones are the synthetic organo-siliconpolymers having general

formulae (R2SiO)n in which R = alkyl (methyl,ethyl or phenyl)
Silicates:-Silicates are exist in nature in the form of feldspar, zeolites,mica and

asbestos etc.
The basic structure of silicates is SiO44-
140

Zeolites:-Zeolites is aalumino-silicate of metal. Metal cations participating in

formationof Zeolite are use usually Na+,K+,or Ca2+.
Zeolites are used to remove permanent hardness of water.
ONE MARK QUESTIONS
1. Why is boron used in nuclear reactions?
Ans:-Because Boron can absorb neutrons.
y
2. By giving a balanced equation show how B(OH)3 behaves as an acid in water.
em
Ans:-B(OH)3 +2HOH [B(OH)4]- +H3O+
3.Name the element of group 14 which exhibits maximum tendency for

catenation?
ad
Ans:-Carbon
4. What is the basic building unit of all silicates?

Ac
Ans:-SiO44-is the basic unit of all silicates.
5. What happens when NaBH4 reacts with iodine?

s
Ans:-2NaBH4 +I2 B2H6 +2NaI +H2.

er
6. What happens when boric acid is heated
Ans:-4H3BO3 4HBO2 H2B4O7.

ev
7. What is producer gas?
Ans:-Producer gas is a mixture of CO and N2 in the ratio of 2:1.

hi
8.Write the state of hybridization of ‘B’ in BF3.

Ac
ANS:-Hybridisation of ‘B’ in BF3 is Sp2.
9.Mention the state of hybridization in B in BH4-.
Ans:-Sp3.
10. Which oxide of carbon is regarded as anhydride of carbonic acid.
Ans:-CO2 is regarded as a hydride of carbonic acid .
Because H2CO3→ H2O + CO2

141

TWO MARKS QUESTIONS

1. Give the chemical reaction as an evidence for each of the following
observations.
(i) Tin (II) is a reducing agent where as lead (II) is not.
(ii)Gallium (I) undergoes disproportionation reaction.
Ans:- (i) Due to inert pair effect pb2+ is more stable than Pb4+. Whereas Sn4+ is more
y
stable than Sn2+.
em
(ii) 3Ga+ → 2Ga +Ga3+
This is because Ga3+ is more stable than Ga+.
2. What happens when
ad
(i) Quick lime is heated with coke?
(ii) Carbon monoxide reacts with Cl2
Ac
Ans:- (i) Cao +3C → CaC2 +CO
(iii) CO +Cl2→ COCl2
3.Give reason
s
(i) C and Si are always tetravalent but Ge,Sn,Pb show divalency.

er
(ii) Gallium has higher ionization enthalpy than Al. Explain.

ev
Ans:-(i) Ge, Sn, Pb show divalency due to inert pair effect, Pb2+ is more stable than
Pb4+.
(ii) Due to poor shielding effect of d-electrons in Ga effective nuclear

hi
charge increases as compared to Al thus the I.E is higher than Al.

Ac
4.Give reason why boron and aluminium tend to form covalent compounds.
Ans:-Sumof three ionization of both the element are very high. Thus they have no
tendency to lose electrons to form ionic compound.Instead they form covalent
compounds.
5.If B-Cl bond has a dipole moment, Explain why BCl3 molecule has zero dipole
moment.
142

Ans:- B-Cl bond has dipole moment because of polarity.In BCl3 since the molecule is
symmetrical thus the polarities cancel out.
6.Suggest a reason as to why CO is poisonous.
Ans:-CO reacts with haemoglobin to form carboxy-haemoglobin which can destroy

the oxygen carrying capacity of haemoglobin and the man dies of suffocation.
7.What do you understand by-
(a) Inert pair effect:-The pair of electron in the valence shell does not take part in
y
bond formation it is called inert pair effect.
em
(b) Allotropy:-It is the property of the element by which an element can exists in
two forms which have same chemical properties but different physical properties due
to their structures.
ad
8.How is excessive content of CO2 responsible for global warming?
Ans:-Excess of CO2 absorbs heat radiated by the earth.Some of it dissipated into the
Ac
atmosphere while the remaining part is radiated back to the earth.Temperature of the
earth increases.
9.Describe two similarities and two dissimilarities between B and Al.

s
Ans:-Similarities:-
er
(i) Both have same number of valence electrons.

(ii) Both have similar electronic configuration.
ev
Dissimilarities:-
(i) Bis a non- metal where Al is a metal

hi
(ii) B forms acidic oxide whereas Al forms atmospheric oxides.
10.What are fullerene? How they were prepared?

Ac
Ans:- Fullerene are the allotropes of carbon.Its structure is like a soccer ball.
They are prepared by heating graphite in electric arc in presence of inert gases
such as helium or argon.
1.What happens when
(a)Borax is heated strongly

143

(b)Boric acid is added to water
(c)Aluminium is treated with dilute NaOH
Ans:-(a) Na2B4O7 . 10H20 → Na2B4O7→ 2NaBO2 + B2O3
(b) B(OH)3 +H2O → [B(OH)4]- +H+
(C) 2Al +2NaOH +H2O → 2NaAlO2 + 3H2
2.Explain the following reactions.
y
(a)Silicon is heated with methyl chloride at high temperature in the presence of
em
copper.
(b)Silicon dioxide is treated with hydrogen fluoride.
(c) CO is heated with ZnO.
ad
Ans:- (a) A mixture of mono-,di- and trimethylchlorosilianes along with a small
amount of tetramethylsilane is formed.
Ac
CH3Cl +Si → CH3SiCl3 + (CH3)2 SiCl2+(CH3)3SiCl +(CH3)4 Si
(b) The initially formed silicon tetrafluroide dissolves in HF to form

hydrofluorosilicic acid
s
SiO2 +2HF → SiF4 +2H2O

er
SiF4 + 2HF → H2SiF6

ev
(c) ZnO is reduced to zinc metal
ZnO + CO → Zn +CO2
hi
3.Give reasons:-
Ac
(a)Diamond is used as an abrasive.
(b) Aluminium alloys are used to make aircraft body.
(c) Aluminium utensils should not be kept in water overnight.
Ans:- (a)
Diamond is used as an abrasive because it is an extremely hard substance.
(b)Alloys of alumimium likeduralium is used to make aircraft body due to
Someof its property .
144

(c)Generally aluminium metal does not react with water quickly but when it is
kept overnight.It reacts slowly with water in presence of air.
2Al(s) +O2(g) +H2O(l) → Al2O3(s) +H2(g)
4.A certain salt X,gives the following results.
(i)Its aqueous solution is alkaline to litmus.
(ii)It swells up to a glassy material Y on strong heating.
y
(iii)when conc.H2SO4 is added to a hot solution of X,whitecrystalof an acid Z
em
separates out.
Ans:- (i) Na2B4O7 +10H2O → 2NaOH +H2B4O7+8H2O
(ii) Na2B4O7 → 2NaBO2 +B203
ad
(iii)Na2B4O7.10H2O +H2SO4 → 4H3BO3 +Na2SO4 +5H2O
Ac
5. draw structure of diborane .
Ans.
s
er
ev

hi
1 Explain the formation of (i) Water gas (ii) Producer gas. Give their uses. What
happens when CO2 is passed through lime water (i) for short duration (ii)
Ac
folong duration.
Ans:-(i)C(s) + H2O(g) → CO(g) +H2(g)

(Water gas)
(ii) 2C(s) + O2 +4N2(g) → 2CO(g) +4N2(g)
(Producer gas)
Water gas and Producer gas are used as fuel.
Ca(OH)2 +CO2→ CaCO3 + H2O
(White ppt.)
145

(i) CaCO3 +CO2 +H2O →Ca(HCO3)2

(Soluble)
2 (a) Why do Boron halides from addition compound with NH3 ?

(b) Assign appropriate reason for each of the following observations :-
(i) Anhydrous AlCl3 is used as a catalyst in many organic reactions.

(ii) No form of elemental silicon is comparable to graphite.
y
Ans:- (a) It is because BX3 is electron deficient whereas NH3 is electron rich.
em
(b) (i) It is Lewis acid.
(ii) It cannot form pπ – pπ bond due to large size.
ad
3. (i) Give reason for the following observations:-
(a) The tendency for catenation decreases down the group in Group 14.
(b) The decreasing stability of +3 oxidations state with increasing atomic
Ac
number in group 13.
(c) PbO2 is a stronger oxidizing agent than SnO2.
(d) Molten aluminium bromide is a poor conductor of electricity.
Ans:- (i)(a) It is due to decrease in bond dissociation energy which is due to increase
s
in atomic size.
er
C-C > Si-Si >Ge-Ge>Sn-Sn>Pb-Pb.

ev
(b) It is due to inert pair effect.
(c) PbO2 is stronger oxidizing agent than SnO2 because Pb2+ is more
stable than Pb4+ whereas Sn4+ is more stable than Sn2+.
hi
(d) Molten AlBr3 is poor conductor of electricity because it is covalent

Ac
compound.
146

CHAPTER 12
Organic chemistry : Some Basic Principles and Techniques
Organic compounds are the hydrocarbons and their derivatives and organic
chemistry is that branch of chemistry that deals with the study of these compounds
Tetravalency of carbon
The atomic number of Carbon is 6 and its electronic configuration is 2,4 i.e. it has 4
valence electrons. Thus carbon is always tetracovalent, i.e. it forms 4 covalent
bonds with other atoms
y
C
em
Due to tetravalency of carbon it has a tetrahedron shape.
Catenation- The self linking property of carbon is known as catenation. This is the
main reason of existence of such large number of compounds
ad
Classification of organic compounds
Organic compounds
Ac
Acyclic Cyclic
Homocyclic heterocyclic
Alicyclic aromatic
s
Benzenoid non benzenoid

er
Functional groups:A functional group may be defined as an atom or a group of

atoms present in a molecule which largely determines the chemical properties.
ev
CLASS OF ORGANIC NAME OF FUNCTIONAL STRUCTURE

COMPOUNDS GROUP
Alkenes double bond =C=C=
hi
Alkynes triple bond -CΞC-

Ac
Halogens halogen - X ( F,Cl,Br,I )

Alcohols hydroxyl -OH
Aldehydes aldehydic(formyl) -CHO
Carboxylic acids carboxyl -COOH
Acid amides amides -CONH2
Primary amines amino - NH2
147

HOMOLOGOUS SERIES
Homologous series is defined as a family or group of structurally similar organic
compounds all members of which contain the same functional group, show a
gradation in physical and similarity in chemical properties and any two adjacent
members of which differ by -CH2 group. The individual members of this group are
called homologues and the phenomenon is called homology.
NOMENCLATURE OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
Organic chemistry deals with millions of compounds. In order to clearly identify
y
them, a systematic method of naming known as IUPAC system of nomenclature is
adopted. The names are such that the listener can deduce the structure from it. The
em
IUPAC name consists of three parts:
Prefix Word root Suffix
EX: 3 methlyoctane
ad
NOMENCLATURE OF ALKANES
Straight chain alkanes:
Ac
The names of such compounds is based on their chain structure,and end with suffix
‘-ane’ and carry a prefix indicating the number of carbon atoms present in the chain.
Branched chain hydrocarbons:
s
1.) The longest carbon chain in the molecule is identified.

er
2.) The numbering is done in such a way that the branched carbon atoms get the
lowest possible value.
3.) The names of the alkyl groups attached as a branch are then prefixed to the
ev
name of the parent alkane and its position is indicated by numbers.

4.) The lower number is given to the first in alphabetical order.
5.) The carbon atom of the branch that attaches to the root alkane is numbered 1.
hi
Organic compounds having Functional Groups:

The longest chain of carbon atoms containing the functional groups is numbered in
Ac
such a way that the functional group attached to the carbon atom gets the lowest
possible number in the chain.
When there are more functional groups then a priority order is followed as:
-COOH, -SO3H, -COOR, COCl, -CONH2, -CN, -HC=O, =C=O, -OH, -NH2, =C=C=,
-CΞ C-.
ISOMERISM
Two or more compounds having the same molecular formula but different physical
and chemical properties are called isomers and this phenomenon is called isomerism.
148

Chain isomerism: When two or more compounds having same molecular formula
but different carbon skeletons are referred to as chain isomers.
y
em
Position Isomerism : Compounds which have the same structure of carbon chain but
differ in position of double or triple bonds or functional group are called position
isomers and this phenomenon is called Position Isomerism. e g
CH3-CH2-CH=CH2 CH3-CH = CH – CH3
ad
Functional Isomerism :Compounds which have the same molecular formula but
different functional group are called functional isomers and this phenomenon is
called functional Isomerism. e g
Ac
CH3 – CH2 – OH CH3 – O – CH3
Metamerism:It is due to the presence of different alkyl groups on either side of
functional group in the molecule. Ex. C4H10O represents C2H5OC2H5 and
s
CH3OC3H7.
er
FISSION OF COVALENT BOND

Heterolytic cleavage: In this cleavage the bond breaks in such a way that the shared
pair of electron remains with one of the fragments.
ev
+
H3C – Br CH3 + Br-
Homolytic Cleavage: In this cleavage the shared pair of electron goes with each of
hi
the bonded atom.

R–X R. + X.
Ac
Alkyl free radical

Nucleophiles : A reagent that brings an electron pair is called nucleophile ie nucleus
seeking e g -OH , -CN
Electrophiles: A reagent that takes away electron pair is called electrophile I e
electron seeking e g > C= O , R3C – X
Inductive Effect: The displacement of the electron along the chain of the carbon
atoms due to presence of an atom or group at the end of the chain.
149

ɗ+++ ɗ ++ ɗ+
CH3- C H2 CH2 Cl
Resonance Effect : The polarity produced in the molecule by the interaction of two
pi bonds or between a pi bond and lone pair of electron present on an adjacent atom.
There are two types of resonance effect:
1) Positive resonance effect : In this effect the transfer of electrons is away from
an atom or substituent group attached to the conjugated system.
The atoms or groups which shows +R effect are halogens,-OH , -OR,-
NH2
y
2) Negative resonance effect : In this effect the transfer of electrons is towards
em
the atom or substituent group attached to the conjugated system.
The atoms or groups which shows -R effect are –COOH , -CHO , -CN
METHODS OF PURIFICATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS :
ad
Sublimation : This method is used to separate the sublimable compounds from non
sublimable compounds.
Crystallisation: This method is based on the difference in the solubilities of
Ac
compound and impurities in a suitable solvent. The impure compound is dissolved in
solvent at heated at higher temp .on cooling the hot and conc solution pure
compounds crystallizes out.
Distillation: This method is used to separate volatile liquids from non volatile liquids
s
and liquids having sufficient difference in their boiling points.

er
Fractional distillation: If the boiling points of two liquids is not much , they are
separated by this method.
ev
Distillation under reduced pressure : This method is used to purify liquids having
high boiling points and decomposes at or below their boiling points.
hi
Steam distillation : This method is used to separate substances which are steam
volatile and are immiscible with water.
Ac
Differential Extraction: When an organic compound is present in an aqueous

medium it is separated by shaking it with organic solvent in which it is more soluble
than in water. The aqueous solution is mixed with organic solvent in a separating
funnel and shaken for sometimes and then allowed to stand for some time .when
organic solvent and water form two separate layers the lower layer is run out by
opening the tap of funnel and organic layer is separated. the process is repeated
several times and pure organic compound is separated.
Chromatography :This technique is used to separate mixtures in to their
components ,purify the compounds and test the purity of compounds.It is classified
as
150

Adsorption Chromatography : It is based on the fact that different compounds are

adsorbed on an adsorbent to different degrees. Silica jel or alumina is used as
adsorbents.
Partition Chromatography : It is based on the continuous differential portioning of
components of a mixture between stationary and mobile phase.
QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
Detection of Carbon and Hydrogen: The Carbon and Hydrogen present in the
Organic compound is detected by heating the compound with Copper II oxide in a
y
hard glass tube when carbon present in the compound is oxidized to CO2 which can
be tested with lime Water and Hydrogenis converted to water which can be tested
em
with anhydrous copper sulphate which turns blue.
C + CuO 2Cu + CO2
2 H +CuO Cu + H2O
ad
CO2 +Ca (OH )2 CaCO3 + H2O
5H2O + CuSO4 CuSO4.5H2O
DETECTION OF OTHER ELEMENTS
Ac
Sodium Fusion Extract: A small piece of dry Sodium metal is heated with a organic
compound in a fusion tube for 2 -3 minutes and the red hot tube is plunged in to
distilled water contained in a china dish. The contained of the china dish is boiled
,cooled and filtered. The filtrate is known as Sodium fusion extract.
s
Test for Nitrogen : The sodium fusion extract is boiled with iron II sulphate and
then acidified with Concsulphuric acid , the formation of Prussian blue colour
er
confirms the presence of nitrogen.

6CN- + Fe2+ [Fe(CN)6] 4-
ev
3[Fe(CN)6] 4-+ 4Fe3+ xH O

2 Fe4[Fe(CN)6] 3.xH2O
Test for Sulphur: the sodium fusion extract is acidified with acetic acid and lead
hi
acetate is added to it. A black precipitate of lead sulphide indicates the presence of
sulphur. S2- + Pb2+ PbS
Ac
Black
Test for halogens:The sodium fusion extract is acidified with nitric acid and then
treated with silver nitrate. A white precipitate, soluble in ammonium hydroxide
shows the presence of chlorine, a yellowish ppt. sparingly soluble in ammonium
hydroxide shows the presence of bromine, a yellowish ppt. insoluble in ammonium
hydroxide shows the presence of iodine.
X- + Ag+ AgX
151

QUANTITIVE ANALYSIS(Carbon and Hydrogen)

Let the mass of organic compound be m g. Mass of water and carbon dioxide
produced be m1 and m2 g respectively;
% of carbon = 12 x m2 x 100
44 x m
% of hydrogen = 2 x m1 x 100
18 x m
y
Nitrogen
em
DUMAS METHOD: A known mass of organic compound is heated with excess of
CuO in an atmosphere of CO2, when nitrogen of the organic compound is converted
into N2 gas. The volume of N2 thus obtained is converted into STP and the
percentage of nitrogen determined by applying the equation:
ad
Volume of Nitrogen at STP = P1V1 x 273
760 x T1
Ac
%N = 28 x vol of N2 at STP x 100
22400 x mass of the substance taken
KJELDAHL’S METHOD: A known mass of organic compound is heated with
s
conc. H2SO4 in presence of K2SO4 and little CuSO4 or Hg in a long necked flask
er
called Kjeldahl’s flask when nitrogen present in the organic compound is

quantitatively converted into (NH4)2SO4. (NH4)2SO4 thus obtained is boiled with
excess of NaOH solution to liberate NH3 gas which is absorbed in a known excess of
ev
a standard acid such as H2SO4 or HCl.

The vol of acid unused is found by titration against a standard alkali solution. From
the vol of the acid used, the percentage of nitrogen is determined by applying the
hi
equation,
%N= 1.4 x Molarity of the acid x Basicity of the acid x Vol of the acid used
Ac
Mass of the substance taken

Halogens
Carius method:
A known mass of an organic compound is heated with fuming nitric acid in the
presence of silver nitrate contained in a hard glass test tube known as carius tube in a
furnace. Carbon and hydrogen present in the compound are oxidized to carbon
dioxide and water. The halogen present forms the corresponding silver halide. It is
filtered, dried, and weighed.
152

Let the mass of the organic compound taken = m g

Mass of AgX formed = m1 g
1 mol of AgX contains 1 mol of of X
Mass of halogen in m1 g of AgX
= at mass of X xm1 g
Molecular mass of AgX
y
% of halogen
em
=at mass of X xm1 g x 100 %
Molecular mass of AgX x m
Sulphur
ad
Mass of BaSO4 formed = m1 g
% of sulphur = 32 x m1 x 100 %
Ac
233 x m
Phosphorous
s
Mass of ammonium phosphomolydate = m1 g

er
% of phosphorous = 31 x m1 x 100 %
ev
1877 x m
Oxygen
hi

Mass of CO2= m1 g
Ac
% of oxygen = 32 x m1 x 100 %
44 x m
One Mark Questions
Q1 Suggest a method to purify a liquid which decomposes at its boiling point.
A 1 The process Distillation Under reduced pressure is used to purify a liquid which
decomposes at its boiling point.
Q 2 How will you separate a mixture of O-nitrophenol and p- nitrophenol ?
153

A 2 O-nitrophenol is steam volatile therefore it can be separated by Steam

distillation.
Q 3 Lassaigne’s test is not shown by diazonium Salt. Why?
A 3 On heating diazonium Salts loses Nitrogen and could not fuse with the Sodium
metal therefore diazonium Salt do not show Positive Lassaigne’s test for nitrogen.
Q 4 Alcohols are weaker acids than Water, Why ?
A 4 The alkyl group in alcohols has + I effect due to which electron density is
y
increases on Oxygen atom which makes the release of hydrogen ion more difficult
from alcohol.R → O →H
em
Q 5 Why is nitric acid is added to Sodium extract before adding Silver nitrate for
testing halogens ?
A 5 Nitric acid is added to decompose NaCN and Na 2S
ad
NaCN + HNO3 → NaNO3 + HCN
Na2S + 2HNO3 → 2NaNO3 + H2S
Ac
Q 6 which of the two O2NCH2CH2- or CH3CH2O – is expected to be more stable
and why ?
A 6 NO2 group has –I effect and disperse the negative charge on Oxygen atom
s
O2N ←CH2← CH2O-

er
Q 7 Arrange the following in increasing Order of Stability ;

(CH3 )3C + , CH3CH2CH2C+H2 , CH3CH2C+HCH3 ,CH3C+H2 , CH3CH2C+H2
ev
A 7 CH3C+H2 < CH3CH2C+H2< CH3CH2CH2C+H2<CH3CH2C+HCH3< (CH3 )3C +

Q 8 Write the IUPAC name of the following
hi
CH3 CH CH CH2 CH3

Ac
CH3CH3
A 8 2,3Dimethylpentane
Q 9 Write the hybridized state of C atoms in the following
CH2 = CH - C Ξ N
A9 sp2sp2sp
CH2 = CH - C Ξ N
154

Q 10 Give the IUPAC name of the following compound.
A 10 2,5Dimethylheptane
Two Marks Questions
Q 1 Draw the Structures of the following compounds.
y
A) Hex-3-enoic acid b) 2-chloro-2-methylbutan-1-ol
em
A 1 a) O
CH3-CH2-CH=CH-CH2-C-OH
ad
b) Cl Ac
CH3 - CH2 – C - CH2 – OH
CH3
s
Q 2 Explain Inductive effect with example.

er
A 2 Inductive Effect: The displacement of the electron along the chain of the carbon
atoms due to presence of an atom or group at the end of the chain.
ev
δ+++ δ++ δ+
CH3→ C H2 → CH2 →Cl
hi
Q 3 Explain why (CH3 )3C+ is more stable than CH3C+H2.

A 3 (CH3 )3C+ has nine alpha hydrogens and has nine hyperconjugation structures
Ac
while CH3C+H2has three alpha hydrogens and has three hyperconjugation structures,
therefore (CH3 )3C+ is more stable than CH3C+H2
Q 4 Give the number of Sigma and pi bonds in the following molecules
a) CH3NO2 b)HCONHCH3
A4 a) 6 Sigma and 1 pi bond
b) 8 Sigma and 1 pi bond
Q 5 Write the condensed and bond line formula of 2,2,4-Trimethylpentane.
155

A5
CH3
CH3―C― CH2―CH― CH3
CH3 CH3
Q 6 How Sodium fusion extract is prepared ?
A 6 A small piece of dry Sodium metal is heated with a organic compound in a
fusion tube for 2 -3 minutes and the red hot tube is plunged in to distilled water
y
contained in a china dish. The contained of the china dish is boiled ,cooled and
em
filtered. The filtrate is known as Sodium fusion extract.
Q 7 Explain the principle of paper chromatography.
A 7 Paper chromatography is based on the difference in the rates at which the
components of a mixture are adsorbed. The material on which different components
ad
are adsorbed is called Stationary phase which is generally made up of alumina, silica
jel or activated charcoal. The mixture to be separated is dissolved in a suitable
medium and it is called moving phase. The moving phase is run on the Stationary
Ac
phase , the different compounds are adsorbed on stationary phase at different rates.
Q 8 Why is an organic compound fused with Sodium for testing nitrogen,halogens
and sulphur ?
s
A 8 On fusing with sodium metal the elements presents in an organic compounds are
converted in to sodium salts which are water soluble which can be filtered and
er
detected by the respective tests.

Q 9 It is not advisable to use sulphuric acid in place of acetic acidfor acidification
ev
while testing sulphur by lead acetate test. Give reason

A 9 Lead acetate on reacting with sulphuric acid will give a white ppt of lead
sulphatewhih interfere in the detection of sulphur.
hi
(CH3COO )2Pb + H2SO4 PbSO4 + 2 CH3COOH

Ac
Q 10 Under what conditions can the process of steam distillation is used ?

A 10 Steam distillation is used to purify the liquids which are steam volatile and
water and the liquid are not miscible with each other.
Three Marks Questions
Q 1 In an estimation of sulphur by carius method 0.468 g of an organic compound
gave 0.668 g of barium sulphate. Find the percentage of sulphur in the compound.
A 1 Mass of the compound = 0.468 g
156

Mass of the barium sulphate = 0.668 g

% of sulphur = 32 X Mass of barium sulphate X 100
233 X Mass of the compound
= 32 x 0.668x100
233 x0.468
= 19.60 %
y
Q 2 Which bond is more polar in the following pairs of molecules.
em
a) H3C-H, H3C-Br b) H3C-NH2, H2C-OH c) H3C-OH, H3C-SH
A 2 a) C-Br because Br is more electronegative than H
b) C-O because O is more electronegative than N
ad
c) C-O because O is more electronegative than S
Q 3 Define Isomerism.Explain position Isomerism and Functional Isomerism with
examples.
Ac
A 3 Two or more compounds having the same molecular formula but different
physical and chemical properties are called isomers and this phenomenon is called
isomerism.
Position Isomerism : Compounds which have the same structure of carbon chain but
s
differ in position of double or triple bonds or functional group are called position
er
isomers and this phenomenon is called Position Isomerism. e g

CH3-CH2-CH=CH2 CH3-CH = CH – CH3
ev
Functional Isomerism :Compounds which have the same molecular formula but
different functional group are called functional isomers and this phenomenon is
called functional Isomerism. e g
hi
CH3 – CH2 – OH CH3 – O – CH3

Ac
Q 4 write the IUPAC names of the following compounds.
O O
A.CH3 – CH2 –C – CH2 – C – CH3
B HC Ξ C – CH = CH – CH – CH2
C Cl CH2CH2CH2CH2Br
A4 A hexane 2,4dione
157

B hexa-1,3-dien-5-yne
C 1-bromo-4-chlorobutane
Q 5 Define Homologous series. Write the general formula of alkane, alkene and
alkynes.
A 5 Homologous Series : It is defined as group of similar organic compounds which
contains the similar functional groups and the two adjacent members of the series is
differ by a –CH2 group.
Alkanes CnH2n+2
y
em
Alkenes CnH2n
Alkynes CnH2n-2
Q 6 How many Sigma and pi bonds are present in the following molecules .
ad
A HC Ξ CCH = CHCH3
B CH2 = C = CHCH3
Ac
A6 A Sigma bonds = 10 pi bonds = 3
B Sigma bonds = 9 pi bonds = 2
Q 7 Define functional groups. Write the general formula of Carboxylic acids acid
chlorides.
s
A 7 Functional Groups :It is an atom or group of atoms bonded together in a unique

er
manner which is usually the site of chemical reactivity in an organic molecule. e g

CH3OH
ev
General formula of Carboxylic acids : C nH2n+1COOH

General formula of acid chlorides :RCOCl
hi
Q 8 Write a shirt note on differential extraction.

A 8 When an organic compound is present in an aqueous medium it is separated by
Ac
shaking it with organic solvent in which it is more soluble than in water. The aqueous
solution is mixed with organic solvent in a separating funnel and shaken for
sometimes and then allowed to stand for some time .when organic solvent and water
form two separate layers the lower layer is run out by opening the tap of funnel and
organic layer is separated. the process is repeated several times and pure organic
compound is separated.
Q 9 How carbon and Hydrogen is detected in a organic compounds.
A 9 The Carbon and Hydrogen present in the Organic compound is detected by
heating the compound with Copper II oxide in a hard glass tube when carbon present
158

in the compound is oxidized to CO2 which can be tested with lime Water and
Hydrogenis converted to water which can be tested with anhydrous copper sulphate
which turns blue.
C + CuO 2Cu + CO2
2 H +CuO Cu + H2O
CO2 +Ca (OH ) 2 CaCO3 + H2O
5H2O + CuSO4 CuSO4.5H2O
y
Q 10 Write a short note on Resonance effect .
em
Resonance Effect : The polarity produced in the molecule by the interaction of two pi
bonds or between a pi bond and lone pair of electron present on an adjacent atom.
There are two types of resonance effect:
ad
1. Positive resonance effect: In this effect the transfer of electrons is away
from an atom or substituent group attached to the conjugated system.
The atoms or groups which shows +R effect are halogens,-OH , -OR,-
Ac
NH2
2. Negative resonance effect: In this effect the transfer of electrons is towards
the atom or substituent group attached to the conjugated system.
The atoms or groups which shows -R effect are –COOH , -CHO , -CN
s
Five Marks Questions

er
Q 1 Differentiate between the principle of estimation of nitrogen in an organic

compound by i) Dumas method ii) Kjeldahl’s method.
ev
Ans: DUMAS METHOD: A known mass of organic compound is heated with

excess of CuO in an atmosphere of CO2, when nitrogen of the organic compound is
converted into N2 gas. The volume of N2 thus obtained is converted into STP and the
hi
percentage of nitrogen determined by applying the equation:

Volume of Nitrogen at STP = P1V1 x 273
Ac
760 x T1
%N = 28 x vol of N2 at STP x 100
22400 x mass of the substance taken
KJELDAHL’S METHOD: A known mass of organic compound is heated with conc.
H2SO4 in presence of K2SO4 and little CuSO4 or Hg in a long necked flask called
Kjeldahl’s flask when nitrogen present in the organic compound is quantitatively
converted into (NH4)2SO4. (NH4)2SO4 thus obtained is boiled with excess of
159

NaOHsolution to liberate NH3 gas which is absorbed in a known excess of a standard

acid such as H2SO4 or HCl.
The vol of acid unused is found by titration against a standard alkali solution. From
the vol of the acid used, the percentage of nitrogen is determined by applying the
equation,
%N= 1.4 x Molarity of the acid x Basicity of the acid x Vol of the acid used
Q 2 A sample of 0.50g of organic compound was treated according to Kjeldahl’s
y
method. The ammonia evolved was absorbed in 50mL of 0.5M H2SO4. The residual
em
acid required 60mL of 0.5M solution of NaOH for neutralization. Find the
percentage composition of nitrogen in the compound.
Ans: the vol ofH2SO4 used.
ad
Vol of acid taken=50mL of 0.5M H2SO4= 25mL of 1M H2SO4
Vol of alkali used for neutralization of excess acid= 60 mL of 0.5m NaOH=30mL of
1M NaOH
Ac
Now 1 mole of H2SO4 neutralizes 2 moles of NaOH
(i.e. H2SO4 + 2 NaOH Na2SO4 + 2H2O)
… 30 mL of 1M NaOH = 15mL of 1M H2SO4
s
% of nitrogen.
er
1 mole of H2SO4 neutralizes 2 moles of NH3 … 10mL of 1M H2SO4 = 20mL of 1M

NH3
ev
But 1000mL of 1M NH3 contain N=14g.

20 ml of 1M NH3 will contain nitrogen = 14 x 20
hi
1000
Ac
But this amount of nitrogen is present in 0.5 g of organic compound

.. . % of N = 14 x 20 x 100 = 56.0
1000 x 0.5
Q 3 You have a mixture of three liquids A, B , C. there is a large difference in the
boiling point of A and the rest two liquids. Boiling points of liquids B and C are
quite close. Liquid A boils at higher temperature than B and C and boiling point of B
is lower than C. How will you separate the components of the mixture.
160

Ans Since the boiling point of liquid A is much higher than those of liquids B and C ,
therefore separate liquid A by simple distillation. Since boiling points of liquids B
and C are quite close but much lower than liquid A therefore mixture of B and C will
distil together leaving behind A. on further heating A will distil over.
Now place the mixture of liquids B and C in a flask fitted with fractionating column.
Since the b.p. of liquid B is lower than that of C , on fractional distillation first liquid
B will distil over and than liquid C.
HOTS QUESTIONS
y
Q 1 Explain hyperconjugation effect. How does hyperconjugationeffect explain the
stability of alkenes?
em
Ans The relative stability of various classes of carbonium ions may be explained by
the number of no-bond resonance structures that can be written for them. Such
structures are obtained by shifting the bonding electrons from an adjacent C-H bond
ad
to the electron deficient carbon so the positive charge originally on carbon is
dispersed to the hydrogen. This manner of electron release by assuming no bond
character in the adjacent C-H bond is called Hyperconjugation. Greater the
hyperconjugation greater will be the stability of alkenes.
Ac
CH3 – CH = CH – CH3<CH3 – C = CH – CH3 <CH3 – C = C – CH3
CH3 CH3 CH3
s
Q 2In DNA and RNA nitrogen is present in the ring system. Can kjeldahl method be
er
used for the estimation of nitrogen present in these ?give reasons

AnsIn DNA and RNA nitrogen is present in hetrocyclicrings.Kjeldahl method can
ev
not be used to estimate nitrogen present in the ring because cannot be completely
converted in to (NH4)2SO4 during digestion. Therefore Kjeldahl method can not be
used to estimate nitrogen present in DNA and RNA.
hi
Q 3 1.216 g of an organic compound was Kjeldahlised and the ammonia evolved

was absorbed in 100 mL 1N H2SO4. The remaining acid solution was made
Ac
upto500ml by addition of water. 20ml of this dilute solution required 32mL of N/10
caustic soda solution for complete neutralization. Calculate the percentage of
nitrogen in the organic compound.
Ans 20 ml of dil. Unreacted H2SO4 = 32mL of N/10 NaOH sol.
500ml of dilunreacted H2SO4 = 32 x 500 mL of NNaOH =32 x 500 ml of 1 N NaOH
20 10 20 x 10
= 80ml 1 N NaOH
161

But 80ml 1 N NaOH= 80ml 1 N NaOH So, acid left unused = 80ml 1 N H2SO4
Acid used =(100 – 80) = 20ml 1 N H2SO4
%N= 1.4 x Normality of the acid x Vol of the acid used
= 1.4 x 1 x 20 = 23.026
1.216
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
162

CHAPTER 13
HYDROCARBON
 Hydrocarbons are composed of Carbon and hydrogen.

 The important fuels like Petrol, kerosene, coal gas, CNG, LPG etc. are all
hydrocarbons or their mixture.
Sources:
Petroleum and natural gas are the major sources of aliphatic hydrocarbon while coal is an
important source of aromatic hydrocarbons. The oil trapped inside the rocks is known as
petroleum. PETRA – ROCK, OLEUM – OIL. The oil in the petroleum field is covered with
y
a gaseous mixture known as natural gas. The main constituents of the natural gas are
em
methane, ethane, propane and butane.
CLASSIFICATION OF HYDROCARBONS:
HYDROCARBON
ad
Acyclic or Aliphatic Carbocyclic or Cyclic
( Open chain)
Ac
Alicyclic Aromatic
Alkanes Alkenes Alkyne
s
er
Cycloalkanes Cycloalkenes Cycloalkynes

Alkanes:-
 Paraffins
ev
 General formula CnH2n+2

 sp3 hybridisation
 C–C bond length 1.15 4 A0
 Chemically unreactive
hi
 Show chain, position and optical isomerism.

 Heptane has 9 isomer, Octane 18 and Decane 75.
Ac
Nomenclature:
163

Preparation:-
 Wurtz reaction:-
Dry
2CH3CH2Br 2Na CH3CH2CH2CH3 2NaBr
ether
 Follow mainly free radical mechanism

 Useful in preparing an alkane containing
even number of carbon atoms
 Stepping up reaction
y
Frankland reaction
em
RX +Zn+Rx R –R +ZnX2
From Grignard reagent (RMgX)
RMgX+HOH RH+Mg(OH)X
RMgX+R'OH RH+Mg(OR')X
ad
RMgX+R'NH2 RH+Mg(NHR')X
From unsaturated hydrocarbons:-

Ac
Sabatier-Senderens reduction
Ni /
R CH CH2 H2 R CH2 CH3
Ni /
R C CH H2 R CH2 CH3
s
4. From carboxylic acids-

Decarboxylation.-
er
ev
Kolbe’s electrolytic method-

hi
Ac
 Physical Properties:-
(1) Nature:- Non-Polar due to covalent nature of C—C bond and C—H bond. C—
C bond enrgy = 83 kj/mole and C—H bond energy = 99 kj/mole.
C1—C4 = gases, C5—C17 = colourless odourless liquid and > C17 = Solid.
(2) Solubility:- Like dissolve like
Viz, Polar compounds dissolve in polar solvent and Non-Polar compound dissolve in
non polar solvent.
(3) Boiling point:- Low boiling point due to non polar in nature.
164

The molecules are held together only by weak Van der Waalls’ forces.
Since we known that the magnitude of Van der Waalls’ forces is directly
proportional to the molecular size. Therefore, the boiling point increases with
increase the molecular size i.e. with increase in number of carbon atoms.
Noted:- the boiling points of the branched chain Alkanes are less than the straight
chain isomers.
This is due to the fact that branching of the chain makes the molecule more
compact and thereby decreases the surface aria and consequently, the magnitudes of
Van der Waalls’ forces also decrease.
y
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3 H3 C — CH — CH2 CH3 CH3
n-pentane
em
CH3 H3 C — C — CH3
(4)boiling point =
Melting 309 Kthe
point:- melting point of Alkanes do
iso-pentane CHnot
3
show
regular variation with boiling point
increase = 301 K size. The
in molecular Alkanes
neo-pentanewith even number of
boiling point
carbon atoms having higher melting point as compared to= those
282.5 KAlkanes having
immediately next lower and immediately next higher odd number of carbon atoms.
ad
 Chemical properties
 Combustion:- CH4 2O2 CO2 2H2O
Ac
H 217.0 K cal/mole
 Oxidation:-
Cu
CH4 O2 2CH3OH
573 K
s
Mo2O3
CH4 O2 HCHO H2O
Methanal
er
 Substitution:-
 Halogenation:-
ev
UV
CH4 + Cl2 CH3Cl + HCl
UV UV
UV
CH3Cl CH2Cl2 CHCl3 CCl4
hi
Noted:- Iodination is a reversible reaction. So it is carried out by heating alkane in

the presence of some oxidizing agent like iodic acid (HIO 3) or nitric acid (HNO3) or
Ac
mercuric oxide (HgO) which oxidizes HI formed during the reaction.
CH4 + I2 Heat CH3I + HI

H
e
5HI + HIO3 a 3H2O + 3I2
t
2HI + 2HNO3 2H2O + I2 + 2NO2
Noted:- Fluorination of alkane takes place explosively resulting even in the rupture
of C—C bond in higher alkanes.
165

Features of Halogenations:-
(i) The reactivity of Halogens:- F2 > Cl2 > Br2 > I2.
(ii) The rate of replacement of Hydrogens of alkanes is:
3° > 2° > 1°
Cl2
CH3CH2CH2CH3 CH3CH2CH2CH2Cl + CH3CH2CHCH3
hv
n - Butane Cl
CH3
y
CH3 C CH3
1°
CH3 3° 1°
Cl2
em
Cl
CH - CH3
1° h 36% (3°)
CH3
CH3
CH - CH2 Cl
Isobutane
CH3
64% (1°)
ad
Mechanism:- halogenations reaction take place by free radical mechanism. The
Ac
reaction proceeds in the following steps:
Initiation
(i) Chain initiation step:-
h
Cl — Cl 2Cl
s
Chain Propagation step:-

er
(ii)
CH4 Cl CH3 HCl

ev
CH3 Cl2 CH3Cl Cl
(iii) Chain Termination step:-

hi
Cl Cl Cl2
CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3

Ac
CH3 Cl CH3Cl
 Nitration:-
 The reaction takes places by free radicals mechanism at high temp (4500C).
 At high temp C—C bond is also broken so that mixture of nitroalkanes is obtained.
450°C
CH3CH2CH3 CH3CH2CH2NO2 + CH3CHCH3 + CH3CH2NO2+ CH3NO2
Conc. HNO3
NO2
25% 40% 10% 25%
166

The reaction occurs as:

4500C
HO-NO2 Homolytic fission
HOo + oNO2
RH + 0OH Ro + HOH
Ro + oNO2 RNO2
 Sulphonation:- replacement of hydrogen atom of alkane by –SO3H group.

CH3
CH3
oleum
C CH3
y
CH CH3 CH3
CH3
SO 3H
em
isobutane tert butyl sulphonic acid
4500C
The reaction occurs as: Homolytic fission
HO-SO3 HOo + oSO3H
ad
RH + 0OH Ro + HOH
Ro + oSO2H
 Isomerization:- RSO2H
Ac
CH3
AlCl3 / HCl
H3C(CH2)3CH3 H3CCHCH2CH3
n-Pentane 2-Methyl butane
Aromatization:-
s
Cr2O3
H3C(CH2)4CH3
er
773 K
Hexane 10-20 atm Benzene
ev
This method is also called dehydrogenation or hydroforming

Similarly, heptane gives toluene, n-Octane give o-xylene and 2, methyl heptane give
m-xylene.
Thermal decomposition or Pyrolysis or cracking or Fragmentation: - when higher
hi
alkanes are heated at high temp (about 700-800k) in the presence of alumina or silica
catalysts, the alkanes break down to lower alkanes and alkenes.
Ac
CH3-CH2-CH3 CH3-CH-CH2 + CH3-CH3 + C2H4 + CH4

 Action of steam:- catalyst: nickel, alumina Al2O3
1000 0C
CH4 + H2O(Steam) CO + 3H2
This reaction is used for the industrial preparation of hydrogen from natural gas.
8. Isomerisation:-
167

 CONFORMATIONAL ISOMERISM:
The different molecular arrangements arising as a result of rotation around carbon
carbon single bonds are called conformational isomers or rotational isomers and the
y
phenomenon is called conformational isomerism.
em
Numerous possible arrangements of ethane are possible. Two extreme conformations
are known. These are eclipsed conformation and staggered conformation.
SAWHORSE REPRESENTATION
H H
ad
H
H H
H
Ac
H H
H H
H
H
s
STAGGERED ECLIPSED
er
NEWMAN PROJECTION
ev
H
H H
hi
H
H
Ac
H H
H
H H H
H
STAGGERED SKEW ECLIPSED
168

Alkenes
 Unsaturated hydrocarbon which have double bond.
 General molecular formula CnH2n
 C–C bond hybridization 1.34 A0
 sp2 hybridization
 When we treated Alkene with chlorine, oily products are obtained. So Alkenes are
also known as Olefins. (Greek olefiant meaning oil forming).
 Show chain, positional and geometrical isomerism
 Structure of double bond:-
y
em
ad
Ac
 Preparation:-
s
1. From Alkynes:- Alkynes on partial reduction with Partially deactivated

palladised charcoal known as Lindlar’s catalyst give alkynes.
er
ev
2. From Haloalkanes: - dehydrohalogenation

(E2 or 1,2-elimination or Bita-elimination)
hi
H
2 1 Alc.KOH
CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 + KBr + H2O
Mechanism:-
Ac
Br
–
H H OH H
OH H H H
C C Slow
C
C C + Br- + H2O
C
H Br
H
H H
H H H
H Br
–
Transition state
 predominant formation of a substituted alkene is formed
according to Saytzeff’s rule
CH3 - CH2 - CH2 - CH3 Alc. KOH CH3 - CH = CH- CH3 +CH3 - CH2 - CH = CH2
| Major Minor 169
Br
3. From Dihaloalkanes: - dehalogenation

Zn/HOAC H H
C C + ZnBr2
H H
H H
H C C H
H H
Br Br Na
C C + I2 +2 NaBr
acetone
H H
4. From Alcohols:- Dehydration
y
(E1 - elimination)
em
CH3CH2CH2OH Conc.H2SO4 CH3CH = CH2+ H2O
160°
CH3CH2CH2CH2OH Al2O3 CH3CH2CH CH2
ad
Mechanism 300° C
H+
CH3 - CH2 - CH2 - OH CH3 - CH2 - CH2 - OH+ -H2O
2 CH3 CH2 CH2
Ac
CH3 CH CH2 H
CH3 CH CH2
1 propene
H
loss of H2O
OH CH3 C CH3
s
CH
1 2 from 1, 2
H3C C CH2 CH3 position CH3
er
(major)
CH3 loss of H2O
CH3 C CH2 CH3
3
from 1, 3
position CH2
ev
(Minor)
 Chemical Properties:-
 Addition Reaction:- Alkene show electrophilic addition reaction.
hi
1. Addition of Hydrogen:-
H2 /Ni
RCH= CH2 RCH2CH3
Ac
2. Addition of Halogens:-
CH2 - CH2
CCl4 | |
CH2 = CH2 + Br2 Br Br
Solvent
H2 O
CH2 CH2 Br2 Br — CH2 — CH2 — OH HBr
Solvent
(Brown colour) (Colourless)

3. Addition of hydrogen halides-
Addition reaction of HBr to symmetrical alkenes
170

Addition reaction of HBr to unsymmetrical alkenes takes place according to

Markovnikov Rule
Markownikov rule:- negative part of the addendum (adding molecule) gets attached
to that carbon atom which possesses lesser number of hydrogen atoms. e g
H+
CH3 Br CH3
At Position C CH3 C CH3
2 1 (1) CH3 CH3
CH3
C CH2 3° Br
y
CH3 more stable cation
Major Product
em
CH3
H+ Br
CH3
CH CH2
CH3 CH CH2 Br
At Position CH3
(2) 1°
less stable cation Minor Product
ad
Peroxide effect or Kharasch (Anti Markownikoff’s addition):- In 1933 Kharasch and
Mayo observed that when HBr is added to an unsymmetrical double bond in the
presence of organic peroxide, the reaction take places opposite to the Markovnikov
Ac
rule.
HBr
CH3 CH CH2 CH3 CH2 CH2Br
Peroxide
Propyl bromide
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
171

y
em
Noted:- peroxide effect is applicable only to HBr and not to HF, HCl and HI.
ad
Addition of HF, HCl and HI takes place according to Markovnikov’s rule even in the
presence of peroxide.
4. Addition of water (Hydration):- Acid catalyzed addition of water
Ac
65-70% H2SO4 CH3
CH3 CH
CH3 CH CH2 + H2O
OH
CH3
H2O/H CH3
C CH2 C CH3
CH3
s
CH3
OH
er
 Oxidation:-
 Combustion:- CO2 + H2O
ev
 Hydroboration–oxidation:- Alkanes react with diborane to form trialkyl boranes

which on oxidation with alkaline H2O2 give alcohols.
BH3 H2O2 /OH-
3CH2 = CH2 CH3CH2 3 B 3CH3CH2OH
hi
Triethylborane Ethyl alcohol
 Oxymercuration–demercuration:-
Ac
Hg(OAC)2 NaBH4
H2C CH2 CH2 CH2 Hg OAC CH3CH2OH + Hg
THF, H2O
OH OH
 Oxidation with potassium permanganate:-

2KMnO4 + H2O 2KOH + 2MnO2 + 3[O]
3 C C + 2KMnO
H2O 4++O4H O Cold 3 C C + 2 MnO2 + 2 KOH
2
From KMnO4 OH OH
(pink Colour) (Colourless)

172

 This reaction is also called Hydroxylation

 Cis product I.e. cis-diol is obtained.
Noted:- The alkaline potassium permanganate solution is known as Baeyer’s reagent.
It has bright pink colour. It oxidizes alkenes to glycols which is colourless. This
reaction is used as a test for the presence of double bond in a molecule. This is also
known as Baeyer test.
(i) Alk.KMnO4
CH3 CH CH2 CH3 COOH + CO2 + H2O
(ii) H+
y
 Oxidation with Ozone:- Ozonolysis – give carbonyls compounds
em
CH3
Q. Write IUPACOname
3
O which
of alkene O O
CH3CH2CH CCH3 CH3CH2CH C Zn/H2O
ad
CH3CH2CH + CH3CCH3 + Zn(OH)2
CH3 O O CH3
Ozonide
Noted:- Bromine water test and Baeyer’s test are used to detect the presence of
Ac
double bond while ozonolysis is used to detect the position of double bond.
Alkynes
 Unsaturated hydrocarbon which have triple bond.
 General molecular formula CnH2n–2
s
 sp hybridization
 Shows chain, positional and functional isomerism
er
 Preparation:-
From vicinal dihalides: - dehalogenation
ev
2KOH (alc)
CH3 CH CH2 CH3 C CH + 2KBr + 2H2O
Br Br
hi
By the action of water on calcium carbide:-

CaC2 H2O HC CH Ca(OH)2
Ac
 Chemical Properties:-
 Addition Reaction:- Alkyne show electrophilic addition reaction.
 Addition of Hydrogen:- Hydrogenation.
Ni
CH3C CH + 2H2 CH3CH2CH3
Propyne
173

Noted:- It may be noted that the hydrogenation can be controlled at the alkene stage
only. This is possible by using a Lindlar’s catalysts or sodium in liquid NH3 at 200k
temp..
Noted:- It may be again noted that the catalytic reduction of alkynes in the presence
of Lindlar’s catalyst gives cis-alkenes while in the presence of sodium in liquid NH3
(Birch reduction) gives trans-alkenes.
H3 C CH3
H2 / Lindlar
CH3 C C CH3 C C
Catalyst H
y
H
em
Na/NH3 (liq.) H3 C
CH3 C C CH3 C C
H
CH3
Addition of Halogens:- Br Br
ad
| |
2Br2
HC CH H C C H
| |
Br Br
 Addition of hydrogen halides:-
Ac
HC CH 2HBr CH3CH Br2
 Addition of water (Hydration):- Acid catalyzed addition of water

s
HgSO4
CH2
er
HC CH + H2O CHOH CH3 CHO

H2SO4
Unstable
O
ev
H2O/H+
CH3 C C CH3 CH3 C CH2CH3
HgSO4
O O
hi
H2O/H+
CH3C CCH2CH3 CH3CH2CCH2CH3+ CH3CCH2CH2CH3
HgSO4
(Major) (Minor)
Ac
5. Polymerisation-
a. Linear polymerisation: of ethyne gives polyacetylene or polyethyne
which is a high molecular weight polyene containing repeating units of
(CH = CH – CH = CH ) and can be represented as —(CH = CH – CH =
CH)n —
b. Cyclic polymerization- results in the formation of aromatic compound.
174

Acidity of Alkynes- Terminal alkynes are acidic in nature.
y
em
ad
Alkanes, alkenes and alkynes follow the following trend in their acidic
behaviour :
Ac
AROMATIC HYDROCARBON
Aromatic compounds containing benzene ring are known as benzenoids and those
s
not containing a benzene ring are known as non-benzenoids.

Structure of Benzene- Kekulé structure
er
ev
hi
Ac
Resonance and stability of benzene-Benzene is a hybrid of various resonating

structures.
The orbital overlapping picture benzene- All the six carbon atoms in benzene are
sp2 hybridized and these hybrid orbitals form sigma bonds.
175

y
The unhybridised p orbital of carbon atoms are close enough to form a π bond by
em
lateral overlap.
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
176

The six π electrons are thus delocalised and can move freely about the six carbon
nuclei. The delocalised π electron cloud is attracted more strongly by the nuclei of
the carbon atoms than the electron cloud localized between two carbon atoms.
Therefore, presence of delocalised π electrons in benzene makes it more stable .
Aromaticity:- The compounds that follow the following features are to be considered
aromatic.
(i) Planarity
(ii) Complete delocalisation of the π electrons in the ring
(iii) Presence of (4n + 2) π electrons in the ring where n is an integer (n = 0, 1,
y
2, . . .). This is often referred to as Hückel Rule.
Preparation of Benzene:
em
(i) Cyclic polymerisation of ethyne:
(ii) Decarboxylation of aromatic acids:
ad
Ac
(iii) Reduction of phenol: Phenol is reduced to benzene by passing its vapours over
heated zinc dust
s
er
Physical properties:
1. Aromatic hydrocarbons are non- polar molecules and are usually colourless
ev
liquids or solids with a characteristic aroma.

2. Aromatic hydrocarbons are immiscible with water but are readily miscible
with organic solvents.
3. They burn with sooty flame.
hi
Chemical properties
Ac
Arenes are characterised by electrophilic substitution reactions proceed via the

following three steps:
(a) Generation of the eletrophile
(b) Formation of carbocation intermediate
(c) Removal of proton from the carbocation intermediate
177

Nitration
Halogenation
+Cl2
Anhyd. AlCl3
y
em
Chloro benzene
ad
Sulphonation
Fuming sulphuric acid

Ac
H2SO4(SO3)
Friedel-Crafts alkylation
s
er
+C2H5Cl
Anhyd. AlCl3 Ethyl benzene
ev
hi
Friedel-Crafts acylation
+CH3COCl
Ac
Anhyd. AlCl3
acetphenone
benzene ontreatment with excess of chlorine in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 in

dark yields hexachlorobenzene (C6Cl6)
178

Addition reactions of benzene-
y
em
ad
Ac
Directive influence of a functional group in monosubstituted benzene:-
1. Ortho and para directing groups and activating- –OH, –NH2, –NHR, –
NHCOCH3, –OCH3, –CH3, –C2H5, etc.
s
er
ev
2. Meta directing group and deactivating:–NO2, –CN, –CHO, –COR, –COOH, –

hi
COOR, –SO3H, etc.

Ac
3. Ortho and para directing groups and deactivating- Halogens because of their
strong – I effect, overall electron density on benzene ring decreases. However,
179

due to resonance the electron density on o– and p– positions is greater than

that at the m-position. Hence, they are also o– and p– directing groups.
CARCINOGENICITY AND TOXICITY-Benzene and polynuclear hydrocarbons

containing more than two benzene rings fused together are toxic and said to possess
cancer producing (carcinogenic) property.
ONE MARK QUESTIONS

1. What are hydrocarbons?
Ans. Compounds of hydrogen and carbon.
y
2. What is the general formula of alkanes?
Ans. CnH2n+2
em
3. Write the general formula of alkenes.
Ans. CnH2n
4. What is the general formula of alkynes?
Ans. CnH2n-2
ad
5. Give the IUPAC name of lowest molecular weight alkane that contains a
quaternary carbon.
Ans. 2,2dimethylpropane.
Ac
6. Arrange the following in the increasing order of C-C bond length-
C2H6 C2H4 C2H2
Ans. C2H2 < C2H4 < C2H6
7. Out of ethylene and acetylene which is more acidic and why?
Ans. Acetylene, due to greater electonegativity of the sp hybrid carbon.
s
8. Name two reagents which can be used to distinguish between ethene and
ethyne.
er
Ans.Tollen’s reagent and ammonical CuCl solution.

9. Arrange the following in order of decreasing reactivity towards alkanes.
ev
HCl, HBr, HI, HF

Ans.HI> HBr> HCl >HF
10. How will you detect the presence of unsaturation in an organic compound?
Ans. Generally Unsaturated organic compound decolourise Bayer’s reagent
hi
and Bromine water.

11. What is Grignard reagent?
Ac
Ans. Alkyl magnesium halides
TWO MARKS QUESTIONS
1. Write the IUPAC names of the following-
a. b.
Ans. a .Pent-en-3-yne b. 2-methylphenol
180

2. Write chemical equations for combustion reaction of (i) Butane (ii) Toluene
Ans.
(ii)
y
Toluene
em
3. What are the necessary conditions for any system to be aromatic?
Ans. A compound is said to be aromatic if it satisfies the following three
conditions: (i) It should have a planar structure.
(ii) The π–electrons of the compound are completely delocalized in the ring.
(iii)The total number of π–electrons present in the ring should be equal to
ad
(4n + 2), where n = 0, 1, 2 … etc. This is known as Huckel’s rule.
4. What effect does branching of an alkane chain has on its boiling point?
Ans. As branching increases, the surface area of the molecule decreases which
Ac
results in a small area of contact. As a result, the Van der Waals force also
decreases which can be overcome at a relatively lower temperature. Hence, the
boiling point of an alkane chain decreases with an increase in branching.
5. How would you convert the following compounds into benzene?
(i) Ethyne (ii) Ethene
s
er
Ans. (i) Benzene from Ethyne:

ev
(ii) Benzene from Ethene:

hi
Ac
181

6. Suggest the name of Lewis acids other than anhydrous aluminium chloride
which can be used during ethylation of benzene.
Ans. anhydrous FeCl3, SnCl4, BF3 etc.
7. Write the name of all the possible isomers of C2H2Cl2 and indicate which of
them is non-polar.
Ans.(i) cis-1,2-dichloroethene (ii) trans-1,2-dichloroethene (iii) 1,1-
dichloroethene. trans-1,2-dichloroethene is non-polar.
8. Although benzene is highly unsaturated, it does not undergo addition reactions,
why?
Ans. Because of extra stability due to delocalization of π-electrons.
y
9. What are alkanes? Why are they called paraffins?
em
Ans. Those hydrocarbons which contain single bond between carbon- carbon
are called alkanes. They are called paraffins because they are very less
reactive (Latin- Parum= little, affins = affinity)
10. How can ethene be prepared from (i) ethanol (ii) ethyl bromide?
Ans. (i) Ethene from ethanol- by acidic dehydration of alcohols
ad
Ac
(ii) Ethene from ethyl bromide- by dehydrohalogenation of ethyl bromide
CH3CH2Br + KOH (alc) → H2C = CH2 + KBr + H2O
s
er

1. What is Wurtz reaction? How can it be used to prepare butane?
Ans- When alkyl halides is treated with metallic Na in presence of dry ether,
ev
alkanes are formed. This reaction is called Wurtz reaction.

Butane is prepared by the reaction of bromoethane with metallic Na in
presence of dry ether
hi
2. An alkene ‘A’ contains three C – C, eight C – H σ bonds and one C – C π

Ac
bond. ‘A’ on ozonolysis gives two moles of an aldehyde of molar mass 44 u.

Deduce IUPAC name of ‘A’.
Ans.. The formation of two moles of an aldehyde indicates the presence of
identical structural units on both sides of the double bond containing carbon
atoms. Hence, the structure of ‘A’ can be represented as:
XC = CX
There are eight C–H σ bonds. Hence, there are 8 hydrogen atoms in ‘A’. Also,
there are three C–C bonds. Hence, there are four carbon atoms present in the
structure of ‘A’.
182

Combining the inferences, the structure of ‘A’ can be represented as:
the IUPAC name of ‘A’ is But-2-ene.

Ozonolysis of ‘A’ takes place as:
y
em
ad
The final product is ethanal with molecular mass
Ac
3. In the alkane H3C – CH2 – C(CH3)2 – CH2 – CH(CH3)2, identify 1°,2°,3°
carbon atoms and give the number of H atoms bonded to each one of these.
Ans.
s
er
ev
The given structure has five 1° carbon atoms and fifteen hydrogen atoms
hi
attached to it.
The given structure has two 2° carbon atoms and four hydrogen atoms
attached to it.
Ac
The given structure has one 3° carbon atom and only one hydrogen atom is
attached to it
4. Addition of HBr to propene yields 2-bromopropane, while in the presence of

benzoyl peroxide, the same reaction yields 1-bromopropane. Explain and give
mechanism
Ans. Addition of HBr to propene is an example of an electrophilic substitution

reaction.
183

Hydrogen bromide provides an electrophile, H+. This electrophile attacks the

double bond to form 1° and 2° carbocations as shown:
y
em
Secondary carbocations are more stable than primary carbocations. Hence, the
former predominates since it will form at a faster rate. Thus, in the next step,
Br– attacks the carbocation to form 2 – bromopropane as the major product.
ad
Ac
This reaction follows Markovnikov’s rule
In the presence of benzoyl peroxide, an addition reaction takes place anti to

Markovnikov’s rule. The reaction follows a free radical chain mechanism as:
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
184

Secondary free radicals are more stable than primary radicals. Hence, the
former predominates since it forms at a faster rate. Thus, 1 – bromopropane is
obtained as the major product.
y
HOTS QUESTIONS
em
1. How will you demonstrate that double bonds of benzene are somewhat
different from that of olefins?
Ans.The double bonds of olefins decolourize bromine water and discharge the
pink colour of Bayer’s reagent while those of benzene not
ad
2. How will you separate propene from propyne?
Ans. By passing the mixture through ammonical silver nitrate solution when
propyne reacts while propene passes over.
3. Write is the structure of the alkene which on reductive ozonolysis gives
Ac
butanone and ethanol,
Ans.-CH3CH2C(CH3)=CHCH3
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
185

CHAPTER 14
ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY
Environmental chemistry deals with the study of the

origin,transport,reactions,effects,fates of chemical species in the environment.
ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION:-Environmental pollution is the effect of

undesirable changes in our surroundings that have harmful effects on plants,
animals and human beings.A substance which causes pollution is called a
y
pollutant.they can be solid,liquid or in the gaseous state.
em
ATMOSPHERIC POLLUTION:-The atmosphere that surrounds the earth is
not of the same thickness at different heights.Atmospheric pollution is
generally studied as tropospheric and stratospheric pollution.The ozone layer
prevents about 99.5%of the sun’s UV rays.
ad
TROPOSPHERIC POLLUTION:-Tropospheric pollution occurs due to the
presence of undesirable solid or gaseous particles in the air. The following
Ac
are the major gaseous and particulate pollutants present in the troposphere;
Gaseous air pollutants:These are oxides of sulphur, nitrogen and

carbon, hydrogen sulphide, hydrocarbons, ozone and other
oxidants.
s
Particulate pollutants; these are dust, mist, fumes, smoke, smog

er
etc
GLOBAL WARMING AND GREENHOUSE EFFECT:-About 75% of the
solar energy reaching the earth is absorbed by the earth’s surface,which
ev
increases it’s temperature.The rest of the heat radiates back to the

atmosphere.Some of the heat is trapped by the gases such as carbon
hi
dioxide,methane,ozone,CFCS and Water vapour.they add to the heating of the

atmosphere causing Global warming
Ac
In a greenhouse,visible light passes through the transparent glass and heats up

the soil and the plants.The warm soil and plants emit infrared rays,it partly
reflects and partly absorbs these radiations,this mechanism keeps the energy of
the sun trapped in the greenhouse.
ACID RAIN:When the pH of the rain water drops below5.6, it is called acid
rain.Acid rain is harmful for agriculture, trees and plants as it dissolves and
washes away nutrients needed for their growth. It causes respiratory ailments
186

in human beings and animals. When acid rain falls and flows as ground water
to reach rivers, lakes etc. it affects plants and animal life in aquatic ecosystem
SMOG:The word smog is derived from smoke and fog.There are two types of
smog:classical and photochemical smog. Classical smog occurs in cool humid
climate. It is a mixture of smoke, fog and sulphur dioxide. It is also called
reducing smog. Whereas photochemical smog occurs in warm and dry sunny
climate. It has high concentration of oxidizing agents and therefore ,it is also
called as oxidizing smog
y
em
OZONE HOLE:Depletion of ozone layer is known as ozone hole.
EFFECTS OF DEPLETION OF THE OZONE LAYER: With the depletion of

ozone layer, more UV radiation filters into troposphere. UV radiations lead to
ad
ageing of skin, cataract, sunburn, skin cancer, killing of many phytoplanktons,
damage to fish productivity etc
WATER POLLUTION:-contamination of water by foreign substances which
Ac
make it harmful for health of animals or plants or aquatic life and make it unfit
for domestic, industrial and agriculture use.
SOURCES/ CAUSES OF WATER POLLUTION-

Sewage and domestic wastes
s
Industrial effluents
er
Agriculture effluents
Siltation-mixing of soil or rock into water
ev
Thermal pollutants
Radioactive discharge
EUTROPHICATION:The process in which nutrientenriched water bodies
hi
support a dense plantpopulation, which kills animal life by deprivingit of

oxygen and results in subsequent loss ofbiodiversity is known
Ac
asEutrophication
BOD: The amount of oxygen required by bacteria to break down the organic
matter present in a certain volume of a sample of water, is called Biochemical
Oxygen Demand (BOD)
SOIL POLLUTION:Insecticides, pesticides and herbicides cause soil

pollution.
187

GREEN CHEMISTRY:Green chemistry us a way of thinking and is about

utilizing the existing knowledge and principles of chemistry and other
sciences to reduce the adverse impact on environment.Green chemistry is a
production process that would bring out minimum pollution or deterioration to
the environment..Utilization of existing knowledge base for reducing the
chemical hazards along with the development of activities is the foundation of
green chemistry.
y
ONE MARK QUESTION
em
1. What is the name of the compound formed when CO combines with blood?
Ans:-Carboxyhaemoglobin.
2. Which zone is known as ozonosphere?
Ans:-Stratosphere.
ad
3. Which main gas esis responsible for damage in ozone layer?
Ans:-NO and CFCs(freons).
4. What is the nature of classical smog?
Ans:-Reducing
Ac
5. Name the acids which are responsible for acid rain?
Ans:-H2SO4,HNO3 and HCl.
6. List out the gasses which are considered as major source of air pollution?
Ans:-Carbon monoxide(CO),sulphur dioxide(SO2)and oxides of
nitrogen(NO2).
s
7. What is PAN stands for?

er
Ans:-It is peroxyacetyl nitrate.

8. Give the examples of insecticides?
Ans:-DDT,BHC.
ev
9. Which gas is mainly responsible for BHOPAL gas tragedy?

Ans:-Methyl isocyanate.
10. What should be the tolerable limit of F- ions in drinking water?
Ans:-1ppm or 1mg dm-3.
hi
TWO MARKs QUESTION

Ac
1. What is ‘acid rain’? How is it harmful to the environment?

Ans:-Acid rain is the rain water mixed with small amount of sulphuric acid,
nitric acid along with hydrochloric acid which are formed from the oxides of
sulphur and nitrogen present in air as pollutants.It has a pH of 4-5.
Harmful effects of acid rain:-
It is toxic to vegetation and aquatic life.
It damages buildings and status
188

2. What do youmean byGreen house effect ?What is the role of CO2 in the
greenhouse effect.
Ans:-It is the phenomenon in which earth’s atmosphere traps the heat from the
sun and prevents it from escaping in outer space. Gases such as CO 2
,methane,ozone,CFCs are believed to be responsible for this effect.
Heat from the sun after being absorbed by the earth absorbed by CO2 and then
radiated back to the earth.Thus making the environment of the earth warm.
3. Which gases are responsible for greenhouse effect?List some of them.

Ans:-CO2 is mainly responsible for greenhouse effect.Other greenhouse gases
y
are methane nitrous oxide, water vapours.
em
4. What is smog?How is classical smogdifferent from photochemical smog?
Ans:-The word smog is a combination of smoke andfog.It is a type of air
pollution that occurs in many cities throughoutthe world.Classical smog occurs
in cool humid climate.It is also called reducing smog.
ad
Whereas photochemical smog occurs in warm and dry sunny climate. It has
high concentrationof oxidizing agents and therefore ,it is also called as
oxidizing smog.
Ac
5. What are the reactions involved for ozone layer depletion in the stratosphere?
Ans:-CF2Cl2(g) +UV Cl(g) + CF2Cl(g)
Cl(g) +O3(g) ClO(g) +O2(g)
ClO(g) +O(g) Cl +O2(g)
s
6. What is the full form of BOD and COD?

er
Ans:-BOD stands for Biochemical Oxygen Demand whereas COD stands for
Chemical Oxygen Demand.
7. What are viable and non-viable particulates?
ev
Ans:-Viable particulates:-They are minute living organisms that are dispersed

in the atmosphere including bacteria,fungi,moulds,algae etc.
Non-viable particulates:-They are formed by the breakdownof larger materials
hi
or by the condensation of minute particles and droplets.

8. What is B.H.C?Give its IUPAC name?
Ac
Ans:-B.H.C is BENZENE HEXACHLORIDE Its IUPAC name is 1,2,3,4,5,6-

hexa chlorocyclohexane.
9. What is meant by PCBs?
Ans:-PCBs arepolychlorinated biphenyls.They are contaminates of water.
They are used as fluids in transformers and capacitors.
10. What is the compound formed when COcombines with blood?
Ans:-When CO combines with blood, the following reaction occurs forming
carboxyhaemoglobin:-
HB +CO (HBCO) Carboxyhaemoglobin
189

THREE MARKS QUESTION
1. What do you understand by- (i) Mist (ii) Smoke (iii) Fumes
Ans(i) Mists:-Mists are produced by particles of spray liquids and the
condensation of vapours in air.
(ii)Smoke:- They are very small soot particles produced by burning of organic
matter.
(iii)Fumes:- These are condensed vapours;fumes of metals are well known
particulates of this type.
2. Define the term pesticides? What are three categories of pesticides?
y
Ans:-Pesticides are substances which are used to kill or block the reproductive
process of unwanted organisms.
em
The three main categories of pesticides are:-
(i)Insecticides:-These are used to control insects and curb diseasesand protect
crops.
(ii)Herbicides:-These are used to kill weeds .Example- sodium chlorate
ad
(NaClO3), sodium arsinite(Na3AsO3)
(iii)Fungicides:- These are used to check the growth of fungi. Example-methyl,
mercury.
3. What do you mean by ozone hole? What are its consequences?
Ac
Ans:-Depletion of ozone hole creates some sort of holes in the blanket of
ozone which surround as. This is known as ozone hole.
(i)With the depletion of the ozone layer UV radiation filters into the
troposphere which leads to aging of skin,cataract,sunburn etc.
s
(ii)By killing many of the phytoplanktons it can damage the fish productivity.
er
4. What are harmful effects of photochemical smog and how can they
becontrolled?
Ans:- (i)Photochemical smog causes eye irritation.
ev
(ii)It damages plants (the leaves develop a metallic sheen)

(iii)Rubber on exposure to photochemical smog loses its elasticity and
becomes inflexible and brittle.
hi
Usually catalyticconverters are used in the automobiles, whichprevent the

release of nitrogen oxide andhydrocarbons to the atmosphere. Certainplants
Ac
e.g., Pinus, Juniparus, Quercus, Pyrusand Vitis can metabolise nitrogen oxide
andtherefore, their plantation could help in thismatter.
5. Give three examples in which green chemistry has been applied.
Ans:-
(i) In dry cleaning ,use of liquefied CO2 in place of
tetrachloroethene(Cl2C=CCl2)
( ii)In bleaching of paper using H2O2 in place of chlorine.
(iii)In the manufacture of chemicals like ethanal using environment-friendly
chemicals and conditions.
190

ENJOY CHEMISTRY
1.SOME BASIC CONCEPTS OF CHEMISTRY
Some Important Points and Terms of the Chapter
y
1. Anything which has mass and occupies space is called matter.
em
2. Matters exist in three physical states viz. solid, liquid and gas.
3. In solids, these particles are held very close to each other in an orderly fashion and there is
not much freedom of movement. In liquids, the particles are close to each other but they
ad
can move around. However, in gases, the particles are far apart as compared to those
present in solid or liquid states and their movement is easy and fast.
Ac
4. Solids have definite volume and definite shape.
5. Liquids have definite volume but not the definite shape. They take the shape of the
container in which they are placed.
6. Gases have neither definite volume nor definite shape. They completely occupy the
s
container in which they are placed.

er
7. A mixture contains two or more substances present in it (in any ratio) which are called its
components.
ev
8. A mixture may be homogeneous or heterogeneous.

9. In a homogeneous mixture, the components completely mix with each other and its
hi
composition is uniform throughout. Sugar solution and air are thus, the examples of
homogeneous mixtures.
Ac
10. In heterogeneous mixtures, the composition is not uniform throughout and sometimes the
different components can be observed. For example, the mixtures of salt and sugar, grains
and pulses along with some dirt (often stone) pieces, are heterogeneous mixtures..
11. The components of a mixture can be separated by using physical methods such as simple
hand picking, filtration, crystallization, distillation etc.
12. Pure substances have characteristics different from the mixtures. They have fixed
composition, Copper, silver, gold, water, glucose are some examples of pure substances.

Glucose contains carbon, hydrogen and oxygen in a fixed ratio and thus, like all other pure
substances has a fixed composition. Also, the constituents of pure substances cannot be
separated by simple physical methods.
13. An element consists of only one type of particles. These particles may be atoms or
molecules. Sodium, copper, silver, hydrogen, oxygen etc. are some examples of elements.
They all contain atoms of one type. However, the atoms of different elements are different
in nature. Some elements such as sodium or copper, contain single atoms held together as
their constituent particles whereas in some others, two or more atoms combine to give
y
molecules of the element. Thus, hydrogen, nitrogen and oxygen gases consist of molecules
em
in which two atoms combine to give their respective molecules.
14. When two or more atoms of different elements combine, the molecule of a compound is
obtained. The examples of some compounds are water, ammonia, carbon dioxide, sugar etc.
the atoms of different elements are present in a compound in a fixed and definite ratio and
ad
this ratio is characteristic of a particular compound.
15. The SI system(Systeme International d Unités –abbreviated as SI)) has seven base units
Ac
and they are listed in Table 1.1
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
16. Mass of a substance is the amount of matter present in it while weight is the force exerted
by gravity on an object. The mass of a substance is constant whereas its weight may vary
from one place to another due to change in gravity.
17. Volume has the units of (length) 3. So in SI system, volume has units of m3. A common
unit, litre (L) which is not an SI unit, is used for measurement of volume of liquids. 1 L =
1000 mL , 1000 cm3 = 1 dm3

18. Density of a substance is its amount of mass per unit volume SI units of density kg m–3
This unit is quite large and a chemist often expresses density in g cm–3.
19. There are three common scales to measuretemperature — °C (degree celsius), °F (degree
Fahrenheit) and K (Kelvin). Here, K is the SI unit.
20. The Kelvin scale is related to Celsius scale as follows :K =°C+273.15
21. The °F scale is related to Celsius scale as follows
y
22. In scientific notation (exponential Notation) any number can be represented in the form
N × 10n where n is an exponent having positive or negative values and N can vary between
em
1 to 10. Thus, we can write 232.508 as 2.32508 X102 in scientific notation. Note that while
writing it, the decimal had to be moved to the left by two places and same is the exponent
(2) of 10 in the scientific notation. Similarly, 0.00016 can be written as 1.6 X10–4. Here the
ad
decimal has to be moved four places to the right and (– 4) is the exponent in the scientific
notation.
Ac
23. Significant figures are meaningful digits which are known with certainty. The uncertainty
is indicated by writing the certain digits and the last uncertain digit. Thus, if we write a
result as 11.2 mL, we say the 11 is certain and 2 is uncertain and the uncertainty would be
 1 in the last digit. Unless otherwise stated, an uncertainty of +1 in the last digit is always
s
understood.
er
24. There are certain rules for determining the number of significant figures. These are
stated below:
ev
a) All non-zero digits are significant. For example in 285 cm, there are three significant
figures and in 0.25 mL, there are two significant figures.
hi
b) Zeros preceding to first non-zero digit are not significant. Such zero indicates the position
of decimal point. Thus, 0.03 has one significant figure and 0.0052 has two significant
Ac
figures.
c) Zeros between two non-zero digits are significant. Thus, 2.005 has four significant figures.
d) Zeros at the end or right of a number are significant provided they are on the right side of
the decimal point. For example, 0.200 g has three significant figures. But, if otherwise, the
terminal zeros are not significant if there is no decimal point. For example, 100 has only
one significant figure, but 100. has three significant figures and 100.0 has four significant

figures. Such numbers are better represented in scientific notation. We can express the
number 100 as 1×102 for one significant figure, 1.0×102 for two significant figures and
1.00×102 for three significant figures.
e) Counting numbers of objects, for example, 2 balls or 20 eggs, have infinite significant
figures as these are exact numbers and can be represented by writing infinite number of
zeros after placing a decimal i.e.,2 = 2.000000 or 20 = 20.000000
f) In numbers written in scientific notation, all digits are significant e.g., 4.01×102 has three
significant figures, and 8.256 × 10–3 has four significant figures.
y
25. .Law of Conservation of Mass states that matter can neither be created nor destroyed.
em
26. Law of Definite Proportions states that a given compound always contains exactly the
same proportion of elements by weight.
27. Law of Multiple Proportions states that if two elements can combine to form more than
one compound, the masses of one element that combine with a fixed mass of the other
ad
element, are in the ratio of small whole numbers.
28. Gay Lussac’s Law of Gaseous Volumes: This law was given by Gay Lussac in 1808. He
Ac
observed that when gases combine or are produced in a chemical reaction they do so in a
simple ratio by volume provided all gases are at same temperature and pressure.
29. In 1811, Avogadro proposed that equal volumes of gases at the same temperature and
s
pressure should contain equal number of molecules.

30. In 1808, Dalton published ‗A New System of Chemical Philosophy‘ in which he proposed
er
the following :
a) Matter consists of indivisible atoms.
ev
b) All the atoms of a given element have identical properties including identical mass.
Atoms of different elements differ in mass.
hi
c) Compounds are formed when atoms of different elements combine in a fixed ratio.
d) Chemical reactions involve reorganization of atoms. These are neither created nor
Ac
destroyed in a chemical reaction.

e) Dalton‘s theory could explain the laws of chemical combination.
31. One atomic mass unit is defined as a mass exactly equal to one twelfth the mass of one
carbon - 12 atom.

32. Molecular mass is the sum of atomic masses of the elements present in a molecule. It is
obtained by multiplying the atomic mass of each element by the number of its atoms and
adding them together.
33. The mole is the amount of substance of a system which contains as many elementary
entities as there are atoms in 0.012 kilogram of carbon-12; its symbol is ―mol.‖ When the
mole is used, the elementary entities must be specified and may be atoms, molecules, ions,
electrons, other particles, or specified groups of such particles. This number of entities in 1
mol is so important that it is given a separate name and symbol. It is known as ‗Avogadro
y
constant‘, denoted by NA in honor of Amedeo Avogadro.
em
34. An empirical formula represents the simplest whole number ratio of various atoms present
in a compound whereas the molecular formula shows the exact number of different types of
atoms present in a molecule of a compound.
35. Many a time, the reactions are carried out when the reactants are not present in the amounts
ad
as required by a balanced chemical reaction. In such situations, one reactant is in excess
over the other. The reactant which is present in the lesser amount gets consumed after
Ac
sometime and after that no further reaction takes place whatever be the amount of the other
reactant present. Hence, the reactant which gets consumed, limits the amount of product
formed and is, therefore, called the limiting reagent.
s
er
36. Mass per cent = Mass of solute per 100 g of solution

Mass of solute
ev
=  100
Mass of solution
It is the amount of solute in grams dissolved per 100 g of solution. e.g., 10% solution of sodium
hi
chloride means 10 g of solid sodium chloride present in 100 g of solution.

Ac
37. Mole Fraction: It is ratio of number of moles of a particular component to the total number
of moles of all the components.
No. of moles of solute
Mole-fraction of solute =
No. of moles of solute  No. of moles of solvent

WB
nB MB
xB  
nA  nB WA W
 B
M A WB
WB
MB W W
xB  in case of dilute solution  B < < A
WA MB MA
MA
y
38. Molality (m). It is defined as number of moles of solute (B) per 1000 g or 1 kg of solvent.
em
No. of moles of solute WB 1000
Molality (M) =  
Kg. of solvent MA WB in grams.
where WA is mass of solvent.
ad
39. Molarity (M). It is expressed as the number of moles of solute per litre of solution.
Ac
No. of moles of solute WB 1000
Molarity (M) =  
Litres of solution M B Volume of solution in ml.
where WB is mass of solute, MB is molar mass of solute

.
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

Unit-1
SOME BASIC CONCEPTS OF CHEMISTRY
1. Question based on significant numbers,Precision,Accuracy, ScientificNotation,
laws of chemical combinations, SI units
y
1.1 What are the SI unit of mass, length & time?
em
1.2 Match the following prefixes with their multiples:
Prefixes Multiples
(i) micro 106
ad
(ii) deca 109
(iii)mega 10–6
(iv) giga 10–15
Ac
(v)femto 10
(vi) pico 10–12
s
1.3 (a) What do you mean by significant figures? What are rules for determining the number of
er
significant figures?
(b)Explain the terms: Precision and Accuracy
ev
1.4 Express the following in the scientific notation: (i) 0.0048 (ii) 234,000 (iii) 8008 (iv) 500.0 (v)
6.0012
1.5 How many significant figures are present in the following? (i) 0.0025 (ii) 208 (iii) 5005 (iv) 126,000
hi
(v) 500.0 (vi) 2.0034

1.6 Round up the following upto three significant figures: (i) 34.216 (ii) 10.4107 (iii) 0.04597
Ac
(iv) 2808
1.7 The following data are obtained when dinitrogen and dioxygen react together to form different
compounds :
S.No Mass of Mass of
dinitrogen dioxygen
1 14 g 16 g

2 14 g 32 g
3 28 g 32 g
4 28 g 80 g
(a) Which law of chemical combination is obeyed by the above experimental data? Give its statement.
1.8 Convert the following into basic units: (i) 28.7 pm (ii) 15.15 pm (iii) 25365 mg
1.9 How many significant figures should be present in the answer of the following calculations?
1.10. State and illustrate the law of constant proportions.
y
1.11 State and explain the law of multiple proportions.
em
2. Question based on atomic and molecular masses Atomic Mass Average Atomic Mass,
Molecular Mass, Formula Mass, mole concept and molar Masses, percentage composition,
Empirical Formula for Molecular Formula, Limiting Reagent.
ad
2.1 Calculate the molecular mass of the following: (i) H2O (ii) CO2 (iii) CH4(iv) C6H12O6
2.2 Calculate the mass per cent of different elements present in sodium sulphate (Na2SO4).
Ac
2.3 Determine the empirical formula of an oxide of iron which has 69.9% iron and 30.1% Dioxygen by
mass.
2.4 How much copper can be obtained from 100 g of copper sulphate (CuSO4)?
2.5 In a reaction A + B2  Identify the limiting reagent, if any, in the following reaction mixtures.
s
(i) 300 atoms of A + 200 molecules of B (ii) 2 mol A + 3 mol B

er
(iii) 100 atoms of A + 100 molecules of B (iv) 5 mol A + 2.5 mol B (v) 2.5 mol A + 5 mol B
2.5 Determine the molecular formula of an oxide of iron in which the mass per cent of iron and oxygen
ev
are 69.9 and 30.1 respectively.

2.6 Calculate the atomic mass (average) of chlorine using the following data:
hi
Isotope % Natural Molar Mass

Abundance
Ac
35
Cl 75.77 34.9689
37
Cl 24.23 36.9659
2.7 In three moles of ethane (C2H6), calculate the following: (i) Number of moles of carbon atoms. (ii)
Number of moles of hydrogen atoms. (iii) Number of molecules of ethane.
2.8 If ten volumes of dihydrogen gas reacts with five volumes of dioxygen gas, how many volumes of
water vapour would be produced?

2.9A welding fuel gas contains carbon and hydrogen only. Burning a small sample of it in oxygen gives
3.38 g carbon dioxide , 0.690 g of water and no other products. A volume of 10.0 L (measured at STP)
of this welding gas is found to weigh 11.6 g. Calculate (i) empirical formula, (ii) molar mass of the gas,
and (iii) molecular formula.
2.10 Calculate the amount of water (g) produced by the combustion of 16 g of methane. reaction.
2.11 How many moles of methane are required to produce 22 g CO2 (g) after combustion?
2.12 A compound contains 4.07 % hydrogen,24.27 % carbon and 71.65 % chlorine.
Its molar mass is 98.96 g. What are its empirical and molecular formulas ?
3. Question based on Mass per cent, Molarity, Mole fraction, Molality
y
3.1(i) Define the following terms. (Write the mathematical formulas related to terms)(a) Mass percent
em
(b) Molarity (c) Molality (d) Mole-fraction (e) Mass percent
(ii)Calculate the mass of sodium acetate (CH3COONa) required to make 500 mL of 0.375 molar
aqueous solution. (Molar mass of sodium acetate is 82.0245 g mol–1).
ad
3.2 Calculate the concentration of nitric acid in moles per litre in a sample which has a density, 1.41 g
mL–1 and the mass per cent of nitric acid in it being 69%.
3.3 What is the concentration of sugar (C12H22O11) in mol L–1 if its 20 g are dissolved in enough water to
Ac
make a final volume up to 2L?
3.4 If the density of methanol is 0.793 kg L–1, what is its volume needed for making 2.5 L of its 0.25 M
solution?
s
3.5 A sample of drinking water was found to be severely contaminated with chloroform, CHCl3,
er
supposed to be carcinogenic in nature. The level of contamination was 15 ppm (by mass).
(i) Express this in percent by mass. (ii) Determine the molality of chloroform in the water sample.
ev
3.6 The density of 3 M solution of NaCl is 1.25 g mL–1. Calculate molality of the solution.
3.7 How are 0.50 mol Na2CO3 and 0.50 M Na2CO3 different?
3.8 Which one of the following will have largest number of atoms?
hi
(i) 1 g Au (s) (ii) 1 g Na (s) (iii) 1 g Li (s)(iv) 1 g of Cl2(g)

Ac
3.9 Calculate the molarity of a solution of ethanol in water in which the mole fraction of ethanol is
0.040 (assume the density of water to be one).
3.10 Calculate the number of atoms in each of the following (i) 52 moles of Ar (ii) 52 u of He (iii) 52 g
of He.
3.11Calculate the molarity of NaOH in the solution prepared by dissolving its 4 g in enough water to
form 250 mL of the solution.

3.12 A solution is prepared by adding 2 g of a substance A to 18 g of water. Calculate the mass per cent
of the solute.
3.13 How does molality & Molarity depend on temperature? Out of molality & Molarity which one is
better way to express concentration?
ANSWERS
y
2.1 Calculate the molecular mass of the following:
em
Ans: (i) H2O = 18 (ii) CO2=44 (iii) CH4 =16 (iv) C6H12O6 = 180
2.2 Calculate the mass per cent of different elements present in sodium sulphate (Na2SO4).
Ans % Na= 46 X100/142=32.4, %S= 32 X100/142= 22.53, %O = 64X100/142= 45.1
ad
2.3 Determine the empirical formula of an oxide of iron which has 69.9% iron and 30.1% Dioxygen by
Ac
mass.
Ans: no of moles of Fe: 69.9/56= 1.248
no of moles of O =30.1/ 16= 1.881
whole number ratio between the number of moles = 1: 1.5= 2: 3.
s
Hence empirical formula is Fe2O3

er
2.4 How much copper can be obtained from 100 g of copper sulphate (CuSO4)?
ev
Ans: 63.5g of Cu in 159.5g of CuSO4.

63.5X100/159.5g = 39.81g of Cu in 100g of CuSO4
hi
2.5 In a reaction A + B2  2 Identify the limiting reagent, if any, in the following reaction mixtures.
Ac
(i) 300 atoms of A + 200 molecules of B Ans:B is limiting

(ii) 2 mol A + 3 mol B Ans: A is limiting
(iii) 100 atoms of A + 100 molecules of B Ans: reactants totally consumed
(iv) 5 mol A + 2.5 mol B Ans: B is limiting
(v) 2.5 mol A + 5 mol B Ans: A is limiting

2.6 Calculate the atomic mass (average) of chlorine using the following data:
Isotope % Natural Molar Mass
Abundance
35
Cl 75.77 34.9689
37
Cl 24.23 36.9659
Ans: (34.9689 X75.77) + (36.9659 X24.23)/100 = 35.48
y
2.7 In three moles of ethane (C2H6), calculate the following:
(i) Number of moles of carbon atoms. Ans: 3X2= 6
em
(ii) Number of moles of hydrogen atoms. Ans: 3X6= 18
(iii) Number of molecules of ethane. Ans: 3X 6.023X1023=18.069X1023
ad
2.8 If ten volumes of dihydrogen gas reacts with five volumes of dioxygen gas, how many volumes of
water vapour would be produced?
Ans: 2H2(g) + O2(g)  2H2O(g); 10 volumes of water vapour
Ac
2.9A welding fuel gas contains carbon and hydrogen only. Burning a small sample of it in oxygen gives
3.38 g carbon dioxide, 0.690 g of water and no other products. A volume of 10.0 L (measured at STP)
s
of this welding gas is found to weigh 11.6 g. Calculate (i) empirical formula, (ii) molar mass of the gas,
er
and (iii) molecular formula.

Ans:
ev
i. 12g of C in 44g of CO2 =>(12/44)X3.38g of C in 3.38g of CO2= 0.922

2g of H in 18g of H2O => (2/18) X 0.690 of H in 0.690g of H2O=0.077
No of Moles of C= 0.922/12= 0.077
hi
No of moles of H =0.077
The empirical formula =CH
Ac
ii. 22.4L at STP =1 molar mass

10L at STP weighs11.6g;
22.4L will weigh (11.6/10)X22.4= 26
iii. Empirical formula mass= 13
Molecular mass=26
The ratio of molecular mass: empirical formula mass=2
Hence molecular formula is C2H2

2.10 Calculate the amount of water (g) produced by the combustion of 16 g of methane.
Ans: CH4+ 2O22H2O + CO2; 16g CH4is 1mole. From the stoichiometric equation we get 1mole of
methane gives 2moles of H2O. ie is 18X2 =36g of water.
2.11 How many moles of methane are required to produce 22 g CO2 (g) after combustion?
Ans: 22g of CO2 is 22/44 moles ie 0.5 moles; 1mole of CH4 produces 1mole of CO2. Hence 0.5 moles of
methane is required.
2.12 A compound contains 4.07 % hydrogen,24.27 % carbon and 71.65 % chlorine.
y
Its molar mass is 98.96 g. What are its empirical and molecular formulas ?
em
Ans: no of moles of H =4.07; C=24.27/12= 2.02; 71.65/35.5= 2.02
Simplest whole number ratio H: C:O= 2:1:1
Hence empirical formula is CH2O
ad
3. Question based on Mass per cent, Molarity, Mole fraction, Molality
3.1
Ac
(ii)Calculate the mass of sodium acetate (CH3COONa) required to make 500 mL of 0.375 molar
aqueous solution. (Molar mass of sodium acetate is 82.0245 g mol–1).
Ans: no of moles of sodium acetate (CH3COONa) required = (0.375/1000) X500=0.1875,ie
0.1875X82.0245 g = 15.38g
s
er
3.2 Calculate the concentration of nitric acid in moles per litre in a sample which has a density, 1.41 g
mL–1 and the mass per cent of nitric acid in it being 69%.
ev
Ans: 69g of HNO3 in 100g of sample. => 69/63=1.095moles in 100g of sample. => 1.095 moles in
100/1.41ml of acid i.e 70.92ml.
No of moles of HNO3 in 1000ml= (1.095/70.92)X1000= 15.44M
hi
3.3 What is the concentration of sugar (C12H22O11) in mol L–1 if its 20 g are dissolved in enough water to
Ac
make a final volume up to 2L?

Ans: 20g in 2lit 10g in 1 lit; 10/342=0.02924moles /lit
3.4 If the density of methanol is 0.793 kg L–1, what is its volume needed for making 2.5 L of its 0.25 M
solution?

Ans: moles of methanol required to prepare 2.5L of 0.25M methanol solution =2.5X0.25= 0.625
0.625X32g=20g of methanol.
793g of methanol is present in 1000ml. => 20g is present in (1000/793) X 20 ml of methanol sample.
25.22ml of methanol is used to prepare 2.5lit of 0.25M methanol.
3.5 A sample of drinking water was found to be severely contaminated with chloroform, CHCl3,
supposed to be carcinogenic in nature. The level of contamination was 15 ppm (by mass).
(i) Express this in percent by mass. Ans: (15/106)X 100= 15X10-4% by mass
(ii) Determine the molality of chloroform in the water sample. Ans: Mass of solute in 1kg of solvent
y
is15X10-3g. => 15X10-3/119.5 = 1.26X 10-4molal.
em
3.6 The density of 3 M solution of NaCl is 1.25 g mL–1. Calculate molality of the solution.
Ans: 1.25g/ml 1250g/lit. Mass of 1 litre solution is 1250g of which 3X58.5g= 175.5g is solute. Mass
ad
of solvent = 1250- 175.5= 1074.5 g.
3moles of solute in 1.074kg of solvent 3/1.074 moles in 1kg of solvent. Hence
molality=2.79moles/kg
Ac
3.8 Which one of the following will have largest number of atoms?
(i) 1 g Au (s) (ii) 1 g Na (s) (iii) 1 g Li (s)(iv) 1 g of Cl2(g)
s
Ans: iii) 1 g Li, because it has the least atomic mass among the given ones.
er
3.9 Calculate the molarity of a solution of ethanol in water in which the mole fraction of ethanol is
ev
0.040 (assume the density of water to be one).

Ans: we have to calculate no of moles per litre. Let no of moles of ethanol be X. let 1 litre of water =
1kg of water. Then:
hi
X/(X + 55.56)= 0.04 ;let X << 55.56 then X/55.56=0.04 ; X = 2.22,

Hence molarity is 2.22moles /lit
Ac
3.10 Calculate the number of atoms in each of the following

(i) 52 moles of Ar; Ans: 52 X 6.022X1023=313.144X 1023=3.13 X 1025 atoms
(ii) 52 u of He; Ans: 52/4= 13 atoms
(iii) 52 g of He; Ans: (52/4) X 6.022X1023 =78.286 X 1023 atoms of He.

3.11Calculate the molarity of NaOH in the solution prepared by dissolving its 4 g in enough water to
form 250 mL of the solution.
Ans: 4g in 250ml  16g in 1 lit.  16/40moles/lit= 0.4moles /lit= 0.4M
3.12 A solution is prepared by adding 2 g of a substance A to 18 g of water. Calculate the mass per cent
of the solute.
Ans: (2/18) X 100 is the mass percent.
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

2.Structure of Atom
1. The word ‗atom‘ has been derived from the Greek word ‗a-tomio‘ which means ‗uncutable‘or
‗non-divisible‘.
2. J. J. Thomson, in 1898, proposed that an atom possesses a spherical shape (radius approximately
y
10–10 m) in which the positive charge is uniformly distributed. The electrons are embedded into
em
it in such a manner as to give the most stable electrostatic arrangement (Fig. 2.4, NCERT Page
5). Many different names are given to this model, for example, plum pudding, raisin pudding
or watermelon.
3. Rutherford’s Nuclear Model of Atom:
ad
a) Most of the space in the atom is empty as most of the a–particles passed through the foil
undeflected.
Ac
b) A few positively charged a– particles were deflected. The deflection must be due to
enormous repulsive force showing that the positive charge of the atom is not spread
throughout the atom as Thomson had presumed. The positive charge has to be
concentrated in a very small volume that repelled and deflected the positively charged a–
s
particles.
er
c) Calculations by Rutherford showed that the volume occupied by the nucleus is negligibly
small as compared to the total volume of the atom. The radius of the atom is about 10–10
ev
m, while that of nucleus is 10–15 m.

d) On the basis of above observations and conclusions, Rutherford proposed the nuclear
model of atom (after the discovery of protons). According to this model :(i) The positive
hi
charge and most of the mass of the atom was densely concentrated in extremely small
Ac
region. This very small portion of the atom was called nucleus by Rutherford. (ii) The
nucleus is surrounded by electrons that move around the nucleus with a very high speed
in circular paths called orbits. Thus, Rutherford‘s model of atom resembles the solar
system in which the nucleus plays the role of sun and the electrons that of revolving
planets. (iii) Electrons and the nucleus are held together by electrostatic forces of
attraction.

4. The number of protons present in the nucleus is equal to atomic number (Z).the nucleus is equal
to atomic number (Z ).i.e. Atomic number (Z) = number of protons in the
nucleus of an atom = number of electronsin a nuetral atom
5. Protons and neutrons present in the nucleus are collectively known as nucleons. The total
number of nucleons is termed as mass number (A) of the atom.mass number (A) = number of
protons (Z) + number of neutrons (n)
6. Isobars are the atoms with same mass number but different atomic number for example, 6C14and
14
7N . On the other hand, atoms with identical atomic number but different atomic mass number
are known as Isotopes. e.g. 6C14 6C13 6C12 & 17Cl
35
,17Cl37
y
7. Drawbacks of Rutherford Model According to the electromagnetic theory of Maxwell, charged
em
particles when accelerated should emit electromagnetic radiation (This feature does not exist for
planets since they are uncharged). Therefore, an electron in an orbit will emit radiation, the
energy carried by radiation comes from electronic motion. The orbit will thus continue to shrink.
ad
Calculations show that it should take an electron only 10–8 s to spiral into the nucleus. But this
does not happen. Thus, the Rutherford model cannot explain the stability of an atom.
8. The frequency (ν ), wavelength (λ) and velocity of light (c) are related by the equation (2.5). c =
Ac
ν λ The other commonly used quantity specially in spectroscopy, is the wavenumber (ν- ). It is
defined as the number of wavelengths per unit length. Its units are reciprocal of wavelength unit,
i.e., m–1.
s
9. H. Hertz performed a very interesting experiment in which electrons (or electric current) were
er
ejected when certain metals (for example potassium, rubidium, caesium etc.) were exposed to a
beam of light . The phenomenon is called Photoelectric effect. For photoelectric effect : hv =
ev
hv0 + 1/2 m  2
10. Planck’s quantum theory. (i) The energy is
radiated or absorbed by a body not continuously but discontinuously in form of small packets.
hi
(ii) Each packet is called quantum. In case of light, the quantum is called ‗photon‘. The energy of
quantum is directly proportional to the frequency (v) of the radiation. E  v E = hv, Where ‘h’
Ac
is Planck‘s constant. Its value is 6.625  10-34 Joule second.

11. The spectrum of radiation emitted by a substance that has absorbed energy is called an emission
spectrum. Atoms, molecules or ions that have absorbed radiation are said to be ―excited‖. To
produce an emission spectrum, energy is supplied to a sample by heating it or irradiating it and
the wavelength (or frequency) of the radiation emitted, as the sample gives up the absorbed
energy, is recorded.

12. An absorption spectrum is like the photographic negative of an emission spectrum. A
continuum of radiation is passed through a sample which absorbs radiation of certain
wavelengths.
13. Line Spectrum of Hydrogen: When an electric discharge is passed through gaseous hydrogen,
the H2 molecules dissociate and the energetically excited hydrogen atoms produced emit
electromagnetic radiation of discrete frequencies. The hydrogen spectrum consists of several
series of lines named after their discoverers.
Series n1 n2 Spectral region
Lyman 1 2,3…… Ultraviolet
y
Balmer 2 3,4……… Visible
em
Paschen 3 4,5…….. Infrared
Brackett 4 5,6……. Infrared
Pfund 5 6,7……. Infrared
ad
The Swedish spectroscopist, Johannes Rydberg, noted that all series of lines in the hydrogen spectrum
could be described by the following expression :

Ac
14. Bohr’s Model For Hydrogen Atom
a) The electron in the hydrogen atom can move around the nucleus in a circular path of fixed
radius and energy. These paths are called orbits, stationary states or allowed energy states.
s
These orbits are arranged concentrically around the nucleus.

er
b) An electron can move only in those orbits for which its angular momentum is integral
multiple of h/2∏ that is why only certain fixed orbits are allowed.The angular
ev
momentum of an electron in a given stationary state can be expressed as in equation

hi
c) The energy of an electron in the orbit does not change with time. However, the electron
will move from a lower stationary state to a higher stationary state when required amount
Ac
of energy is absorbed by the electron or energy is emitted when electron moves from
higher stationary state to lower stationary state . The energy change does not take place
in a continuous manner.
d) The frequency of radiation absorbed or emitted when transition occurs between two
stationary states that differ in energy by ΔE, is given by :

15. Bohr‘s theory can also be applied to the ions containing only one electron, similar to that present
in hydrogen atom. For example, He+ Li2+, Be3+ and so on. The energies of the stationary states
associated with these kinds of ions (also known as hydrogen like species) are given by the
expression
y
16. Limitations of Bohr’s Model: It fails to account for the finer details (doublet, that is two closely
em
spaced lines) of the hydrogen atom spectrum observed by using sophisticated spectroscopic
techniques. This model is also unable to explain the spectrum of atoms other than hydrogen, for
example, helium atom which possesses only two electrons. Further, Bohr‘s theory was also
ad
unable to explain the splitting of spectral lines in the presence of magnetic field (Zeeman effect)
or an electric field (Stark effect).
17. Dual Behaviour of Matter: The French physicist, de Broglie in 1924 proposed that matter, like
Ac
radiation, should also exhibit dual behaviour i.e., both particle and wavelike properties.
18. The de Broglie relation. :de Broglie relation state that the wavelength associated with a moving
object or an electron is inversely proportional to the momentum of the particle.
s
h h
   where p is the momentum of particle = mv.
mv p
er
19. Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle. It is not possible to determine the position and velocity
simultaneously for a sub-atomic particle like electron at any given instant to an arbitary degree of
ev
precision. Consequently, it is not possible to talk of path of the electron in which it moves. If
‗  x‘ is uncertainty in position and ‗  P‘ is uncertainty in momentum then
hi
h
x.P 
4
Ac
20. Orbital. It is a region or space where there is maximum probability of getting electron.
21. Quantum numbers. They are used to get complete information about electron, i.e., location,
energy, spin, etc. These quantum numbers also help to designate the electron present in an
orbital.
22. Principal quantum number. It specifies the location and energy of an electron. It is measure
of the effective volume of the electron cloud. It is denoted by ‗n‘. Its possible values are 1, 2,
3,4 …..

23. Angular momentum quantum number. It is also called ‗azimuthal quantum number‘. It
determines the shape of the orbital. It is denoted by ‗l‘. The permitted values of ‗l‘ are 0, 1, 2,
etc., upto n–1. For a given value of n, l = 0 to n – 1 ‗. e.g., if value of n is 4, l can have values
h
mvr  l (l  1)
0, 1, 2, 3. It determines angular momentum. 2
24. Magnetic quantum number. It is denoted by ‗m‘ and its value depends on value of ‗l‘ since
magnetism is due to angular momentum. It determines the magnetic orientation of an orbital,
i.e., the direction of orbital relative to magnetic field in which it is placed. Its permitted values
y
are - l to + l including zero, e.g., when l = 1, then m = -1, 0, +1. It has total number of values
em
equal to 2l + 1.
25. Spin quantum number. It indicates, the direction in which electron revolves. Spin is
magnetic property and is also quantized. It has two permitted values + ½ or – ½. The spin
ad
angular momentum of an electron is constant and cannot be changed.
26. (n+l) rule: The relative order of energies of various sub-shells in a multi-electron atom can be
predicted with the help of (n+l) rule (also called Bohr-Bury rule)According to this rule a sub-
Ac
shell with lower values of (n+l) has lower energy.In case two sub-shell has equal value of (n+l),
the sub-shell with lower value of n has lower energy
27. Pauli’s Exclusion Principle. No two electrons in an atom can have all the four quantum
s
numbers same. It can also be stated as – An orbital can have maximum two electrons and they
er
must be of opposite spin quantum numbers.

28. Aufbau principle. Electrons are filled in the various orbitals in the increasing order of their
ev
energies, i.e., orbital having lowest energy will be filled first and the orbital having highest
energy will be filled last.Increasing energy ofatomic orbitals for multi-electron atoms
hi
1s < 2s < 2p < 3s <3p < 4s <3d < 4p <5s < 4d <5p < 6s < 4f < 5d < 6p < 7s
29. Hund’s rule of maximum multiplicity. No electron pairing takes place in p, d and f orbitals
Ac
until each orbital in the given sub-shell contains one electron, e.g., N (7) has electronic
configuration 1s2 2s2 2 p1x 2 p1y 2 p1z according to Hund‘s rule and not 1s 2 2s 2 2 p x2 2 p1y .
30. The valence electronic configurations of Cr and Cu, therefore, are 3d5 4s1 and 3d104s1
respectively and not 3d4 4s2 and 3d94s2. It has been found that there is extra stability(Stability of
Completely Filled and Half Filled Subshells) associated with these electronic configurations.
31. Three orbitals of 2p subshell (2px, 2py, and 2pz orbitals).

32. Five orbitals of 3d subshell (3dxy, 3dyz, 3dzx 3dx2-y2and 3dx2 orbitals).
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

Unit-2
STRUCTURE OF ATOM
1.Questions based on sub-atomic particles (Electron, Protons and Neutrons) atomic
models, Thomson Model Of Atom, Rutherford’s Nuclear Model Of Atom. Atomic
Number,Mass Number, Isobars, Isotopes, Drawbacks Of Rutherford Model.
y
em
1. Calculate the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in 35 Br80 .
2. The number of electrons, protons and neutrons in a species are equal to 18,16 and 16
respectively. Assign the proper symbol to the species.
3. How many neutrons and protons are there in the following nuclei? 6C13,8O16,12Mg24 ,26Fe56 88
ad
38Sr
4. Write the complete symbol for the atom with the given atomic number (Z) and atomic mass (A)
(i) Z = 17 , A = 35. (ii) Z = 92 , A = 233. (iii) Z = 4 , A = 9.
Ac
5. Which of the following are isoelectronic species i.e., those having the same number of electrons?
Na+, K+, Mg2+, Ca2+, S2–, Ar.
6. Give the number of electrons in the species H2+,H2 and O2+.
s
7. Calculate the number of electrons which will together weigh one gram.
8. Calculate the mass and charge of one mole of electrons.
er
9. Compare Electron, Protons and Neutrons.

10. Describe Thomson Model Of Atom.
ev
11. Explain Rutherford‘s scattering experiment.. What conclusions regarding the structure of atom
were drawn by Rutherford on the basis of the observations of experiment? Give the major
hi
drawbacks of Rutherford Model.

12. In Rutherford‘s experiment, generally the thin foil of heavy atoms, like gold, platinum etc. have
Ac
been used to be bombarded by the a-particles. If the thin foil of light atoms like aluminium etc. is
used, what difference would be observed from the above results?
13. Define the terms Atomic Number, Mass Number, Isobars, Isotopes,

ANSWER
1. Calculate the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in 35 Br80 .
Ans: no of protons =no of electrons =35; no of neutrons= 80-35= 45
2. The number of electrons, protons and neutrons in a species are equal to 18,16 and 16
respectively. Assign the proper symbol to the species.
Ans: [16S32]2-
y
em
3. How many neutrons and protons are there in the following nuclei?
13
a. 6C , ans P=6, n=7
16
b. 8O ,ans: P=8, n=8
24
ad
c. 12Mg , Ans: P=12, n=12
56
d. 26Fe , Ans: P=26, n=30
88
e. 38Sr , Ans: P=38, n=50
Ac
4. Write the complete symbol for the atom with the given atomic number (Z) and atomic mass
(A)
a. Z = 17 , A = 35.Ans: 17Cl35
b. Z = 92 , A = 233.Ans: 92U233
s
c. Z = 4 , A = 9. Ans: 4Be9
er
5. Which of the following are isoelectronic species i.e., those having the same number of
ev
electrons? Na+, K+, Mg2+, Ca2+, S2–, Ar.

Ans: i)Na+, Mg2+,
hi
ii)K+, Ca2+, S2–, Ar are isoelectronic.

Ac
6. Give the number of electrons in the species H2+,H2 and O2+.

Ans: 1,2,15
7. Calculate the number of electrons which will together weigh one gram.
Ans: mass of an electron: 9.1X10-28g;
No of electrons weighing 1 g= 1/9.1X10-28 =1.1X1027

8. Calculate the mass and charge of one mole of electrons.
Ans: mass of 1 electron: 9.1X10-28g; mass of 1 mole of electrons: 9.1X10-28g X6.022X1023
=54.8 X 10-5g
Charge on an electron= 1.6X 10-19Col
Charge on one mole of electrons= 1.6 X 10-19 X 6.022X1023= 9.635X104= 96500
coloumbs = 1faraday
2.Questions based on frequency wavelength wavenumber threshold frequency and work
function (W0 ), Photoelectric effect, Emission and Absorption Spectra, Line Spectrum
y
of Hydrogen, Bohr’s model for hydrogen atom, radii of the stationary states, energy of
em
stationary state, Limitations of Bohr’s Model
1. Define the terms frequency wavelength & wave number (Write mathematical forms also).
ad
2.The Vividh Bharati station of All India Radio, Delhi, broadcasts on a frequency of 1,368 kHz (kilo
hertz). Calculate the wavelength of the electromagnetic radiation emitted by transmitter. Which part of
Ac
the electromagnetic spectrum does it belong to?
3. The wavelength range of the visible spectrum extends from violet (400 nm) to red (750 nm). Express
these wavelengths in frequencies (Hz). (1nm = 10 –9 m)
4. Calculate(a) wavenumber and (b) frequency of yellow radiation having wavelength 5800Å.
s
5. Yellow light emitted from a sodium lamp has a wavelength of 580 nm. Calculate the frequency and
er
wavenumber of the yellow light.

6. Find energy of each of the photons which (i) correspond to light of frequency 3× 10 15Hz. (ii) have
ev
wavelength of 0.50 Å.
7. Calculate the wavelength, frequency and wave number of a light wave whose period is 2.0 × 10–10s.
hi
8. Electrons are emitted with zero velocity from a metal surface when it is exposed to radiation of
0 ) and work function (W0 ) of the metal.
Ac
9. Explain Photoelectric effect, Emission and Absorption Spectra

10. Give the postulates of Bohr‘s model. also write its Limitations.
11. Write a note on the Spectral Lines for Atomic Hydrogen.
12. What are the frequency and wavelength of a photon emitted during a transition from n = 5 state to
the n = 2 state in the hydrogen atom?
13. Calculate the energy associated with the first orbit of He + .What is the radius of this orbit?

14. What is the wavelength of light emitted when the electron in a hydrogen atom undergoes transition
from an energy level with n = 4 to an energy level with n = 2?
15 How much energy is required to ionise a H atom if the electron occupies n = 5 orbit? Compare your
answer with the ionization enthalpy of H atom ( energy required to remove the electron from n =1
orbit).
16. What is the maximum number of emission lines when the excited electron of a H atom in n = 6
drops to the ground state?
17.(i) The energy associated with first orbit in the hydrogen atom is –2.18 × 10 –18J atom–1. What is the
energy associated with the fifth orbit?
y
(ii) Calculate the radius of Bohr‘s fifth orbit for hydrogen atom.
em
18. Calculate the wavenumber for the longest wavelength transition in the Balmer series of atomic
hydrogen.
19. What is the energy in joules, required to shift the electron of the hydrogen atom from the first Bohr
ad
orbit to the fifth Bohr orbit and what is the wavelength of the light emitted when the electron returns to
the ground state? The ground state electron energy is –2.18 X 10–11ergs.
20. The electron energy in hydrogen atom is given by En = (–2.18 X 10–18)/n2J. Calculate the energy
Ac
required to remove an electron completely from the n = 2 orbit. What is the longest wavelength of light
in cm that can be used to cause this transition?
21. What transition in the hydrogen spectrum would have the same wavelength as the Balmer transition
s
n = 4 to n = 2 of He+ spectrum?
er
ev
ANSWER
2.The Vividh Bharati station of All India Radio, Delhi, broadcasts on a frequency of 1,368 kHz (kilo
hertz). Calculate the wavelength of the electromagnetic radiation emitted by transmitter. Which part of
hi
the electromagnetic spectrum does it belong to?

Ans: ν =1.368 X106= c/λ=> λ= 3 X 108/1.368 X 106= 219m.
Ac
3. The wavelength range of the visible spectrum extends from violet (400 nm) to red (750 nm). Express
these wavelengths in frequencies (Hz). (1nm = 10 –9 m)
Ans: ν= c/λ= 3X108/400X10-9= 7.5X1014hertz
ν= c/λ=3X108/750X10-9= 4X1014hertz
4. Calculate(a) wavenumber and (b) frequency of yellow radiation having wavelength 5800Å.

Ans: ν= c/λ= 3X108/5800X10-10= 5.17X 1014hertz
Wave number (ν- )=1/λ = 1/5.8X10-7=1.72 X 106
5. Yellow light emitted from a sodium lamp has a wavelength of 580 nm. Calculate the frequency and
wavenumber of the yellow light.
Ans: ν= c/λ= 3X108/5800X10-10= 5.17X 1014hertz
Wave number (ν- )=1/λ = 1/5.8X10-7=1.72 X 106
6. Find energy of each of the photons which
y
(i) correspond to light of frequency 3× 1015Hz.
em
Ans: E=h ν = 6.6X10-34 X3X1015 = 1.98X 10-18 Joules
(ii) have wavelength of 0.50 Å.
Ans: E= hc/λ= 6.6X10-34X3X108/0.5X10-10= 19.8/5X 10-15Joules =3.96 X 10-15Joules
ad
7. Calculate the wavelength, frequency and wave number of a light wave whose period is 2.0 × 10–10s.
Ans: 1/T= 1/2X10-10 = ν;
Ac
ν = c/λ;
λ=c/ ν= 3X108/5X109= 6X10-2m
Wave number (ν- ) =1/λ= 1/6 X 10-2=167m-1
s
er
8. Electrons are emitted with zero velocity from a metal surface when it is exposed to radiation of
0 ) and work function (W0 ) of the metal.
ev
Ans: : work function = hc/λ= 6.6X10-34X3X108/6.8 X 10-7= 2.912 X10-19Joules

Threshold frequency = c/λ= 3X108/6.8 X 10-7= 4.4X1014
hi
12. What are the frequency and wavelength of a photon emitted during a transition from n = 5 state to
Ac
the n = 2 state in the hydrogen atom?

Ans: E=-1312(1/52-1/22)= hc/λ in kJoules/mole= 1312 X21X103/100X6.022X1023
λ= hc/E= 6.6X10-34X3X108X100 X6.022X1023 /1312X21X103=19.8X6.6X10-1/27552
=4.743 X10-7m= 4743X 10-10
Wavelength of the emitted photon is 4743A
ν = c/λ
ν = 3X108/4.743X10-7 = 6.325X1014

13. Calculate the energy associated with the first orbit of He + .What is the radius of this orbit?
E=-2.18 X10-18Z2/n2J = -2.18X10-18X22/12= -8.72X10-18J.
14. What is the wavelength of light emitted when the electron in a hydrogen atom undergoes transition
from an energy level with n = 4 to an energy level with n =2?
E=-2.18X10-18(1/22-1/42)
=-2.18X10-18X3/16= -0.40875X10-18
E= -0.40875X10-18 energy is released.
y
E= hc/λ= 6.6X10-34X3X108/ λ
em
Λ=6.6X10-34X3X108/0.40875X10-18= 48.44X10-8m=4844A
15 How much energy is required to ionize a H atom if the electron occupies n = 5 orbit? Compare your
ad
answer with the ionization enthalpy of H atom (energy required to remove the electron from n =1 orbit).
E5= -2.18X10-18/52= -8.72X10-20J
E1=-2.18X10-18. Ionization energy of 1 H atom is 25 times the energy required to remove an
Ac
electron from n=5.
16. What is the maximum number of emission lines when the excited electron of a H atom in n = 6
s
drops to the ground state?

er
Ans: 5+4+3+2+1=15 lines

ev
17.(i) The energy associated with first orbit in the hydrogen atom is –2.18 × 10 –18J atom–1. What is the
energy associated with the fifth orbit?
(ii) Calculate the radius of Bohr‘s fifth orbit for hydrogen atom.
hi
R=52.9(n2)/z= 52.9X25/1=1322.5pm
Ac
18. Calculate the wave number for the longest wavelength transition in the Balmer series of atomic
hydrogen.
longest wavelength is minimum energy ie34 transition

=109677(1/32-1/22)
=109677X5/36= 15233cm-1

Λ= 6.565 X10-5cm =6.565X10-7m= 6565A
19. What is the energy in joules, required to shift the electron of the hydrogen atom from the first Bohr
orbit to the fifth Bohr orbit and what is the wavelength of the light emitted when the electron returns to
the ground state? The ground state electron energy is –2.18 X 10–11ergs.
Ans: E=2.18X10-11(1/52-1/12)
E=2.18X10-11(24/25) = 2.09X10-11ergs.=2.09X10-18J
Λ=hc/E= 6.6X10-34X3X108/2.09X10-18=9.474X10-8m =947.4A. This falls in the uv range
y
20. The electron energy in hydrogen atom is given by En = (–2.18 X 10–18)/n2J. Calculate the energy
em
required to remove an electron completely from the n = 2 orbit. What is the longest wavelength of light
in cm that can be used to cause this transition?
Ans:E2= 2.18X10-18/4=5.36X10-19J
ad
Λ=hc/E= 6.6X10-34X3X108/5.36X10-19= 3.694X10-7m= 3.694X10-5cm
Ie light of minimum wavelength3.694X10-5cm is required to remove the electron from n=2
21. What transition in the hydrogen spectrum would have the same wavelength as the Balmer transition
Ac
n = 4 to n = 2 of He+ spectrum?
E=-2.18X10-18X22X(1/22-1/42)=2.18X10-18X4X3/16= 1.635X10-18J
Λ=hc/E= 6.6X10-34X3X108/1.635X10-18=12.11X10-8m= 1211A. This belongs to the uv range
s
and hence the llyman series.

er
E=2.18X10-18X(1-1/n2)=2.18X10-18X12/16
1-1/n2= 12/16=3/4
ev
1/n2=1/4
Hence n=2. The transition 21 in the Hydrogen spectrum corresponds to the given
energy transition.
hi
3..Questions based on Dual behaviour of matter (de Broglie’s relation), Heisenberg

Ac
uncertainty principle.
1. Explain Dual behaviour of matter.
2. State de Broglie‘s relation. Give its mathematical expression.
3. What will be the wavelength of a ball of mass 0.1 kg moving with a velocity of 10 m s –1?
4. The mass of an electron is 9.1 X 10 kg. If its K.E. is 3.0 X10 –25 J, calculate its wavelength.
5. Calculate the mass of a photon with wavelength 3.6 Å.

6. The velocity associated with a proton moving in a potential difference of 1000 V is 4.37 × 10 5ms–1. If
the hockey ball of mass 0.1 kg is moving with this velocity,
Calculate the wavelength associated with this velocity.
7. If the velocity of the electron in Bohr‘s first orbit is 2.19 × 106ms–1, calculate the de Broglie
wavelength associated with it.
8. Similar to electron diffraction, neutron diffraction microscope is also used for the determination of
the structure of molecules. If the wavelength used here is 800 pm, calculate the characteristic velocity
associated with the neutron.
9. Dual behaviour of matter proposed by de Broglie led to the discovery of electron microscope often
y
used for the highly magnified images of biological molecules and other type of material. If the velocity
em
of the electron in this microscope is 1.6 × 106ms–1 , calculate de Broglie wavelength associated with this
electron.
10. Calculate the wavelength of an electron moving with a velocity of 2.05 X 107ms–1
ad
11. The mass of an electron is 9.1 X 10–31kg. If its K.E. is 3.0 X 10–25 J, calculate its wavelength.
12. Why de Broglie‘s relation is not associated with ordinary objects.
13. State Heisenberg‘s Uncertainty Principle. Give its mathematical expression.
Ac
14. A microscope using suitable photons is employed to locate an electron in an
atom within a distance of 0.1 Å. What is the uncertainty involved in the measurement of its velocity?
15. If the position of the electron is measured within an accuracy of + 0.002 nm, calculate the
s
uncertainty in the momentum of the electron. Suppose the momentum of the electron is h/4∏ × 0.05
er
nm, is there any problem in defining this value.

16. Show that the circumference of the Bohr orbit for the hydrogen atom is an integral multiple of the de
ev
Broglie wavelength associated with the electron revolving around the orbit.
ANSWER
hi
3. What will be the wavelength of a ball of mass 0.1 kg moving with a velocity of 10 m s –1?
Ans: λ =h/mv= 6.6X10-34/0.1X10= 6.6 X 10-34m
Ac
4. The mass of an electron is 9.1 X 10 kg. If its K.E. is 3.0 X10 –25 J, calculate its wavelength.
Ans: KE= ½ mv2=3X10-25; v2= 6X10-25= 60X10-26=> v=7.746X 10-13m/s
λ =h/mv= 6.6X10-34/9.1X10-31X7.746X 10-13=9.363X10-12m
5. Calculate the mass of a photon with wavelength 3.6 Å.

Ans: v=3X108m/s

λ =h/mv= 6.6X10-34/m X3X108
m=h/v λ = 6.6X10-34/3X108X3.6X10-10= 6.11X10-33kg
6. The velocity associated with a proton moving in a potential difference of 1000 V is 4.37 ×
105ms–1. If the hockey ball of mass 0.1 kg is moving with this velocity,
Calculate the wavelength associated with this velocity.
λ =h/mv= 6.6X10-34/0.1X4.37X105= 1.51X10-38m
7. If the velocity of the electron in Bohr‘s first orbit is 2.19 × 106ms–1, calculate the de Broglie
wavelength associated with it.
y
λ =h/mv= 6.6X10-34/9.1X10-31X2.19X106= 3.3X10-10m
em
8. Similar to electron diffraction, neutron diffraction microscope is also used for the determination
of the structure of molecules. If the wavelength used here is 800 pm, calculate the characteristic
ad
velocity associated with the neutron.
λ =h/mv= 6.6X10-34/6.67X10-27kgXv = 8X10-10
v=6.6X10-34/6.67X10-27kgX8X10-10=125m/s
Ac
9. Dual behavior of matter proposed by de Broglie led to the discovery of electron microscope
often used for the highly magnified images of biological molecules and other type of material. If
s
the velocity of the electron in this microscope is 1.6 × 106ms–1, calculate de Broglie wavelength
er
associated with this electron.

λ =h/mv= 6.6X10-34/9.1X10-31X1.6X106= 4.5X10-10m
ev
10. Calculate the wavelength of an electron moving with a velocity of 2.05 X 107ms–1
λ =h/mv= 6.6X10-34/9.1X10-31X 2.05X107=3.538 X10-10m
hi
14. A microscope using suitable photons is employed to locate an electron in an atom within a distance
Ac
of 0.1 Å. What is the uncertainty involved in the measurement of its velocity?

h
x.P 
4
Δx.mΔv=h/4π
Δv=h/4πmΔx =6.6X10-34/4X3.14X9.1X10-31X10-11=5.77X10-6m/s

15. If the position of the electron is measured within an accuracy of + 0.002 nm, calculate the
uncertainty in the momentum of the electron. Suppose the momentum of the electron is h/4∏ ×
0.05 nm, is there any problem in defining this value.
h
x.P 
4
ΔP=h/4πXΔx
ΔP=6.6X10-34/4X3.14X0.002X10-9
ΔP=2.69X 10-22kgm/s
y
em
4.QUESTIONS BASED ON QUANTUM NUMBERS, AUFBAU RULE, PAULI RULE,
HUNDS RULE, ELECTRONIC CONFIGURATION OF ATOMS & IONS.

1. What information is provided by the four quantum numbers?
ad
2. Using s, p, d, f notations, describe the orbital with the following quantum numbers
(a) n = 2, l = 1, (b) n = 4, l = 0, (c) n = 5, l = 3, (d) n = 3, l = 2 (e) n=1, l=0 (f) n = 3 l=1 (g) n = 4;
Ac
l =2 (h) n= 4; l=3.
3. What is the total number of orbitals associated with the principal quantum number n = 3?
4. What is the lowest value of n that allows g orbitals to exist?
5. An electron is in one of the 3d orbitals. Give the possible values of n, l and ml for this electron.
s
6. (i) An atomic orbital has n = 3. What are the possible values of l and ml?
er
(ii) List the quantum numbers (ml and l ) of electrons for 3d orbital.
(iii) Which of the following orbitals are possible? 1p, 2s, 2p, 2d, 4f ,6d and 3f.
ev
7. Explain, giving reasons, which of the following sets of quantum numbers are not possible.(a) n = 0, l
= 0, ml = 0, ms = + ½ (b) n = 1, l = 0, ml = 0, m s = – ½ (c) n = 1, l = 1, ml = 0, ms = + ½ (d) n = 2, l = 1,
ml = 0, ms = – ½ (e) n = 3, l = 3, ml = –3, ms = + ½ (f) n = 3, l = 1, ml = 0, ms = + ½
hi
8. (i)How many electrons in an atom may have the following quantum numbers?
(a) n = 4, m s = – ½ (b) n = 3, l = 0
Ac
(ii) How many sub-shells are associated with n = 4?

(iii) How many electrons will be present in the sub-shells having m s value of –1/2 for n = 4?
9. State (n+l) rule Aufbau rule & Pauli rule.
10. Give the electronic configuration of first 30 elements.
11. Explain the exceptional configuration of copper and chromium.
12. Give the electronic configurations of the following ions: Cu2+ Cr3+ Fe2+ S2- Fe2+ O2- Na+

13. Explain Hunds rule of maximum multiplicity with an example.
14. Indicate the number of unpaired electrons in : (a) P, (b) Si, (c) Cr, (d) Fe and (e) Kr.
15. The quantum numbers of six electrons are given below. Arrange them in order ofincreasing
energies. If any of these combination(s) has/have the same energy lists:
(1). n = 4, l = 2, ml = –2, ms = –1/2 (2). n = 3, l = 2, ml = 1, ms = +1/2
(3.) n = 4, l = 1, ml = 0 , ms = +1/2 (4.) n = 3, l = 2, ml = –2 , ms = –1/2
(5). n = 3, l = 1, ml = –1, ms = +1/2 (6). n = 4, l = 1, ml = 0, ms = +1/2
16. (i) Write the electronic configurations of the following ions: (a) H–(b) Na+(c) O2–(d) F–
(ii) What are the atomic numbers of elements whose outermost electrons are represented by (a) 3s1 (b)
y
2p3 and (c) 3p5?
em
(iii) Which atoms are indicated by the following configurations? (a) [He] 2s1(b) [Ne] 3s23p3(c)[Ar]
4s23d1
17. An atom of an element contains 29 electrons and 35 neutrons. Deduce (i) the number of protons and
ad
(ii) the electronic configuration of the element.
18. Among the following pairs of orbitals which orbital will experience the larger effective nuclear
charge? (i) 2s and 3s, (ii) 4d and 4f, (iii) 3d and 3p.
Ac
19. The unpaired electrons in Al and Si are present in 3p orbital. Which electrons will experience more
effective nuclear charge from the nucleus?
20 The bromine atom possesses 35 electrons. It contains 6 electrons in 2p orbital, 6 electrons in 3p
s
orbital and 5 electrons in 4p orbital. Which of these electron experiences the lowest effective nuclear
er
charge?
21. Draw the shapes of s,p,d & f orbitals.
ev
hi
Ac

3.Classification of elements and periodicity in properties

1. Dobereiner's Triads:In 1817 a German chemist Doberneiner identified certain groups of three
elements. These groups of three elements having similar properties was called triads. When three
elements were arranged in order of their increasing atomic masses, the atomic mass of the middle
y
element was roughly the mean of the atomic masses of the other two element
em
2. New Lands Law of octaves:When elements were arranged in order of their increasing relative
atomic masses. The properties of every eight elements were similar to the first one, like the
eighth note of a musical scale.This repetition in the properties of elements is just like the
ad
repetition of eighth node in an octave of music.
3. Mendeleev's Periodic Law:The physical and chemical properties of elements are the periodic
Ac
function of their atomic masses.
4. Mendeleev's Periodic Table:When mendeleev started his work, 63 elements were known at that
time. He selected hydrogen and oxygen as they are very reactive and formed compounds with
most elements. Mendeleev's periodic table contains vertical columns called groups and
s
horizontal rows called periods. There were 7 periods and 8 groups. Noble gases were not known
er
at that time. So there was no group of noble gases.The elements in each group of the periodic
tables are similar to one another in many properties. The similar properties of the elements are
ev
repeated periodically
(a).Merits of mendeleev's classification
hi
 Mendeleev's periodic law predicted the existence of some elements that had not been
discovered at that time
Ac
 .Could predict the properties of several elements on the basis of their position in the
periodic table.
 Could accommodate noble gases when they were discovered.
(b)Limitations of mendeleev's classification :-
 The correct position could not be assigned to the hydrogen in the periodic table.
 Wrong order of the atomic masses of some elements could not be explained.

 The position of isotopes could not be explained.
 Uncertainty in prediction of new elements was there.
5. Modern periodic law: Properties of elements are the periodic function of their atomic number.
6. Modern Periodic Table: This table was prepared was Bohr and is based upon the electronic
configuration of elements. The table consists of 18 vertical columns called groups Elements
having similar outer electronic configurations in their atoms are arranged in vertical columns,
referred to as groups . According to the recommendation of International Union of Pure and
y
Applied Chemistry (IUPAC), the groups are numbered from 1 to 18 and the table consists of 7
em
horizontal rows called periods. The first period contains 2 elements. The subsequent periods
consists of 8, 8, 18, 18 and 32 elements, respectively. The seventh period is incomplete and like
the sixth period would have a theoretical maximum (on the basis of quantum numbers) of 32
elements. In this form of the Periodic Table, 14 elements of both sixth and seventh periods
ad
(lanthanoids and actinoids, respectively) are placed in separate panels at the bottom
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

7. .Notation for IUPAC Nomenclature of Elements With Z > 100
y
em
8. We can classify the elements into four blocks viz., s-block, p-block, d-block and f-block
depending on the type of atomic orbital that are being filled with electrons.
ad
9. s-Block Elements :The elements of Group 1 (alkali metals) and Group 2 (alkaline earth metals)
which have ns1and ns2 outermost electronic configuration belong to the s-Block Elements.
Ac
10. p-Block Elements The p-Block Elements comprise those belonging to Group 13 to 18 and these
together with the s-Block Elements are called the Representative Elements or Main Group
Elements. The outermost electronic configuration varies from ns2np1 to ns2np6 in each period.
11. d-Block Elements These are the elements of Group 3 to 12 in the centre of the Periodic Table.
s
These are characterised by the filling of inner d orbitals by electrons and are therefore referred to
er
as d-Block Elements. These elements have the general outer electronic configuration (n-1)d1-
10
ns0-2 .
ev
12. f-Block Elements The two rows of elements at the bottom of the Periodic Table, called the
Lanthanoids, Ce(Z = 58) – Lu(Z = 71) and Actinoids, Th(Z = 90) – Lr (Z = 103) are
hi
characterised by the outer electronic configuration (n-2)f1-14 (n-1)d0–1ns2. The last electron added
to each element is filled in f- orbital. These two series of elements are hence called the Inner-
Ac
Transition Elements (f-Block Elements).

13. Variation in Atomic Radius in Period: The atomic size generally decreases across a period It is
because within the period the outer electrons are in the same valence shell and the effective
nuclear charge increases as the atomic number increases resulting in the increased attraction of
electrons to the nucleus.

Li Be B C N O F Ne
14. Variation in Atomic Radius in Group: Within a family or vertical column of the periodic table,
the atomic radius increases regularly with atomic number as). as we descend the groups, the
principal quantum number (n) increases and the valence electrons are farther from the nucleus.
This happens because the inner energy levels are filled with electrons, which serve to shield the
outer electrons from the pull of the nucleus. Consequently the size of the atom increases as
reflected in the atomic radii.
y
15. The atomic radii of noble gases are not considered here. Being monatomic, their (non-bonded
em
radii) values are very large. In fact radii of noble gases should be compared not with the covalent
radii but with the van der Waals radii of other elements.
16. A cation is smaller than its parent atom because it has fewer electrons while its nuclear charge
ad
remains the same. The size of an anion will be larger than that of the parent atom because
the addition of one or more electrons would result in increased repulsion among the electrons
and a decrease in effective nuclear charge. For example, the ionic radius of fluoride ion (F– ) is
Ac
136 pm whereas the atomic radius of fluorine is only 64 pm. On the other hand, the atomic radius
of sodium is 186 pm compared to the ionic radius of 95 pm for Na+.
17. Isoelectronic species :Atoms and ions which contain the same number of electrons.. For
s
example, O2–, F–, Na+ and Mg2+ have the same number ofelectrons (10). Their radii would be
er
different because of their different nuclear charges. The cation with the greater positive charge
will have a smaller radius because of the greater attraction of the electrons to the nucleus. Anion
ev
with the greater negative charge will have the larger radius. In this case, the net repulsion of the
electrons will outweigh the nuclear charge and the ion will expand in size.
hi
18. Ionization Enthalpy: It represents the energy required to remove an electron from an isolated
gaseous atom (X) in its ground state. In other words, the first ionization enthalpy for an element
Ac
X is the enthalpy change (ΔiH) for the reaction depicted in equation. X (g) X+(g) + e– . The
ionization enthalpy is expressed in units of kJ mol–1. We can define the second ionization
enthalpy as the energy required to remove the second most loosely bound electron; it is the
energy required to carry out the reaction shown in equation X+(g)X2+(g) + e– . Energy is
always required to remove electrons from an atom and hence ionization enthalpies are always
positive. The second ionization enthalpy will be higher than the first ionization enthalpy because
it is more difficult to remove an electron from a positively charged ion than from a neutral atom.

In the same way the third ionization enthalpy will be higher than the second and so on. The term
―ionization enthalpy‖, if not qualified, is taken as the first ionization enthalpy.
19. Variation in Ionization Enthalpy in Group: As we descend in a group the first ionization
enthalpy generally decreases .Because as we go down a group, the outermost electron being
increasingly farther from the nucleus, there is an increased shielding of the nuclear charge by the
electrons in the inner levels. In this case, increase in shielding outweighs the increasing nuclear
charge and the removal of the outermost electron requires less energy down a group.
20. Variation in Ionization Enthalpy in Period: The first ionization enthalpy generally increases as
y
we go across a period. When we move from left to right in period, successive electrons are added
to orbitals in the same principal quantum level and the shielding of the nuclear charge by the
em
inner core of electrons does not increase very much to compensate for the increased attraction of
the electron to the nucleus. Thus, across a period, increasing nuclear charge outweighs the
shielding. Consequently, the outermost electrons are held more and more tightly and the
ad
ionization enthalpy increases across a period
Ac
s
er
ev
21. Electron Gain Enthalpy: When an electron is added to a neutral gaseous atom (X) to convert it
hi
into a negative ion, the enthalpy change accompanying the process is defined as the Electron
Gain Enthalpy (ΔegH). Electron gain enthalpy provides a measure of the ease with which an atom
Ac
adds an electron to form anion as represented by equation. X(g) + e–  X–(g) . Depending on the
element, the process of adding an electron to the atom can be either endothermic or exothermic.
For many elements energy is released when an electron is added to the atom and the electron
gain enthalpy is negative. For example, group 17 elements (the halogens) have very high
negative electron gain enthalpies because they can attain stable noble gas electronic
configurations by picking up an electron. On the other hand, noble gases have large positive

electron gain enthalpies because the electron has to enter the next higher principal quantum level
leading to a very unstable electronic configuration.
22. Variation in electron gain enthalpies in Group & period: The variation in electron gain
enthalpies of elements is less systematic than for ionization enthalpies. As a general rule,
electron gain enthalpy becomes more negative with increase in the atomic number across a
period. The effective nuclear charge increases from left to right across a period and consequently
it will be easier to add an electron to a smaller atom since the added electron on an average
would be closer to the positively charged nucleus. We should also expect electron gain enthalpy
y
to become less negative as we go down a group because the size of the atom increases and the
added electron would be farther from the nucleus. This is generally the case. However, electron
em
gain enthalpy of O or F is less negative than that of the succeeding element. This is because
when an electron is added to O or F, the added electron goes to the smaller n = 2 quantum level
and suffers significant repulsion from the other electrons present in this level. For the n = 3
ad
quantum level (S or Cl), the added electron occupies a larger region of space and the electron-
electron repulsion is much less.
Ac
23. Electronegativity: A qualitative measure of the ability of an atom in a chemical compound to
attract shared electrons to itself is called electro negativity Linus Pauling, an American scientist,
in 1922 assigned arbitrarily a value of 4.0 to fluorine, the element considered to have the greatest
ability to attract electrons. Electronegativity generally increases across a period from left to right
s
(say from lithium to fluorine) and decrease down a group (say from fluorine to astatine) in the
er
periodic table.
24. Anomalous Properties of Second Period Elements: The first element of each of the groups 1
ev
(lithium) and 2 (beryllium) and groups 13-17 (boron to fluorine) differs in many respects from
the other members of their respective group. For example, lithium unlike other alkali metals, and
beryllium unlike other alkaline earth metals, form compounds with pronounced covalent
hi
character; the other members of these groups predominantly form ionic compounds. In fact the
Ac
behaviour of lithium and beryllium is more similar with the second element of the Group 1, 2
,13, 14, 15, 16 ,17. following group i.e., magnesium and aluminum, respectively. This sort of
similarity is commonly referred to as diagonal relationship in the periodic properties. The
anomalous behaviour is attributed to their small size, large charge/ radius ratio and high
electronegativity of the elements. In addition, the first member of group has only four valence
orbitals (2s and 2p) available for bonding, whereas the second member of the groups have nine
valence orbitals (3s, 3p, 3d). As a consequence of this, the maximum covalency of the first

member of each group is 4 (e.g., boron can only form[BF4]- , whereas the other members of the
groups can expand their valence shell to accommodate more than four pairs of electrons e.g.,
aluminum forms [AlF6]3- ). Furthermore, the first member of p-block elements displays greater
ability to form p∏ – p∏ multiple bonds to itself (e.g., C = C, C  C, N = N, N  N) and to other
second period elements (e.g., C = O, C = N, C  N, N = O) compared to subsequent members of
the same group.
y
Unit-3
em
CLASSIFICATION OF ELEMENTS AND PERIODICITY IN PROPERTIES
ad
1. Questions based on Modern Periodic Table
1. Which important property did Mendeleev use to classify the elements in his periodic table and did he
stick to that?
Ac
2. What is the basic difference in approach between the Mendeleev‘s Periodic Law
and the Modern Periodic Law?
$3. What would be the IUPAC name and symbol for the elements with atomic number 101 to 120?
s
4. Write a detailed note on the present form of the periodic Table (Modern Periodic Table.) Draw
er
colourful Periodic Table.

5. (a) How is group, period and block of elements predicted.
ev
(b) Give the electronic configuration and in terms of period group and block where would you locate
the elements with Z= 17, 19. 24, 26, 29, 31,34,38, 40, 51,55,114 ,117 and 120 ?
6. How would you justify the presence of 18 elements in the 5th period of the Periodic Table?
hi
7. On the basis of quantum numbers, justify that the sixth period of the periodic table should have 32
elements.
Ac
8. .Write the general outer electronic configuration s, p, d, & f block elements.

9. Give five properties each of s, p, d, & f block elements.
10. Why do elements in the same group have similar physical and chemical properties?
2. Questions based on Atomic Radius & Ionic Radius
1. How is atomic radius expressed in terms of different types of radius?
2. How does the atomic radius vary in a period and in a group? How do you explain the variation?

3. Why atomic radius of noble gases are not considered in comparison.
4. Explain why cations are smaller and anions larger in radii than their parent atom? Or
Describe the theory associated with the radius of an atom as it (a) gains an electron
(b) Loses an electron
$5. What do you understand by isoelectronic species? Name a species that will be isoelectronic with
each of the following atoms or ions.(i)F- (ii)Ar (iii)Mg+2 (iv)Rb+
$$6. Consider the following species: N3-, O2-, Na+,Mg+2, and Al+3
(a)What is common in them? (b)Arrange them in the order of increasing ionic radii.
7.Arrange the following in order of increasing radii: (a)N,O,P (b)F,Cl,Br (c)I-,I,I+
y
$8. Which of the following species will have the largest and the smallest size Mg, Mg2+, Al, Al3+.
em
9.A student reported the radii of Cu,Cu+ and Cu+2 as 96,122 & 72 ppm respectively do you agree with
results.
3.Questions based on Ionization Enthalpy its Variation and factors affecting it.
ad
$1. (a)Define Ionization enthalpy. Give its unit.
(b)Explain the term successive ionization energies.
$2. How does the Ionization vary in a period and in a group? How do you explain the variation?
Ac
$3. Among the second period elements the actual ionization enthalpies are in the order
Li<B<Be<C<O<N<F<Ne
Explain why (i) Be has higher ionization enthalpy than B.
s
(ii)O has lower ionization enthalpy than N and F?

er
$4. How would you explain the fact the first ionization enthalpy of sodium is lower than that of
Magnesium but its second ionization enthalpy is higher than that of Magnesium?
ev
5. What are the various factors due to which the ionization enthalpy of the main group elements tends to
decrease down a group?
6. .The first ionization enthalpy values (in KJ mol-1) of group 13 are:
hi
B Al Ga In Tl
Ac
801 577 579 558 589

How would you explain this deviation from the general trend?
7. (a)Arrange C,N,O and F in the decreasing order of their second ionization enthalpy and explain
briefly.
(b)Explain why the first ionization enthalpy of Carbon is more than that of Boron but the reverse is true
for second ionization enthalpy

8. Would you expect the first ionization enthalpy for two isotopes of the same element to be same or
different? Justify your answer.
4.Questions based on electron gain enthalpy its Variation and factors affecting it
$1. Define the term electron gain enthalpy.
$2. How does the electron gain enthalpy in a period and in a group? How do you explain the variation?
$3. Would you expect the second electron gain enthalpy of O as positive, more negative or less negative
than the first? Justify your answer?
$4. Which of the following pairs of elements would have a more negative electron gain enthalpy? (i) O
y
or F (ii)F or Cl (iii) O or S.Give reason to support your answer
5. Which of the following will have the most negative electron gain enthalpy and which the least
em
negative? P, S, Cl, F.Explain your answer.
6. In each of the following sets, arrange the elements in the increasing order of their negative electron
gain enthalpies: (i)C,N,O (ii)O,N,S (iii) Cl,S,Ar (iv)F,Cl,Br
ad
5.Miscellenous Questions
1. Which element do you think would have been named by
Ac
(i) Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (ii) Seaborg‘s group?
2. What is the significance of the terms — ‗isolated gaseous atom‘ and ‗ground state‘ while defining the
ionization enthalpy and electron gain enthalpy?
3. Energy of an electron in the ground state of the hydrogen atom is –2.18 × 10 –18J. Calculate the
s
ionization enthalpy of atomic hydrogen in terms of J mol–1.

er
4. What is the difference between the terms electron gain enthalpy and electronegativity?
5. How would you react to the statement that the electronegativity of N on Pauling scale is 3.0 in all the
ev
nitrogen compounds?
6. Use the periodic table to answer the following questions.
(a) Identify an element with five electrons in the outer subshell. (b) Identify an element that would tend
hi
to lose two electrons.(c) Identify an element that would tend to gain two electrons. (d) Identify the group
Ac
having metal, non-metal, liquid as well as gas at the room temperature.

7. The increasing order of reactivity among group 1 elements is Li < Na < K < Rb <Cs whereas that
among group 17 elements is F > CI > Br > I. Explain.
8. Assign the position of the element having outer electronic configuration (i) ns2np4 for n=3(ii)(n-1)d2
ns2 (iii)(n-2)f7 (n-1)d1ns2 for n=6 in the periodic table.
9. Predict the formulas of the stable binary compounds that would be formed by the combination of the
following pairs of elements.

(a) Lithium and oxygen (b) Magnesium and nitrogen (c) Aluminum and iodine (d) Silicon and oxygen
(e) Phosphorus and fluorine (f) Element 71 and fluorine (g) silicon and bromine (h) aluminum and
sulphur.
10. Considering the elements B, Al, Mg, and K, the correct order of their metallic character is 11.
Considering the elements B, C, N, F, and Si, the correct order of their non-metallic character is:
12. Considering the elements F, Cl, O and N, the correct order of their chemical reactivity in terms of
oxidizing property is:
13. Show by a chemical reaction with water that Na2O is a basic oxide and Cl2O7 is an acidic oxide.
14. Considering the atomic number and position in the periodic table, arrange the following elements in
y
the increasing order of metallic character : Si, Be, Mg, Na, P.
em
15. The element with atomic number 119 has not been discovered. What would be the IUPAC name and
symbol of this element? Also predict the electronic configuration, group and period of this element.
16. Which element has the highest negative electron gain enthalpy, ionization enthalpy and
ad
eletronegativity? Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

4.Chemical bonding and Molecular Structure

1. Lewis dot structures are shorthand to represent the valence electrons of an atom. The structures
are written as the element symbol surrounded by dots that represent the valence electrons.
y
2. Covalent Bonds- The bond formed between two atoms by mutual sharing of electrons between
em
them so as to complete their octets or duplets. When two atoms share one electron pair they are
said to be joined by a single covalent bond.e.g H2 If two atoms share two electron pairs of
electrons, the covalent bond between them is called a double bond. e.g O2 If two atoms share
three electron pairs of electrons, the covalent bond between them is called a double bond. e.g N2
ad
3. Octet Rule- Kossel and Lewis in 1916 developed an important theory of chemical combination
between atoms known as electronic theory of chemical bonding. According to this, atoms can
Ac
combine either by transfer of valence electrons from one atom to another or by sharing of
valence electrons in order to attain their octet. This is known as octet rule.
4. Limitations of octet rule-
a) Incomplete octet of the central atom: In some compounds the number of electrons surrounding
s
the central atom is less than eight. This is especially the case with elements having less than four
er
valence electrons. Examples- LiCl ,BeCl2 , BCl3

b) Odd-electron molecules: In molecules with an odd number of electrons like nitric oxide, NO and
ev
nitrogen dioxide, the octet rule is not satisfied for all the atoms.
c) The expanded octet : Elements in and beyond the third period of the periodic table have, apart
hi
from 3s and 3p orbitals, 3d orbitals also available for bonding. In a number of compounds of
these elements there are more than eight valence electrons around the central atom. This is
Ac
termed as the expanded octet. Some of examples of such compounds are: PF5, SF6.
d) This theory does not account for the shape of molecules.
5. Electrovalent bond or Ionic Bond: The chemical bond as result of transfer of electron from one
atom(electropositive) to another atom (electronegative).Ionic bonds will be formed more easily
between elements with comparatively low ionization enthalpies and elements with comparatively

high negative value of electron gain enthalpy. Most ionic compounds have cations derived from
metallic elements and anions from non-metallic elements.
6. Formation of Ionic Bond
7. Bond length is defined as the equilibrium distance between the nuclei of two bonded atoms in a
y
molecule.
em
8. Bond Angle:It is defined as the angle between the orbital containing bonding electron pairs
around the central atom in a molecule/complex ion. It gives some idea regarding the distribution
of orbital around the central atom in a molecule/complex ion and hence it helps us in determining
its shape
ad
9. Bond enthalpy: It is defined as the amount of energy required to break one mole of bonds of a
particular type between two atoms in a gaseous state. The unit of bond enthalpy is kJ mol–1
Ac
10. Bond Order : The Bond Order is given by the number of bonds between the two atoms in a
molecule. E.g.: Bond Order of O2= 2. With increase in bond order, bond enthalpy increases and
bond length decreases.
11. Resonance: According to the concept of resonance, whenever a single Lewis structure cannot
s
describe a molecule accurately, a number of structures with similar energy, positions of nuclei,
er
bonding and the non- bonding pairs of electrons are taken as the canonical structures of the
hybrid which describes the molecule accurately
ev
12. Polarity of bonds: In case of heteronuclear molecules like HCl, the shared pair of electron
between the two atoms gets displaced more towards chlorine since the electronegativity of
chlorine is far greater than that of hydrogen. The resultant covalent bond is called a polar
hi
covalent bond.
Ac
13. Dipole moment: As a result of polarization, the molecule possesses the dipole moment which
can be defined as the product of charge and the distance between the centers of positive and
negative charge. It is usually designated by a Greek letter ‗µ‘. Mathematically, it is expressed as
follows:
Dipole moment (µ ) = charge (Q) X distance of separation (r)
14. VSEPR Theory

 The shape of a molecule depends upon the number of valence shell electron pairs (bonded
or nonbonded) around the central atom.
 Pairs of electrons in the valence shell repel one another since their electron clouds are
negatively charged.
 These pairs of electrons tend to occupy such positions in space that minimize repulsion
and thus maximise distance between them.
 The valence shell is taken as a sphere with the electron pairs localising on the spherical
surface at maximum distance from one another.
 A multiple bond is treated as if it is a single electron pair and the two or three electron
y
pairs of a multiple bond are treated as a single super pair.
em
 Where two or more resonance structures can represent a molecule, the VSEPR model is
applicable to any such structure.
 The repulsive interaction of electron pairs decrease in the order: Lone pair (lp) – Lone
ad
pair (lp) > Lone pair (lp) – Bond pair (bp) > Bond pair (bp) –Bond pair (bp)
 Geometry of Molecules on the basis of VSEPR Theory
Ac
Bond pair Lone Shape Examples
pair
2 0 Linear BeCl2
3 0 Trigonal Planar BCl3
s
2 1 Bent SO2
er
4 0 Tetrahedral CH4
3 1 Pyramidal NH3, ,PH3,
ev
2 2 V-shape H2O
5 0 Trigonal bipyramidal PCl5
hi
4 1 See saw SF4

3 2 T-shaped CIF3,
Ac
2 3 Linear XeF2
5 1 Square pyramidal CIF5, IF5
4 2 Square planar XeF4,
6 1 Distorted Octahedral XeF6

15. Hybridization: It can be defined as the process of intermixing of the orbitals of slightly different
energies so as to redistribute their energies, resulting in the formations of new set of orbitals of
equivalent energies and shape.
 Salient Features of hybridization :
 The number of hybrid orbitals is equal to the number of the atomic orbitals that get hybridised.
 The hybridised orbitals are always equivalent in energy and shape.
 The hybrid orbitals are more effective in forming stable bonds than the pure atomic orbitals.
 These hybrid orbitals are directed in space in some preferred direction to have minimum
y
repulsion between electron pairs and thus a stable arrangement.
16. Types of Hybridisation
em
 sp hybridisation- This type of hybridisation involves the mixing of one s and one p orbital
resulting in the formation of two equivalent sp hybrid orbitals.e.g.BeCl2
 sp2 hybridisation- In this hybridisation there is involvement of one s and two p-orbitals in
ad
order to form there equivalent sp2 hybridised orbitals. e.g.BCl3
 sp3 hybridisation- When there is mixing of one s and three p-orbitals of the valence shell to
form four sp3 hybrid orbitals of equivalent energies and shape. e.g.CH4
Ac
17. Molecular orbital. It gives electron probability distribution around a group of nuclei in a
molecule. They are filled in the same way as atomic orbitals. Molecular orbitals are formed by
s
linear combination of atomic orbitals.

er
18. Bonding molecular orbital. A molecular orbital that is formed by addition overlap (i.e., when
ev
the lobes of atomic orbitals overlap with the same sign) of two atomic orbitals is known as
bonding molecular orbital. It is represented as
MO   A  B Its energy is lower than the atomic orbitals from which it is formed. It
hi
favours bonding.
Ac
19. Anti-bonding molecular orbital. A molecular orbital that is obtained by the subtraction overlap
(i.e., when the lobes of atomic orbitals overlap with the opposite sign) of two atomic orbitals is
know as anti-bonding molecular orbital. It is represented as
 * MO   A  B Its energy is higher than the atomic orbitals from which it is formed. It
does not favour bonding.

20. Bond order. It is defined as half of the difference between number of electrons in bonding and
anti-bonding orbitals, i.e., B.O. = ½ (Nb – Na) ‗where Nb are number of electrons in bonding
orbitals‘ and Na are number of electrons in anti-bonding orbitals. Bond order helps in estimating
stability of atom.
21. Relationship between electronic configuration and molecular behaviour :
(a) If Nb is greater than Na, the molecule is stable.
(b) The molecule is unstable if Na is greater than Nb.
(c) The molecule is also unstable if Na is equal to Nb because anti-bonding effect is stronger than
bonding effect.
y
em
22. Sigma (  ) molecular orbitals. A molecular orbital which is formed from the overlap of two s
atomic orbitlas or head to head overlap of one s and p-atomic orbitals or head to head overlap of
two p-atomic orbitals, is known as sigma molecular orbital.
ad
23. pi (  ) molecular orbitals. A molecular orbital which is formed by lateral overlap of two
parallel p-orbitals is known as pi(  ) molecular orbital.
Ac
24. Conditions for the Combination of Atomic Orbitals. The linear combination of atomic
orbitals takes place only if the following conditions are satisfied :
s
(i) The combining atomic orbitals must have same or nearly same energy.
er
(ii) The combining atomic orbitals must have the same symmetry about the molecular axis. By
convention, z-axis is taken as the molecular axis.
ev
(iii) The combining atomic orbitals must overlap to the maximum extent. Greater the extent of
overlapping, the greater will be electron density between the nuclei of a molecular orbital.
hi
25. Energy level Diagrams for Molecular Orbitals. The increasing order of energies of various
molecular orbitals for O2 and F2 is given below.
Ac
* * * * *
 1s   1s   2s   2s   2 p z   2 p x   2 p y   2 p x   2 p y   2 p z
However, this sequence of energy levels of molecular orbitals is not correct for
remaining molecules Li2, Be2, B2, C2, N2. For instance, it has been observed
experimentally that for molecules such as B2, C2, N2 etc., the increasing order
of energies of various molecular orbitals is

* * * * *
 1s   1s   2s   2s   2 p x   2 p y   2 p z   2 p x   2 p y   2 p z
The important characteristic feature of this order is that the energy of  2 p z

molecular orbital is higher than that of  2 p x and  2 p y molecular orbitals in
these molecules.
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

Unit-4
CHEMICAL BONDING &MOLECULAR STRUCTURE
1. Questions based on Lewis dot symbols & structures, Covalent Bond,
Formal Charge, Electrovalent Bond & octet rule

1.Write Lewis dot symbols for atoms of the following elements : Mg, Na, B, O, N,
y
Br.Cl,F,Li,Al,Be,P,As,S,Xe, H
em
2. Write Lewis symbols for the following atoms and ions: S2–,Al3+ and H–
3. Define Covalent Bond. Explain its types with examples.
4.Draw the Lewis structures for the following molecules&ions: H2S, SiCl4,
ad
BeF2,CO23−,BeCl2,BCl3,SiCl4,AsF5,H2S,PH3,PCl5,SF6,NH3,SF4,ClF3,BrF5,XeF4,NO3-
5. Explain some compounds which are exceptions to Octet rule.
6. What is Formal Charge? Calculate the formal charge on all elements of O3 & CO32−.
Ac
7. Define Electrovalent Bond or Ionic Bond. Write the favorable factors for the
formation of ionic bond.
8. Use Lewis symbols to show electron transfer between the following atoms to form
s
Cations and anions: (a) K and S (b) Ca and O (c) Al and N (d)Al and O
er
9. (a) Define octet rule. Write its significance and limitations.(b)What is Coordinate
Bond or Dative Bond.
ev
2. Questions based on VSEPR theory, Resonance, Dipole moment,
Valence Bond Theory., hybridization of atomic orbitals

hi
10.(a)Give the main points of VSEPR theory

(b) Discuss the shape using the VSEPR model: H2S, SiCl4, BeF2, CO23− , BeCl2, BCl3,
Ac
SiCl4, AsF5, H2S, PH3,PCl5,SF6,NH3,SF4,ClF3,BrF5,XeF4,NO3-

11. Although geometries of NH3 and H2O molecules are distorted tetrahedral, bond
angle in water is less than that of ammonia. Discuss.
12. Define Resonance. Explain the structure of CO32– ion in terms of resonance.
13. Write the resonance structures for SO3, NO2 and NO3- , CO2

14. Explain the Dipole moment. How it is helpful in predicting polar & Non polar
nature of compounds.
15. Explain why BeH2 molecule has zero dipole moment although the B-H bonds are
polar.
16. Which out of NH3 and NF3 has dipole moment and why?
17. Arrange the bonds in order of increasing ionic character in the molecules: LiF,
K2O, N2, SO2 and ClF3.
18. Explain the formation of Hydrogen molecule on basis of Valence Bond Theory.
y
19. (a) Distinguish between a sigma (  ) and a pi (  ) bond
em
(b)What is the total number of sigma and pi bonds in the following molecules?
(a) C2H2 (b) C2H4.
20. What is meant by hybridization of atomic orbitals?
ad
21. Describe sp,sp2, sp3 hybrid orbitals using suitable examples.
22. Describe the change in hybridization (if any) of the Al atom in the following
reaction: AlCl3 + Cl-  AlCl4-
Ac
23. Is there any change in the hybridization of B and N atoms as a result of the
following reaction: BF3 + NH3  F3B.NH3
24. Predict the hybrid state of central atom in the following compounds: H2S, SiCl4,
s
BeF2, CO23− , BeCl2, BCl3, SiCl4, AsF5, H2S, PH3,PCl5,SF6,NH3,SF4,ClF3,BrF5,XeF4.

er
25. Explain the concept of hybridization in PCl5 .Why are axial bonds longer as
compared to equatorial bonds in PCl5.
ev
26. Which hybrid orbitals are used by carbon atoms in the following molecules?
(a) CH3-CH3 (b) CH3-CH=CH2 (c) CH3-CH2-OH (d)CH3-CHO (e) CH3-COOH
(f) H2C=CH-CH2-CΞCH
hi
3. Questions based on Atomic orbitals , Molecular orbital configuration
and energy diagram, Bond order & Hydrogen bond

Ac
27. Write the conditions for the combination of atomic orbitals.

28. Distinguish between bonding molecular orbital & anti bonding molecular orbital.
29.Write the molecular orbital configuration and energy diagram for(i)O2+, O2, O2-,
O22- (ii)N2,N2+,N2- (iii) Be2, H2, C2
30. Draw the energy diagram for H2, Be2, N2,&O2.
31. a) What is meant by the term bond order. Write the significance of bond order

(b) Compare the relative Stability of the following species and indicate their magnetic
properties. (i)O2+, O2, O2-, O22- (ii) N2, N2+,N2-
32. Use the molecular orbital theory to explain why Be2 molecule does not exist.
33.(a) Define hydrogen bond .Explain its types with suitable examples.
(b) Is it weaker or stronger than the van der Waals forces?
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

5.States of Matter
y
em
1. Intermolecular forces are the forces of attraction and repulsion between
interacting particles (atoms and molecules). This term does not include the
electrostatic forces that exist between the two oppositely charged ions and the
forces that hold atoms of a molecule together i.e., covalent bonds. Attractive
ad
intermolecular forces are known as van der Waals forces, in honour of Dutch
scientist Johannes van der Waals (1837-1923).
Ac
2. Dipole - Dipole Forces:Dipole-dipole forces act between the molecules
possessing permanent dipole. Ends of the dipoles possess ―partial charges‖ and
these charges are shown by Greek letter delta (δ
s
er
ev
3. Dipole -Induced Dipole Forces: This type of attractive forces operate between
the polar molecules having permanent dipole and the molecules lacking
hi
permanent dipole. Permanent dipole of the polar molecule induces dipole on

Ac
the electrically neutral molecule by deforming its electronic cloud.Thus an

induced dipole is developed in the other molecule
y
.
em
4. Dispersion Forces or London Forces:Atoms and nonpolar molecules are
electrically symmetrical and have no dipole moment because their electronic
charge cloud is symmetrically distributed. But a dipole may develop
ad
momentarily even in such atoms and molecules. This can be understood as
follows. Suppose we have two atoms ‗A‘ and ‗B‘ in the close vicinity of each
other (Fig. 5.1a NCERT page 133). It may so happen that momentarily
Ac
electronic charge distribution in one of the atoms, say ‗A‘, becomes
unsymmetrical i.e., the charge cloud is more on one side than the other (Fig.
5.1 b and c NCERT page 133). This results in the development of
s
instantaneous dipole on the atom ‗A‘ for a very short time. This instantaneous
or transient dipole distorts the electron density of the other atom ‗B‘, which is
er
close to it and as a consequence a dipole is induced in the atom ‗B‘. The

temporary dipoles of atom ‗A‘ and ‗B‘ attract each other. Similarly temporary
ev
dipoles are induced in molecules also. This force of attraction was first
proposed by the German physicist Fritz London, and for this reason force of
hi
attraction between two temporary dipoles is known as London force. Another

name for this force is dispersion force.
Ac
5. Hydrogen bond: Hydrogen bond is represented by a dotted line (– – –) while a

solid line represents the covalent bond. Thus, hydrogen bond can be defined as
the attractive force which binds hydrogen atom of one molecule with the
electronegative atom (F, O or N) of another molecule this is special case of
dipole-dipole interaction..

6. Boyleís Law (Pressure – Volume Relationship): At constant temperature, the

pressure of a fixed amount (i.e., number of moles n) of gas varies inversely
with its volume. This is known as Boyleís law.
1 1
pά (at constant T & V) i.e. p = K1 pV= K1 p1V1=p2V2
V V
p1 p 2

V1 V 2
7. Charles Law (Temperature – Volume Relationship): It states that pressure
y
remaining constant, the volume of a fixed mass of a gas is directly proportional
em
to its absolute temperature.i.e. V ά T (at constant P & V)
V V1 V 2
V =K2T =K2 
T T1 T 2
8. Gay Lussacís Law (Pressure-Temperature Relationship): It states that at
ad
constant volume, pressure of a fixed amount of a gas varies directly with the
temperature. Mathematically, . P ά T (at constant V & n)
Ac
P
p =K3T =K3
T
9. Avogadro Law (Volume – Amount Relationship): It states that equal

s
volumes of all gases under the same conditions of temperature and pressure
er
contain equal number of molecules. i.e. V ά n i.e. V =K4n. Since

volume of a gas is directly proportional to the number of moles; one mole of
ev
each gas at standard temperature and pressure (STP)* will have same volume.
Standard temperature and pressure means 273.15 K (0oC) temperature and 1
bar (i.e., exactly 105 pascal) pressure
hi
10. Ideal gas: A gas that follows Boyle law and

Avogadro law strictly.
Ac
11. Ideal Gas Equation: pV = n RT

12. Universal Gas Constant :R is called gas constant. It is same for all gases. R=
8.314 Pa m3 K–1 mol–1 = 8.314 × 10–2 bar L K–1 mol–1 = 8.314 J K–1 mol–1
P1V 1 P 2V 2
13. Equation of state. =
T1 T2

dRT
14. Density and Molar Mass of a Gaseous Substance:M=
P
15. Daltonís Law of Partial Pressures: It states that the total pressure exerted by
the mixture of non-reactive gases is equal to the sum of the partial pressures of
individual gases i.e., the pressures which these gases would exert if they were
y
enclosed separately in the same volume and under the same conditions of
em
temperature. In a mixture of gases, the pressure exerted by the individual gas is
called partial pressure. Mathematically, pTotal = p1+p2+p3+......(at
constant T, V) where pTotal is the total pressure exerted by the mixture of
ad
gases and p1, p2 , p3 etc. are partial pressures of gases.
16. KINETIC MOLECULAR THEORY OFGASES:
 Gases consist of large number of identical particles (atoms or
Ac
molecules) that are so small and so far apart on the average that the
actual volume of the molecules is negligible in comparison to the empty
space between them. They are considered as point masses. This
s
assumption explains the great compressibility of gases.explains the

er
great compressibility of gases.

 There is no force of attraction between the particles of a
gas at ordinary temperature and pressure. The support for
ev
this assumption comes from the fact that gases expand

and occupy all the space available to them.
hi
 Particles of a gas are always in constant and random motion. If the

particles were at rest and occupied fixed positions, then a gas would
Ac
have had a fixed shape which is not observed.

 Particles of a gas move in all possible directions in straight
lines. During their random motion, they collide with each
other and with the walls of the container. Pressure is
exerted by the gas as a result of collision of the particles
with the walls of the container.

 Collisions of gas molecules are perfectly elastic. This means that total
energy of molecules before and after the collision remains same.
17. Behaviour Of Real Gases: Deviation From Ideal Gas:Real gases show
deviations from ideal gas law (a)Pressure correction: pressure exerted by the
gas is lower than the pressure exerted by the ideal gas.
y
em
(b)Volume Correction: (V–nb) where nb is approximately the total volume
occupied by the molecules themselves. Here, b is a constant.
18. Van der Waals equation.equation.:
ad
Ac
Constants a and b are called van der Waals constants
19. Significance of Vander wall parameter: Vander wall parameter a is the measure
s
of intermolecular forces while b is the measure of effective size of gaseous

er
molecules Unit of a = bar L3 mol-2 Unit of b = L mol-1

20. The deviation from ideal behaviour can be measured in terms of
ev
compressibility factor Z, which is the ratio of product pV and nRT.

pV
Mathematically Z=
nRT
hi
21. The temperature at which a real gas obeys ideal gas law over an appreciable
range of pressure is called Boyle temperature or Boyle point.
Ac
22. Critical temperature (TC)of a gas is highest temperature at which liquifaction

of the gas first occurs. Liquifaction of so called permanent gase Volume of one
mole of the gas at critical temperature is called critical volume (VC) and
pressure at this temperature is called critical pressure (pC). The critical
temperature, pressure and volume are called critical constants.

23. Surface tension is defined as the force acting per unit length perpendicular to
the line drawn on the surface of liquid. It is denoted by Greek letter γ . It has
dimensions of kg s–2 and in SI unit it is expressed as N m–1.
24. Viscosity is a measure of resistance to flow which arises due to the internal
friction between layers of fluid as they slip past one another while liquid flows.
Strong intermolecular forces between molecules hold them together and resist
movement of layers past one another. Greater the viscosity, the more slowly
the liquid flows. Viscosity of liquids decreases as the temperature rises because
y
at high temperature molecules have high kinetic energy and can overcome the
em
intermolecular forces to slip past one another between the layers.
25. Viscosity coefficient is the force when velocity gradient is unity and the area
of contact is unit area. Thus ‗ η ‘ is measure of viscosity. SI unit of viscosity
ad
coefficient is 1 newton second per square metre (N s m–2) = pascal second (Pa s
= 1kg m–1s–1).
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

Unit-5
STATES OF MATTER
1.Questions based on Intermolecular forces ,Boyle’s Law, Charles’s
Law, Gay Lussac’s Law, Avogadro’s Law
y
1. What are Intermolecular forces? Explain its different types with suitable
em
example
2. State Boyle‘s Law. Give its mathematical Expression & graphical
representation.
ad
3. A balloon is filled with hydrogen at room temperature. It will burst if pressure
exceeds 0.2 bar. If at 1 bar pressure the gas occupies 2.27 L volume, up to what
volume can the balloon be expanded?
Ac
4. What will be the minimum pressure required to compress 500 dm3 of air at 1
bar to 200 dm3 at 30°C?
5. A vessel of 120 mL capacity contains a certain amount of gas at 35 °C and 1.2
s
bar pressure. The gas is transferred to another vessel of volume 180 mL at 35

er
°C. What would be its pressure?

6. State Charles‘s Law. Give its mathematical Expression & graphical
representation.
ev
7. On a ship sailing in pacific ocean where temperature is 23.4 °C , a balloon is

filled with 2 L air. What will be the volume of the balloon when the ship
hi
reaches Indian ocean, where temperature is 26.1°C ?

8. A student forgot to add the reaction mixture to the round bottomed flask at 27
Ac
°C but instead he/she placed the flask on the flame. After a lapse of time, he
realized his mistake, and using a pyrometer he found the temperature of the
flask was 477 °C. What fraction of air would have been expelled out?
9. . State Gay Lussac‘s Law. Give its mathematical Expression & graphical
representation.
10. State Avogadro‘s Law. Give its mathematical Expression.

ANSWER
3. A balloon is filled with hydrogen at room temperature. It will burst if pressure

exceeds 0.2 bar. If at 1 bar pressure the gas occupies 2.27 L volume, up to what
volume can the balloon be expanded?
Ans:
P1V1=P2V2
y
1X2.27=0.2 X V2
em
V2=2.27/0.2=11.35L
4. What will be the minimum pressure required to compress 500 dm3 of air at 1
bar to 200 dm3 at 30°C?
ad
Ans: P1V1=P2V2
1X500=P2X200
P2=500/200= 2.5bar
Ac
5. A vessel of 120 mL capacity contains a certain amount of gas at 35 °C and 1.2
bar pressure. The gas is transferred to another vessel of volume 180 mL at 35
°C. What would be its pressure?
s
Ans: P1V1=P2V2
er
1.2 X120 =P2X180

P2=0.8bar
ev
6.
7. On a ship sailing in pacific ocean where temperature is 23.4 °C , a balloon is
hi
filled with 2 L air. What will be the volume of the balloon when the ship
reaches Indian ocean, where temperature is 26.1°C ?
Ac
Ans: V1/T1=V2/T2
2/296.4=V2/299.1
V2=2.018l
8. A student forgot to add the reaction mixture to the round bottomed flask at 27
°C but instead he/she placed the flask on the flame. After a lapse of time, he

realized his mistake, and using a pyrometer he found the temperature of the
flask was 477 °C. What fraction of air would have been expelled out?
Ans: V1/T1=V2/T2
V1/300=V1+x/750
750/300=(V1+x)/x
2.5=(V1/x)+1
1.5=V1/x
x/V1 =0.67
y
x= 0.67V1
em
The amount of air expelled out is 0.67 times the volume of the flask
0.67/1.67= 0.4011fraction of air is expelled.
ad
2. Questions based on Ideal gas equation., combined gas law
equation,Dalton’s Law of Partial Pressures

9. Derive Ideal gas equation. Give combined gas law equation.
Ac
10. Using the Ideal gas equation Show that the density of the gas is proportional to
the gas pressure p.
11. At 25°C and 760 mm of Hg pressure a gas occupies 600 mL volume. What
s
will be its pressure at a height where temperature is 10°C and volume of the
er
gas is
12. At 0°C, the density of a certain oxide of a gas at 2 bar is same as that of
ev
dinitrogen at 5 bar. What is the molecular mass of the oxide?

13. . Pressure of 1 g of an ideal gas A at 27 °C is found to be 2 bar. When 2 g of
another ideal gas B is introduced in the same flask at same temperature the
hi
pressure becomes 3 bar. Find a relationship between their molecular masses.

640 mL.
Ac
14. What will be the pressure exerted by a mixture of 3.2 g of methane and 4.4 g
of carbon dioxide contained in a 9 dm3 flask at 27 °C ?

15. What will be the pressure of the gaseous mixture when 0.5 L of H2 at 0.8 bar
and 2.0 L of dioxygen at 0.7 bar are introduced in a 1L vessel at 27°C?
16. Density of a gas is found to be 5.46 g/dm3 at 27 °C at 2 bar pressure. What
will be its density at STP?
17. . 34.05 mL of phosphorus vapour weighs 0.0625 g at 546 °C and 0.1 bar
pressure. What is the molar mass of phosphorus?
18. Calculate the temperature of 4.0 mol of a gas occupying 5 dm3 at 3.32 bar. (R =
y
0.083 bar dm3 K–1 mol–1).
em
19. Calculate the total pressure in a mixture of 8 g of dioxygen and 4 g of
dihydrogen confined in a vessel of 1 dm3 at 27°C. R = 0.083 bar dm3 K–1 mol–1.
20. Calculate the volume occupied by 8.8 g of CO2 at 31.1°C and 1 bar pressure.
ad
R = 0.083 bar L K–1 mol–1.
21. 2.9 g of a gas at 95 °C occupied the same volume as 0.184 g of dihydrogen at
17 °C, at the same pressure. What is the molar mass of the gas?
Ac
22. A mixture of dihydrogen and dioxygen at one bar pressure contains 20% by
weight of dihydrogen. Calculate the partial pressure of dihydrogen.
23. . State Dalton‘s Law of Partial Pressures. Express partial pressure in terms of
s
mole fraction.
er
ANSWER
11. At 25°C and 760 mm of Hg pressure a gas occupies 600 mL volume. What will
ev
be its pressure at a height where temperature is 10°C and volume of the gas is
640m L
hi
Ans P1V1/T1=P2V2/T2
760X600/298=P2X640/283
Ac
P2=760X600X283/298X640= 676.6 mm of Hg
12. At 0°C, the density of a certain oxide of a gas at 2 bar is same as that of
dinitrogen at 5 bar. What is the molecular mass of the oxide?
Ans: PV=nRT
PV= (m/M)RT

d=M1P1/RT= M2P2/RT
M1P1= M2P2
M1=28X5/2=70
13. Pressure of 1 g of an ideal gas A at 27 °C is found to be 2 bar. When 2 g of

another ideal gas B is introduced in the same flask at same temperature the
pressure becomes 3 bar. Find a relationship between their molecular masses.
Ans: na=1/Ma; nb=2/Mb
y
PV=nRT
em
2V=1/MaRT V=(1/Ma)RT/2
3V=(2/Mb +1/Ma)RT V=(2/Mb +1/Ma)RT/3
(1/Ma )RT/2= (2/Mb +1/Ma)RT/3
ad
(1/Ma )=2/3 (2/Mb +1/Ma)
(1/3Ma )=4/3Mb
1/Ma=4/MbMb = 4Ma
Ac
14. What will be the pressure exerted by a mixture of 3.2 g of methane and 4.4 g
of carbon dioxide contained in a 9 dm3 flask at 27 °C ?
Ans: PV=nRT
s
n= (3.2/16+ 4.4/44)=0.3
P=0.3moleX0.083bardm3/K/moleX300K/9dm3
er
P=0.83bar.
ev
15. What will be the pressure of the gaseous mixture when 0.5 L of H2 at 0.8 bar
and 2.0 L of dioxygen at 0.7 bar are introduced in a 1L vessel at 27°C?
hi
Ans: PV=nRT
P1V1=PxV2 0.5X0.8= Px.1 pressure of H2 in the flask=Px=0.40bar
Ac
P1V1=PxV20.7X2=Pxx1 pressure of oxygen in the flask= 1.4bar

Pressure of the gaseous mixture=1.4 + 0.4 = 1.8bar.
16. Density of a gas is found to be 5.46 g/dm3 at 27 °C at 2 bar pressure. What

will be its density at STP?
Ans: d= PM/RT M=dRT/P= 5.46X 0.083X300/2= 70

d= (1.013X70)/(0.083X273)= 3.13 g/dm3
17. 34.05 mL of phosphorus vapour weighs 0.0625 g at 546 °C and 0.1 bar
pressure. What is the molar mass of phosphorus?
Ans: d=( 0.0625 x1000/34.05)g/L
M=dRT/P=1.836 X 0.08314X 819/0.1= 1250
18. Calculate the temperature of 4.0 mol of a gas occupying 5 dm3 at 3.32 bar. (R =
y
0.083 bar dm3 K–1 mol–1).
em
Ans: PV=nRT
T=PV/nR=( 3.32X5)/(4X0.083)= 50K
ad
19. Calculate the total pressure in a mixture of 8 g of dioxygen and 4 g of
dihydrogen confined in a vessel of 1 dm3 at 27°C. R = 0.083 bar dm3 K–1 mol–1.
n= nO2+nH2= 8/32 + 4/2 =0.25 +2= 2.25moles
Ac
PV=nRT; P=nRT/V= 2.25X0.083X300/1= 56.025 bar
20. Calculate the volume occupied by 8.8 g of CO2 at 31.1°C and 1 bar pressure.
s
R = 0.083 bar L K–1 mol–1.

er
Ans: PV=nRT; n=8.8/44= 0.2

V= nRT/P= 0.2X0.083X304.1/1= 5.05L
ev
21. 2.9 g of a gas at 95 °C occupied the same volume as 0.184 g of dihydrogen at

17 °C, at the same pressure. What is the molar mass of the gas?
hi
Ans: PV= nRT

V=nRT/P= (0.184/2)XRX290/P=(2.9/M)XRX368/P
Ac
0.092X290=368X2.9/M
M= 368X2.9/0.092X290= 40
22. A mixture of dihydrogen and dioxygen at one bar pressure contains 20% by
weight of dihydrogen. Calculate the partial pressure of dihydrogen.
Ans: let 20g H2 + 80g O2

n= 20/2 + 80/32= 10 +2.5= 12.5

Mole fraction of H2= 10/12.5= 0.8
pH2= 0.8XP
3.Questions based on Kinetic molecular theory of gases, Vander Waal
modified the ideal gas equation, Surface Tension & Viscosity

27. Critical temperature for CO2 and CH4 are 31.0˚C and – 81.9˚C respectively.
y
Which of these has stronger intermolecular forces and why?
Ans: CO2 has stronger forces of attraction because it can be liquefied more
em
easily ie at a higher temperature.
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

6.Thermodynamics

1. System and the Surroundings: A system in thermodynamics refers to that
part of universe in which observations are made and remaining universe
constitutes the surroundings. The surroundings include everything other
y
than the system. System and the surroundings together constitute the
em
universe. The wall that separates the system from the surroundings is called
boundary
2. Types of the System:
ad
 Open System: In an open system, there is exchange of energy and
matter between system and surroundings.
 Closed System In a closed system, there is no exchange of matter,
Ac
but exchange of energy is possible between system and the
surroundings.
 Isolated system :In an isolated system, there is no exchange of
s
energy or matter between the system and the surroundings

er
3. State of a System: The state of a system means the condition of the system
which is described in terms of certain observable properties such as
ev
temp(T), pressure(p), volume (v), etc. of the systems. These properties of a

system are called state variables.
hi
4. State Functions: A physical quantity is solid to be state functions of its

value depends only upon the state of the system and does not depend upon
Ac
the path by which this state has been attained.

5. Internal Energy: a quantity which represents the total energy of the
system. It may be chemical, electrical and mechanical or any other type of
energy you may think of, the sum of all these is the energy of the system. In
thermodynamics, we call it the internal energy, U of the system.

6. Isothermal Process: When a process is carried out in such a manner that

the temp remains constant throughout this process, it is called an isothermal
process.
7. Adiabatic Process: Process is carried out in such a manner that no heat can
flow from the system to the surrounding or vice versa.
8. Isochoric Process: Process during which the volume of the system is kept
constant.
y
9. Isobaric Process: Process during which the pressure of the system is kept
constant. .
em
10. The positive sign expresses that Work (wad) is positive when work is done
on the system. Similarly, if the work is done by the system,wad will be
negative.
ad
11. The q is positive, when heat is transferred from the surroundings to the
system and q is negative when heat is transferred from system to the
Ac
surroundings.
12. First law of Thermodynamics: Statement: Energy can neither be created
nor destroyed, however it may be converted from one form to another.
or
s
The total energy of the universe remains constant although it may undergo
er
transformation from one to another.

Mathematical expression = ∆ U = q + w
ev
13. A process or change is said to be reversible, if a change is brought out in

such a way that the process could, at any moment, be reversed by an
hi
infinitesimal change. A reversible process proceeds infinitely slowly by a

series of equilibrium states such that system and the surroundings are
Ac
always in near equilibrium with each other. Processes other than reversible
processes are known as irreversible processes.
14. Difference between Reversible Process & Irreversible Process

Reversible Process Irreversible Process

1. The process is carried out 1. It is carried out rapidly
infinitesimally slowly 2. Equilibrium may exist
2. At any stage, the only after the completion
equilibrium is not of the process.
disturbed 3. It takes a finite time for
y
3. It takes infinite time for completion.
em
completion. 4. Work obtained in this
4. Work obtained in this process is not maximum
process is maximum.
ad
15. Enthalpy, H: The enthalpy H [Greek word enthalpien, heat content] is
defined as : H = U + pV For finite changes at constant pressure, we can
Ac
write above equation as ΔH = ΔU + ΔpV Since p is constant, we can write
ΔH = ΔU + pΔV since pΔV=ΔngRT ,therefore ΔH = ΔU + ΔngRT
16. Extensive property: An extensive property is a property whose value
depends on the quantity or size of matter present in the system. For
s
example, mass, volume, internal energy, enthalpy, heat capacity, etc. are
er
extensive properties.
17. Intensive property: Those properties which do not depend on the quantity
ev
or size of matter present are known as intensive properties. For example

temperature, density, pressure etc. are intensive properties.
hi
18. Specific heat capacity is the quantity of heat required to raise the
temperature of one unit mass of a substance by one degree celsius (or one
Ac
kelvin). For finding out the heat, q, required to raise the temperatures of a
sample, we multiply the specific heat of the substance, c, by the mass m,
and temperatures change, ΔT as q=c×m×ΔT =CΔT .
19. Relationship between Cp and CV for an ideal gas: Cp -CV=R
20. Bomb calorimeter: For chemical reactions, heat absorbed at constant
volume, is measured in a bomb calorimeter . Here, a steel vessel (the bomb)

is immersed in a water bath. The whole device is called calorimeter. The

steel vessel is immersed in water bath to ensure that no heat is lost to the
surroundings. A combustible substance is burnt in pure dioxygen supplied
in the steel bomb. Heat evolved during the reaction is transferred to the
water around the bomb and its temperature is monitored. Since the bomb
calorimeter is sealed, its volume does not change i.e., the energy changes
associated with reactions are measured at constant volume. Under these
y
conditions, no work is done as the reaction is carried out at constant volume
in the bomb calorimeter. Even for reactions involving gases, there is no
em
work done as ΔV = 0. Temperature change of the calorimeter produced by
the completed reaction is then converted to qV, by using the known heat
capacity of the calorimeter with the help of equation (18).
ad
21. Enthalpy Change of a reaction: The enthalpy change accompanying a
reaction is called the reaction enthalpy. The enthalpy change of a chemical
Ac
reaction is given by the symbol ΔrH.
ΔrH = (sum of enthalpies of products) – (sum of enthalpies of reactants).
ΔrH=∑ai HProducts- ∑bi HReactants
s
22. The standard enthalpy of reaction is the enthalpy change for a reaction
when all the participating substances are in their standard states. The
er
standard state of a substance at a specified temperature is its pure form at1

bar. Standard conditions are denoted by adding the superscript o to the
ev
symbol ΔH, e.g., ΔH o

23. The enthalpy change that accompanies melting of one mole of a solid
hi
substance in standard state is called standard enthalpy of fusion or molar

enthalpy of fusion, ΔfusHo.e.g. H2O(s)→H2O(l);ΔfusH0 =6.00 kJ mol−1 .
Ac
24. Amount of heat required to vaporize one mole of a liquid at constant

temperature and under standard pressure (1bar) is called its standard
enthalpy of vaporization or molar enthalpy of vaporization, ΔvapH0. e.g.
H2O(l)→H2O(g);ΔvapH0 =40.79 kJ mol−1

25. Standard enthalpy of sublimation, ΔsubH0 is the change in enthalpy when

one mole of a solid substance sublimes at a constant temperature and under
standard pressure (1bar). Sublimation is direct conversion of a solid into its
vapour. Solid CO2 (dry ice) sublimes at 195K with ΔsubH 0=25.2 kJ mol–1;
naphthalene sublimes slowly and for this ΔsubH 0=73.0 kJ mol-1
26. .The standard enthalpy change for the formation of one mole of a
compound from its elements in their most stable states of aggregation (also
y
known as reference states) is called Standard Molar Enthalpy of Formation.
Its symbol is ΔfH0.
em
27. .Standard enthalpy of combustion is defined as the enthalpy
change per mole (or per unit amount) of a substance, when it
undergoes combustion and all the reactants and products being
ad
in their standard states at the specified temperature.
28. Enthalpy of atomization (symbol: ΔaH0): It is the enthalpy change
Ac
on breaking one mole of bonds completely to obtain atoms in
the gas phase. In case of diatomic molecules, like dihydrogen
the enthalpy of atomization is also the bond dissociation
s
enthalpy. In some cases, the enthalpy of atomization is same

er
as the enthalpy of sublimation.

29. Bond Enthalpy (symbol: ΔbondH0):
ΔrH=∑bondenthapiesreactants- ∑ bondenthapiesproducts
ev
30. Enthalpy of Solution (symbol : ΔsolH0 ): Enthalpy of solution of a

substance is the enthalpy change when one mole of it dissolves in a
hi
specified amount of solvent. The enthalpy of solution at infinite dilution is

the enthalpy change observed on dissolving the substance in an infinite
Ac
amount of solvent when the interactions between the ions (or solute
molecules) are negligible.
31. Lattice Enthalpy The lattice enthalpy of an ionic compound is
the enthalpy change which occurs when one mole of an ionic
compound dissociates into its ions in gaseous state.

32. Hess’s Law: Enthalpy change for a reaction is the same whether it occurs in
one step or in a series of steps. This may be stated as follows in the form of:
If a reaction takes place in several steps then its standard reaction enthalpy
is the sum of the standard enthalpies of the intermediate reactions into
which the overall reaction may be divided at the same temperature.rH0
=rH1+rH2 + rH3 For example: C(s) +
1/2O2 (g)CO(g) rH0 =-110.5 kJmol-1 CO(g) + 1/2O2
y
(g)CO2(g) rH0 =-283.0 kJmol-1 C(s) + O2
em
(g)CO2 (g) rH0 = -393.5 kJmol-1
33. Spontaneous Process: A process which occurs by its ones i.e. Without the
intervention of an outside agency.
ad
34. Non Spontaneous Process: A process which can neither take place by itself
nor by initiation is called a non spontaneous process.
35. Driving Force: The force which is responsible for spontaneity of a process
Ac
is called the driving force.
36. Entropy(S): Entropy is a measure of randomness or disorder of the system.
37. Entropy change (∆S): It is defined as the amount of heat (q) observed
s
isothermally and reversibly divided by the absolute temp(T) at which the

er
heat is absorbed.
q
∆S =
ev
T
H fusion
38. Entropy of fusion : ∆S fusion =
Tm
hi
Where, ∆H fusion = Entropy of fusion per mole

Tm = Melting point
Ac
 VAP
 SVAP 
Tb
∆HVAP = Entropy of vaporization per mole

Tb =Boiling point
39. Second Law Of Thermodynamics

The entropy of universe is continuously increasing due to spontaneous

process taking place in it.
∆S system + ∆S surrounding > 0
i.e. ∆S total > 0
40. Gibbs Free Energy (G) : It is defined as maxm amount of energy available to
a system during the process that can be converted into useful work. It is a
measure of capacity to do useful work.
y
G = H – TS this equation is also known as Gibb‘s Helmholtz
em
equation
G is a state function.  G is change in free energy.
G    TS
ad
41. If G is negative, process is spontaneous when G =0,the process is in
Ac
equilibrium if G is positive, the process does not take place.
42. Standard Free Energy Change (∆G0) : It is defined as free energy change
measured at 298 K and 1 atm Pressure.
43. Standard Free energy of formation: (  f G  ) It is free energy change when
s
er
1 mole of compound is formed from its constituting elements in their

standard state.
r G   pf G (products)   R f G (reac tan ts)
ev
44. Gibbs Energy Change and Work

In case of galvanic cell, Gibbs energy change  r G ,is related to the electrical
hi
work done by the cell.

Ac
Thus  r G = -nFEcell
If reactants and products are in their standard states
 r G  = -nFE  cell, Here E  cell is the standard cell potential.
45. Gibbs Energy Change and Equilibrium Constant

 r G   RT ln K
 r G    2.303RT log K

Some Important Formulas(Thermodynamics)
 ∆U=q+w
 ΔH = ΔU + pΔV
 ΔH = ΔU + ΔngRT
y
em
 Cp -CV=R
 ΔrH=∑ai HProducts- ∑bi HReactants
ad
 ΔrH=∑bondenthapiesreactants- ∑ bondenthapiesproducts
Ac
 .rH0 =rH1+rH2 + rH3
H fusion
s
 ∆S fusion =
Tm
er
 G    TS
ev
 r G   pf G (products)   R f G (reac tan ts)

hi
  r G = -nFEcell
Ac
 ΔrG = -2.303RT log K

Unit-6
THERMODYAMICS
1.Questions based on system, different types of system
surroundings, First law of thermodynamics, internal energy
y
1. Define the term system and surroundings. Explain the different types of
em
system.
2. Explain the terms: state variables, adiabatic process, work, heat & internal
energy.
3. Define First law of thermodynamics. Give its mathematical expression.
ad
4. (a) In a process, 701 J of heat is absorbed by a system and 394 J of work is
done by the system. What is the change in internal energy for the process? (b)
Ac
Calculate the internal energy change when the system absorbs 5 KJ of heat and
1KJ of work
5. Express the change in internal energy of a system when(i) No heat is absorbed
s
by the system from the surroundings, but work (w) is done on the system. What
type of wall does the system have?(ii) No work is done on the system, but q
er
amount of heat is taken out from the system and given to the surroundings.
What type of wall does the system have?(iii) w amount of work is done by the
ev
system and q amount of heat is Supplied to the system. What type of system
would it be?
hi
2.Questions based on system Enthalpy & its types.

Ac
6. Explain the term Enthalpy. Give its mathematical expression.

7. If water vapour is assumed to be a perfect gas, molar enthalpy change for
vapourisation of 1 mol of water at 1bar and 100°C is 41kJ mol–1. Calculate the
internal energy change, when (i) 1 mol of water is aporized at 1 bar pressure
and 100°C. (ii) 1 mol of water is converted into ice.

8. The reaction of cyanamide, NH2CN (s), with Dioxygen was carried out in a
bomb calorimeter, and U was found to be -742.7 KJ/mol at 298K. Calculate
Enthalpy change for the reaction at 298K NH 2 CN (s)+
3 /2 O2 (g)  N2 (g) +CO 2(g) +H2O(l)
9. Enthalpies of formation of CO (g), CO2 (g), N2O (g) and N2O4 (g) are -110, -
393, 81 and 9.7 KJ/mol respectively. Find the value of rH for the reaction;
N2O4 (g) + 3 CO (g)  N2O (g) + 3CO2 (g)
y
10. Given: N2 (g) + 3H2 (g)  2NH3 (g);rH0 = -92.4 KJ/mol. Calculatef H0NH3
em
(g).
11. The enthalpy of combustion of methane, graphite and dihydrogen at 298 K are,
–890.3 kJ mol–1 –393.5 kJ mol–1, and –285.8 kJ mol–1 respectively. Calculate
ad
the Enthalpy of formation of CH4 (g).
12. For the process to occur under adiabatic conditions, the correct condition isi)
ΔT = 0 (ii) Δp = 0 (iii) q = 0 (iv) w = 0
Ac
13. . What is the enthalpies of all elements in their standard states.
14. Enthalpy of combustion of carbon to CO2 is –393.5 kJ mol–1. Calculate the heat
released upon formation of 35.2 g of CO2 from carbon and dioxygen gas.
s
er
15. The combustion of 1 mol of benzene takes place at 298K .After combustion
CO2 and H2O are formed and 3267KJ/mol of heat is liberated .calculate f H0
ev
(C6H6) Given: f H0 = -286 KJ/mol , f H0 = -393 KJ/mol

16. Calculate the standard enthalpy of formation of CH3OH (l) from the following
data:CH3OH (l) + 3/2 O2 (g)  CO2 (g) + 2H2O (l); rH0 = -726 KJ/mol
hi
C (g) + O2 (g)  CO2 (g) ; C H0 = -393 KJ/mol

Ac
H2 (g) + ½ O2 (g)  H2O (l); f H0 = -286 KJ/mol

17. Calculate the enthalpy change for the process :
CCl4 (g)  C (g) + 4Cl (g) and calculate the bond enthalpy of C-Cl in CCl4 ( g)
vap H0 (CCl4 ) = 30.5 KJ/mol, f H0 (CCl4 ) = -135.5 KJ/mol
a H0 (C ) = 715 KJ/mol a H0 (Cl2 ) = 242 KJ/mol
18. Define the Extensive, intensive properties & Heat capacity.

19(a) Give the relationship between Cp and Cv.

(b)Write a note on Bomb Calorimeter.
20. Explain the following terms with suitable examples: (a) Standard enthalpy of
reaction (b)standard enthalpy of formation (c) enthalpy of fusion (d) enthalpy of
vaporization (e) enthalpy of Sublimation (f) enthalpy of Combustion (g) )enthalpy
of Hydration (h) ) enthalpy of Atomization (i)Bond enthalpy
3. Questions based on Hess’s law of constant heat summation, Born
y
Haber cycle, Entropy. Gibbs Energy
em
21. Explain Hess‘s law of constant heat summation with an example.
22. Explain Born Haber cycle & lattice enthalpy.
23. Define Entropy. Give mathematical expressions related to it.
ad
24. Predict in which of the following, entropy increases/decreases:
(i) A liquid crystallizes into a solid.
(ii) Temperature of a crystalline solid is raised from 0 K to 115 K.
Ac
(iii) 2NaHCO3 (s) →Na2CO3( s)+CO2 (g) + H2O( g)
(iv) H2 (g) →2H(g)
25. Define Gibbs Energy. Give its mathematical expression. What is Gibb‘s energy
s
criteria of Spontaneity.
er
26. For the reaction at 298K, 2A + B  C,H = 400 KJ/mol and S = 0.2 KJ/mol
K At what temperature will the reaction become spontaneous?
ev
27. For the reaction, 2Cl (g)  Cl2 (g), What are the signs of H and S?
28.For the reaction: 2A (g) + B (g)  2D (g), U0 = -10.5 KJ and S0 = - 44.1J/K
Calculate G0 for the reaction, and predict whether the reaction will occur
hi
spontaneously.
Ac
29. The equilibrium constant for a reaction is 10.Caculate G0, T =300K,

R = 8.314 J/K mol
30. Calculate the value of G0 for the conversion of Oxygen to Ozone,
3/2 O2 (g)  O3 (g) at 298 K , if Kp for this conversion is 2.47 × 10-29 .
31. Find out the value of equilibrium constant for the following reaction at 298 K.
2NH3 (g) + CO2 (g) NH2CONH2(aq ) + H2O(l )

Standard Gibbs energy change, ΔrG0 at\ the given temperature is –13.6 kJ mol–1.
32. Calculate the entropy change in surroundings when 1.00 mol of H2O(l) is
formed under standard conditions. Δf H0 = –286 kJ mol–1.
33 What is meant by entropy? Predict the sign of entropy change (∆S) in each
of the following:
(a) Temperature of crystalline solid is raised from 0K to 115 K
(b) A liquid crystallizes into solid
(c) 2 NaHCO3 (s) → Na2CO3 (s) + H2O (g) + CO2 (g)
y
(d) 2 SO2(g) + O2 (g) <==>2SO3(g)
em
(e) H2(at 298K,1 atm) → H2(at 298K,10 atm)
(f) H2O(at 298K,1 atm) → H2O (at 330K,1 atm)
(g) 2 NH4NO3 (s) at 1 atm & 373K → 2 N2(g) + 4 H2O + O2 (g)
ad
(h) When rubber band is stretched.
(i) When an egg is boiled
Ac
(j) C(graphite) → C(diamond)
(k) I2(g) → I2(s)
(l)Hg(l) → Hg(g)
(m) AgNO3(s) → AgNO3(aq)
s
(n) Dissolution of iodine in a solvent

er
(o) A partition is removed to allow two gases to mix

(p) HCl is added to AgNO3 solution and precipitate of AgCl is obtained
ev
(q) crystallization of copper sulphate from its saturated solution

hi
34 Give reasons for the following:

(a) A real crystal has more entropy than an ideal crystal
Ac
(b) The dissolution of NH4Cl in water is endothermic still it dissolves in water .

(c ) Why does a mole of water at 00C have greater entropy than a mole of ice at
00C ?
(d) Neither ―q‖ nor ―w‖ is a state function but ―q+w‖ is a state function.
(e) Thermodynamically an exothermic reaction is sometimes not spontaneous.
(f) The entropy of steam is more than that of water at its boiling point.

(g) The equilibrium constant for a reaction is greater than one if ∆rG0 for it is
less than zero .
(h) Endothermic reactions are carried out at higher temperature.
(i) Evaporation of water is endothermic process but spontaneous .
(j) When an ideal gas expands in vacuum, there is neither absorption nor
evolution of heat .
(k) Why does entropy of a solid increase on fusion ?
y
(l) Why a non-spontaneous reaction becomes spontaneous when coupled with a
suitable spontaneous reaction ?
em
(m) why for predicting the spontaneity of a reaction , free energy criteria is
better than the entropy criteria ?
(n) Why internal energy is a state function but work is not ?
ad
(o) Why is standard heat of formation of diamond not zero although it is an
element ?
Ac
(p) Why is entropy of a solution higher than that of pure liquid ?
(q) acetic acid and hydrochloric acid react with KOH solution . The enthalpy of
neutralization of acetic acid
is -55.8 kJ per mole while that of hydrochloric acid is -57.3 kJ/mol. Why?
s
er
35 Justify the following statements

(a) An exothermic reaction is always thermodynamically spontaneous .why?
ev
(b)The entropy of a substance increases on going from liquid to vapour state at

any temperature.
hi
( c) At low temperatures enthalpy change dominates ΔG expression and at high

temperatures it is the entropy which dominate the value of ΔG .
Ac
(d) Many thermodynamically feasible reactions do not occur under ordinary

conditions.
(e) Reactions with ΔG0 < 0 always have an equilibrium constant greater than
one.
36Define…/ Discuss the following terms:(Give examples and chemical equation
wherever necessary )

Standard enthalpy of combustion

(b) Lattice enthalpy (c) Enthalpy of solution
(d) Standard enthalpy fusion / vapourisation / sublimation (e) Enthalpy of
atomization
(f) Bond enthalpy for diatomic and polyatomic molecule. (g) Calorific value (h)
Enthalpy of Neutralisation .
(i) State variables/ state functions (j) System (k) work (l) isobaric and
isochoric process.
y
37Differentiate between the following (with examples )
em
(a) Intensive and extensive properties
(b) Enthalpy of formation and Enthalpy of reaction.
(c) Enthalpy and Internal energy (d) Heat capacity and specific heat capacity.
(e) Reversible and Irreversible process (f) Adiabatic and Isothermal process.
ad
(g) State function and path function (h) Exothermic and Endothermic reaction.
(i) Isolated, Open, Closed, Adiabatic Systems (j) Heat and Work.
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

y
em
7.Equilibrium(Part-I)
ad
Ac
1. Equilibrium represents the state of a process in which the properties like

s
temperature, pressure etc do not show any change with the passage of time
er
2. Chemical equilibrium: When the rates of the forward and reverse reactions
become equal, the concentrations of the reactants and the products remain
ev
constant. This is the stage of chemical equilibrium. This equilibrium is dynamic in

nature as it consists of a forward reaction in which the reactants give product(s)
and reverse reaction in which product(s) gives the original reactants. Equilibrium
hi
is possible only in a closed system at a given temperature. A mixture of reactants

and products in the equilibrium state is called an equilibrium mixture.
Ac
3. In a Homogeneous system, all the reactants and products are in the same phase.
For example, in the gaseous reaction, N2 (g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g), reactants and
products are in the homogeneous phase.
4. Equilibrium in a system having more than one phase is called heterogeneous
equilibrium. The equilibrium between water vapor and liquid water in a closed
container is an example of heterogeneous equilibrium. H2O(l) H2O(g)

5. Henry Law:-It states that the mass of a gas dissolved in a given mass of a solvent
at any temperature is proportional to the pressure of the gas above the solvent
6. Law of Chemical Equilibrium: It may be stated as, at a given temperature the
ratio of product of equilibrium concentration of the products to that of the reactants
with each concentration terms raised to power equal to the respective
stoichiometric coefficient in the balanced chemical reaction has a constant value.
This constant value is known as Equilibrium constant. For a general reaction of the
type aA + bB  cC + dD
y
Kc = [C]c[D]d /[A]a [B]b This expression is known as Law Of Chemical
em
Equilibrium
7. Relationship between Kp and Kc: Kp = Kc(RT)  n
8. Units of Equilibrium Constant: The value of equilibrium constant Kc can be
ad
calculated by substituting the concentration terms in mol/L and for Kp partial
pressure is substituted in Pa, kPa, bar or atm. This results in units of equilibrium
constant based on molarity or pressure, unless the exponents of both the numerator
Ac
and denominator are same. For the reactions (i)H2(g) + I2(g) 2HI, Kc
and Kp have no unit.(ii)N2O4(g)  2NO2 (g), Kc has unit mol/L and Kp has unit
bar
s
9. Characteristics Of Equilibrium Constant

 Equilibrium constant is applicable only when concentrations of the reactants
er
and products have attained their equilibrium state.

 The value of equilibrium constant is independent of initial concentrations of
ev
the reactants and products.

 Equilibrium constant is temperature dependent having one unique value for
hi
aparticular reaction represented by a balanced equation at a given temperature.

 The equilibrium constant for the reverse reaction is equal to the inverse of the
Ac
equilibrium constant for the forward reaction.

 The equilibrium constant K for a reaction is related to the equilibrium constant
of the corresponding reaction, whose equation is obtained by multiplying or
dividing the equation for the original reaction by a small integer.
10. Applications of equilibrium constant :
 Predict the extent of a reaction on the basis of its magnitude.

 Predict the direction of the reaction, and

 Calculate equilibrium concentrations.
11. Le Chatelier’s Principle: It states that if a system in equilibrium is subjected to a
change of concentration, temperature or pressure, the equilibrium shifts in a
direction that tends to undo the effect of the change imposed.
 Effect of change of concentration: When the concentration of any of the
reactants or products in a reaction at equilibrium is changed, the composition of
the equilibrium mixture changes so as to minimize the effect of concentration
y
change. For eg:- H2(g) + I2(g)  2HI(g)
em
If H2 is added to the reaction mixture at equilibrium, the equilibrium of the
reaction is disturbed. In order to restore it, the reaction proceeds in a direction
whereas H2 is consumed i.e more of H2 and I2 react to form HI and finally the
ad
equilibrium shifts in forward direction.
 Effect of change of pressure: When the pressure is increased the equilibrium
shifts in the direction in which the number of moles of the gas decreases.
Ac
Consider the reaction, CO (g) + 3H2 (g)  CH4 (g) + H2O (g) Here, 4 mol of
gaseous reactants (CO + 3H2) become 2 mol of gaseous products (CH4 (g) + H2O).
so by Le Chatelier‘s principle. The increase in pressure will shift the equilibrium
s
in the forward direction, a direction in which the number of moles of the gas or
er
pressure decreases.
 Effect of change of Temperature: When a change in temperature occurs, the
ev
value of equilibrium constant changes. In general, the temperature dependence of

the equilibrium constant depends on the sign of ΔH for the reaction. The
equilibrium constant for an exothermic reaction (-ve ΔH) decreases as the
hi
temperature increases. The equilibrium constant for an endothermic reaction (+ve

ΔH) increases as the temperature increases. When the Temperature is increased the
Ac
equilibrium shifts in the direction in of endothermic reaction.

Consider a reaction N2(g) + 3H2(g)  2NH3(g) ΔH = -92.38Kj/mol
According to Le Chatelier‘s principle, raising the temperature shifts the equilibrium
to left (backward direction i.e direction of endothermic reaction) and decreases the
equilibrium concentration of ammonia.

 Effect of Inert Gas Addition: If the volume is kept constant and an inert gas such
as argon is added which does not take part in the reaction, the equilibrium remains
undisturbed. It is because the addition of an inert gas at constant volume does not
change the partial pressures or the molar concentrations of the substance involved
in the reaction. The reaction quotient changes only if the added gas is a reactant or
product involved in the reaction.
 Effect of a Catalyst: A catalyst increases the rate of the chemical reaction by
making available a new low energy pathway for the conversion of reactants to
y
products. It increases the rate of forward and reverse reactions that pass through
em
the same transition state and does not affect equilibrium. Catalyst lowers the
activation energy for the forward and reverse reactions by exactly the same
amount. Catalyst does not affect the equilibrium composition of a reaction
ad
mixture. It does not appear in the balanced chemical equation or in the equilibrium
constant expression.
Ac
Summary of Le Chatelier’s Principle
s
er
Type of Effect or Change Direction of Equilibrium

Addition of more reactants Forward direction
ev
Addition of more products Backward direction

hi
Increase in temperature Towards endothermic reaction

Decrease in temperature Towards exothermic reaction
Ac
Addition of Catalyst No effect

Increase in Pressure where the no. of gaseous moles are less
Decrease in Pressure where the no. of gaseous moles are more

Addition of Inert gas at const.Volume No effect
Addition of Inert gas at const.pressure where the no. of gaseous moles are more
y
em
ad
Ac
s
Unit-7
er
EQUILIBRIUM(Part-I)
ev
1.Question based on law of chemical equilibrium, Equilibrium constant,
Applications of Equilibrium Constants, Relation Between Kp & Kc.

hi
1. What do mean by law of chemical equilibrium? Explain with an example.

Ac

2. Write the expression for the equilibrium constant, Kc for each of the
following reactions:
y
3. Find out the value of Kc for each of the following equilibria from the value
em
of Kp:
4. Wri
ad
te the balanced chemical equation corresponding to this equilibrium
constant expression for a gas reaction. \
Ac
5. What is Kc for the following equilibrium when the equilibrium
s
concentration of each substance is: [SO2]= 0.60M, [O2] = 0.82M and [SO3]
er
= 1.90M 2SO2(g) + O2(g)  2SO3(g)

6. The following concentrations were obtained for the formation of NH3 from
N2 and H2 at equilibrium at 500K. [N2] = 1.5 × 10–2M. [H2] = 3.0 ×10–2 M
ev
and [NH3] = 1.2 ×10–2M. Calculate equilibrium constant.

7. At equilibrium, the concentrations ofN2=3.0 × 10–3M, O2 = 4.2 × 10–3M and
hi
NO= 2.8 × 10–3M in a sealed vessel at800K. What will be Kc for the
reaction:N2(g) + O2(g)  2NO(g)
Ac
8. PCl5, PCl3 and Cl2 are at equilibrium at 500 K and having concentration
1.59M PCl3, 1.59M Cl2 and 1.41 M PCl5.Calculate Kc for the reaction,PCl5
 PCl3 + Cl2
9. For the equilibrium,2NOCl(g)  2NO(g) + Cl2(g) the value of the
equilibrium constant, Kc is 3.75 × 10–6 at 1069 K. Calculate the Kp for the
reaction at this temperature?

2.Question based on Calculating Equilibrium Concentrations, Le
Chatelierís principleEffect of Pressure Change, Concentration
Change, Temperature Change, Inert Gas Addition & Catalyst

10. The value of Kc = 4.24 at 800K for the reaction, CO (g)
+ H2O (g)  CO2 (g) + H2 (g) Calculate equilibrium concentrations of
y
CO2, H2, CO and H2O at 800 K, if only CO and H2O are present initially at
em
concentrations of 0.10M each.The value of Kp for the reaction,CO2 (g) + C
(s)  2CO (g) is 3.0 at 1000 K. If initially p CO2= 0.48 bar and p CO = 0
bar and puregraphite is present, calculate theequilibrium partial pressures of
CO and CO2.
ad
11. A sample of pure PCl5 was introduced into an evacuated vessel at 473 K.
After equilibrium was attained, concentration of PCl5 was found to be0.5 ×
Ac
10–1 mol L–1. If value of Kc is 8.3 × 10–3, what are the concentrations of
PCl3 and Cl2 at equilibrium?PCl5 (g)  PCl3 (g) + Cl2(g)
12. What do you mean by Lechatelier‘s principle? Explain with an example?
13. Does the number of moles of reaction products increase, decrease or remain
s
same when each of the following equilibria is subjected to a decrease in

er
pressure by increasing the volume?

ev
hi
14. Which of the following reactions will get affected by increasing the
pressure?Also, mention whether change will cause the reaction to go into
Ac

forward or backward direction.
y
15. Dihydrogen gas is obtained from natural gas by partial oxidation with
steam as per following endothermic reaction:
em
CH4[g] + H2O [g] CO [g] + 3H2[g]
a) Write as expression for Kp for the above reaction.
b) How will the values of Kp and the composition of equilibrium mixture
ad
be affected by
i) Increasing the pressure
ii) Increasing the temperature
Ac
iii) Using a catalyst
16. Describe the effect of: - a) Addition of H2 b) Addition of CH3OH c)
Removal of CO d) Removal of CH3OH On the equilibrium of the
s
reaction: 2 H2[g] + CO[g] CH3OH [g]

er
ev
17. At 473 K, equilibrium constant Kc for decomposition of phosphorus

pentachloride, PCl5 is 8.3 ×10-3. If decomposition is depicted as, PCl5
(g) PCl3 (g) + Cl2 (g) ΔrH0 = 124.0 kJ mol–1
hi
a) write an expression for Kc for the reaction.

b) what is the value of Kc for the reverse reaction at the same temperature. c)
Ac
what would be the effect on Kc if (i) more PCl5 is added (ii) pressure is
increased(iii) the temperature is increased ?
3.Question based on Relationship Between Equilibrium Constant K,
And Gibbs Energy G

18. The value of ΔG0 for the phosphorylation of glucose in glycolysis is 13.8
kJ / mol. Find the value of Kc at 298 K
19. Hydrolysis of sucrose gives, Sucrose + H2O Glucose + Fructose
Equilibrium constant Kc for the reaction is 2 X 1013 at 300K. Calculate ΔG0
at 300K.
20. Calculate a) ΔG0 and b) the equilibrium constant for the formation of NO2
from NO and O2 at 298K NO (g) + ½ O2 (g) NO2 (g) where ΔfG0 (NO2)
y
= 52.0 kJ/mol ΔfG0 (NO) = 87.0 kJ/mol ΔfG0 (O2) = 0 kJ/mol.
em
ad
Question 7.1:
A liquid is in equilibrium with its vapour in a sealed container at a fixed
Ac
temperature. The volume of the container is suddenly increased.
a) What is the initial effect of the change on vapour pressure?
b) How do rates of evaporation and condensation change initially?
s
c) What happens when equilibrium is restored finally and what will be the final
er
vapour pressure?
 Answer
ev
(a) If the volume of the container is suddenly increased, then the vapour pressure
would decrease initially. This is because the amount of vapour remains the same,
hi
but the volume increases suddenly. As a result, the same amount of vapour is
distributed in a larger volume.
Ac
(b) Since the temperature is constant, the rate of evaporation also remains constant.
When the volume of the container is increased, the density of the vapour phase
decreases. As a result, the rate of collisions of the vapour particles also decreases.
Hence, the rate of condensation decreases initially.
(c) When equilibrium is restored finally, the rate of evaporation becomes equal to
the rate of condensation. In this case, only the volume changes while the

temperature remains constant. The vapour pressure depends on temperature and

not on volume. Hence, the final vapour pressure will be equal to the original
vapour pressure of the system.
Question 7.2:
What is Kc for the following equilibrium when the equilibrium concentration of
each substance is: [SO2] = 0.60 M, [O2] = 0.82 M and [SO3] = 1.90 M?
y
 Answer
em
The equilibrium constant (Kc) for the give reaction is:
ad
Ac
Hence, Kc for the equilibrium is .
Question 7.3:
At a certain temperature and total pressure of 105 Pa, iodine vapour contains
s
40% by volume of I atoms

er
Calculate Kp for the equilibrium.

ev
 Answer
Partial pressure of I atoms,
hi
Ac
Partial pressure of I2 molecules,

Now, for the given reaction,
y
em
Question 7.4:
Write the expression for the equilibrium constant, Kc for each of the following
reactions:
ad
(i)
(ii)
Ac
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
s
 Answer
er
ev
hi
Ac

y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
Question 7.5:
Find out the value of Kc for each of the following equilibria from the value of
ev
Kp:
hi

Ac
Answer
The relation between Kp and Kc is given as:
Kp = Kc (RT) Δn
(a) Here,
Δn = 3 – 2 = 1
R = 0.0831 barLmol–1K–1

T = 500 K
Kp = 1.8 × 10–2
Now,
Kp = Kc (RT) Δn
y
(b) Here,
em
Δn = 2 – 1 = 1
R = 0.0831 barLmol–1K–1
T = 1073 K
ad
Kp= 167
Now,
Kp = Kc (RT) Δn
Ac
s
er
Question 7.6:
For the following equilibrium,

ev
Both the forward and reverse reactions in the equilibrium are elementary
hi
bimolecular reactions. What is Kc, for the reverse reaction?

 Answer
Ac
It is given that for the forward reaction is
Then, for the reverse reaction will be,

Question 7.7:
Explain why pure liquids and solids can be ignored while writing the equilibrium
y
constant expression?
em
 Answer
For a pure substance (both solids and liquids),
ad
Ac
Now, the molecular mass and density (at a particular temperature) of a pure
s
substance is always fixed and is accounted for in the equilibrium constant.

er
Therefore, the values of pure substances are not mentioned in the equilibrium
constant expression.
ev
Question 7.8:
Reaction between N2 and O2 takes place as follows:
hi
Ac
If a mixture of 0.482 mol of N2 and 0.933 mol of O2 is placed in a 10 L reaction

vessel and allowed to form N2O at a temperature for which Kc = 2.0 × 10–37,
determine the composition of equilibrium mixture.
 Answer
Let the concentration of N2O at equilibrium be x.
The given reaction is:

Therefore, at equilibrium, in the 10 L vessel:
The value of equilibrium constant i.e., = 2.0 × 10–37 is very small. Therefore,
y
the amount of N2 and O2 reacted is also very small. Thus, x can be neglected from
the expressions of molar concentrations of N2 and O2.
em
Then,
ad
Now, Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
Question 7.9:
Nitric oxide reacts with Br2 and gives nitrosyl bromide as per reaction given
below:

When 0.087 mol of NO and 0.0437 mol of Br2 are mixed in a closed container at
constant temperature, 0.0518 mol of NOBr is obtained at equilibrium. Calculate
equilibrium amount of NO and Br2.
 Answer
y
Now, 2 mol of NOBr are formed from 2 mol of NO. Therefore, 0.0518 mol of
em
NOBr are formed from 0.0518 mol of NO.
Again, 2 mol of NOBr are formed from 1 mol of Br.
Therefore, 0.0518 mol of NOBr are formed from mol of Br, or
ad
0.0259 mol of NO
The amount of NO and Br present initially is as follows:
Ac
[NO] = 0.087 mol [Br2] = 0.0437 mol
Therefore, the amount of NO present at equilibrium is:
[NO] = 0.087 – 0.0518
= 0.0352 mol
s
And, the amount of Br present at equilibrium is:

er
[Br2] = 0.0437 – 0.0259

= 0.0178 m
ev
Question 7.10:
hi
At 450 K, Kp= 2.0 × 1010/bar for the given reaction at equilibrium.

Ac
What is Kc at this temperature?

 Answer
For the given reaction,
Δn = 2 – 3 = – 1
T = 450 K
R = 0.0831 bar L bar K–1 mol–1

= 2.0 × 1010 bar –1

We know that,
y
em
ad
Question 7.11:
A sample of HI (g) is placed in flask at a pressure of 0.2 atm. At equilibrium the
partial pressure of HI (g) is 0.04 atm. What is Kp for the given equilibrium?
Ac
 Answer
The initial concentration of HI is 0.2 atm. At equilibrium, it has a partial pressure
s
of 0.04 atm. Therefore, a decrease in the pressure of HI is 0.2 – 0.04 = 0.16. The
er
given reaction is:

ev
hi
Therefore,
Ac

Hence, the value of Kp for the given equilibrium is 4.0.
Question 7.12:
A mixture of 1.57 mol of N2, 1.92 mol of H2 and 8.13 mol of NH3 is introduced
into a 20 L reaction vessel at 500 K. At this temperature, the equilibrium
constant, Kc for the reaction

Is the reaction mixture at equilibrium? If not, what is the direction of the net
y
reaction?
em
 Answer
ad
Ac
Now, reaction quotient Qc is:
s
er
ev
hi
Since , the reaction mixture is not at equilibrium.

Ac
Again, . Hence, the reaction will proceed in the reverse direction.
Question 7.13:
The equilibrium constant expression for a gas reaction is,

Write the balanced chemical equation corresponding to this expression.

 Answer
The balanced chemical equation corresponding to the given expression can be
written as:
Question 7.14:
y
One mole of H2O and one mole of CO are taken in 10 L vessel and heated to
em
725 K. At equilibrium 40% of water (by mass) reacts with CO according to the
equation,
ad
Calculate the equilibrium constant for the reaction.
 Answer
Ac
s
er
Therefore, the equilibrium constant for the reaction,

ev
hi
Ac
Question 7.15:
At 700 K, equilibrium constant for the reaction
is 54.8. If 0.5 molL–1 of HI(g) is present at equilibrium at 700 K, what are the
concentration of H2(g) and I2(g) assuming that we initially started with HI(g) and
allowed it to reach equilibrium at 700 K?

 Answer
It is given that equilibrium constant for the reaction
is 54.8.
Therefore, at equilibrium, the equilibrium constant for the reaction
will be .
y
Let the concentrations of hydrogen and iodine at equilibrium be x molL–1
em
.
ad
Ac
s
Hence, at equilibrium,
er
Question 7.16:
ev
What is the equilibrium concentration of each of the substances in the

equilibrium when the initial concentration of ICl was 0.78 M?
hi
 Answer
Ac

y
em
ad
Question 7.17:
Kp = 0.04 atm at 899 K for the equilibrium shown below. What is the equilibrium
concentration of C2H6 when it is placed in a flask at 4.0 atm pressure and
Ac
allowed to come to equilibrium?
 Answer
s
Let p be the pressure exerted by ethene and hydrogen gas (each) at equilibrium.
er
Now, according to the reaction,

ev
We can write,
hi
Ac

y
em
ad
Ac
Question 7.18:
Ethyl acetate is formed by the reaction between ethanol and acetic acid and the
equilibrium is represented as:
s
(i) Write the concentration ratio (reaction quotient), Qc, for this reaction (note:
er
water is not in excess and is not a solvent in this reaction)

(ii) At 293 K, if one starts with 1.00 mol of acetic acid and 0.18 mol of ethanol,
ev
there is 0.171 mol of ethyl acetate in the final equilibrium mixture. Calculate the
equilibrium constant.
hi
(iii) Starting with 0.5 mol of ethanol and 1.0 mol of acetic acid and maintaining
it at 293 K, 0.214 mol of ethyl acetate is found after sometime. Has equilibrium
Ac
been reached?
 Answer
(i) Reaction quotient,

(ii) Let the volume of the reaction mixture be V. Also, here we will consider that
water is a solvent and is present in excess.

Therefore, equilibrium constant for the given reaction is:
y
em
ad
(iii) Let the volume of the reaction mixture be V.
Ac
s
er
ev
Therefore, the reaction quotient is,

hi
Ac
Since , equilibrium has not been reached.

Question 7.19:

A sample of pure PCl5 was introduced into an evacuated vessel at 473 K. After
equilibrium was attained, concentration of PCl5 was found to be 0.5 × 10–1 mol
L–1. If value of Kc is 8.3 × 10–3, what are the concentrations of PCl3 and Cl2 at
equilibrium?
 Answer
Let the concentrations of both PCl3 and Cl2 at equilibrium be x molL–1. The given
y
reaction is:
em
Now we can write the expression for equilibrium as:
ad
Ac
s
er
Therefore, at equilibrium,
ev
Question 7.20:
One of the reactions that take place in producing steel from iron ore is the
hi
reduction of iron (II) oxide by carbon monoxide to give iron metal and CO2.
Ac
FeO (s) + CO (g) Fe (s) + CO2 (g); Kp= 0.265 at 1050 K.

What are the equilibrium partial pressures of CO and CO2 at 1050 K if the initial
partial pressures are: pCO = 1.4 atm and = 0.80 atm?

 Answer

y
Since , the reaction will proceed in the backward direction.
em
Therefore, we can say that the pressure of CO will increase while the pressure of
CO2 will decrease.
Now, let the increase in pressure of CO = decrease in pressure of CO2 be p.
Then, we can write,
ad
Ac
s
er
Therefore, equilibrium partial of
And, equilibrium partial pressure of

ev
Question 7.21:
hi
Equilibrium constant, Kc for the reaction
at 500 K is 0.061.
Ac
At a particular time, the analysis shows that composition of the reaction mixture
is 3.0 mol L–1 N2, 2.0 mol L–1 H2 and 0.5 mol L–1 NH3. Is the reaction at
equilibrium? If not in which direction does the reaction tend to proceed to reach
equilibrium?
 Answer

Now, we know that,
y
em
Since , the reaction is not at equilibrium.
Since , the reaction will proceed in the forward direction to reach
ad
equilibrium.
Question 7.22:
Ac
Bromine monochloride, BrCl decomposes into bromine and chlorine and
reaches the equilibrium:
s
for which Kc= 32 at 500 K. If initially pure BrCl is present at a concentration of

er
3.3 × 10–3 molL–1, what is its molar concentration in the mixture at equilibrium?
 Answer
ev
Let the amount of bromine and chlorine formed at equilibrium be x. The given
reaction is:
hi
Ac
Now, we can write,

y
em
ad
Ac
Question 7.23:
At 1127 K and 1 atm pressure, a gaseous mixture of CO and CO2 in equilibrium
with solid carbon has 90.55% CO by mass
s
Calculate Kc for this reaction at the above temperature.

er
 Answer
Let the total mass of the gaseous mixture be 100 g.
ev
Mass of CO = 90.55 g
And, mass of CO2 = (100 – 90.55) = 9.45 g
hi
Now, number of moles of CO,

Ac
Number of moles of CO2,

Partial pressure of CO,

Partial pressure of CO2,
y
em
ad
Ac
Δn = 2 – 1 = 1
We know that,
s
er
ev
Question 7.24:
Calculate a) ΔG°and b) the equilibrium constant for the formation of NO2 from
hi
NO and O2 at 298 K
Ac
where ΔfG° (NO2) = 52.0 kJ/mol

ΔfG° (NO) = 87.0 kJ/mol
ΔfG° (O2) = 0 kJ/mol
 Answer
(a) For the given reaction,

ΔG° = 52.0 – {87.0 + 0}

= – 35.0 kJ mol–1
(b) We know that,
ΔG° = RT log Kc
ΔG° = 2.303 RT log Kc
y
em
Hence, the equilibrium constant for the given reaction Kc is 1.36 × 106
Question 7.25:
ad
Does the number of moles of reaction products increase, decrease or remain
same when each of the following equilibria is subjected to a decrease in pressure
by increasing the volume?
Ac
(a)
(b)
s
(c)

er
Answer
(a) The number of moles of reaction products will increase. According to Le
Chatelier‘s principle, if pressure is decreased, then the equilibrium shifts in the
ev
direction in which the number of moles of gases is more. In the given reaction, the
number of moles of gaseous products is more than that of gaseous reactants. Thus,
hi
the reaction will proceed in the forward direction. As a result, the number of moles
of reaction products will increase.
Ac
(b) The number of moles of reaction products will decrease.

(c) The number of moles of reaction products remains the same
Question 7.26:
Which of the following reactions will get affected by increasing the pressure?

Also, mention whether change will cause the reaction to go into forward or
backward direction.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
y
(v)
em
(vi)
 Answer
The reactions given in (i), (iii), (iv), (v), and (vi) will get affected by increasing the
ad
pressure.
The reaction given in (iv) will proceed in the forward direction because the number
of moles of gaseous reactants is more than that of gaseous products.
Ac
The reactions given in (i), (iii), (v), and (vi) will shift in the backward direction
because the number of moles of gaseous reactants is less than that of gaseous
products.
s
er
Question 7.27:
The equilibrium constant for the following reaction is 1.6 ×105 at 1024 K.
ev
Find the equilibrium pressure of all gases if 10.0 bar of HBr is introduced into a
hi
sealed container at 1024 K.

 Answer
Ac
Given,
for the reaction i.e.,
Therefore, for the reaction the equilibrium constant will

be,

Now, let p be the pressure of both H2 and Br2 at equilibrium.
y
Now, we can write,
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
Question 7.28:
Dihydrogen gas is obtained from natural gas by partial oxidation with steam as
per following endothermic reaction:
(a) Write as expression for Kp for the above reaction.

(b) How will the values of Kp and composition of equilibrium mixture be affected
by
(i) Increasing the pressure
(ii) Increasing the temperature
(iii) Using a catalyst?
 Answer
(a) For the given reaction,
y
em
(b) (i) According to Le Chatelier‘s principle, the equilibrium will shift in the
backward direction.
(ii) According to Le Chatelier‘s principle, as the reaction is endothermic, the
ad
equilibrium will shift in the forward direction.
(iii) The equilibrium of the reaction is not affected by the presence of a catalyst. A
Ac
catalyst only increases the rate of a reaction. Thus, equilibrium will be attained
quickly.
s
Question 7.29:
Describe the effect of:
er
a) Addition of H2
b) Addition of CH3OH
ev
c) Removal of CO
d) Removal of CH3OH
hi
on the equilibrium of the reaction:

Ac
 Answer
(a) According to Le Chatelier‘s principle, on addition of H2, the equilibrium of the
given reaction will shift in the forward direction.
(b) On addition of CH3OH, the equilibrium will shift in the backward direction.
(c) On removing CO, the equilibrium will shift in the backward direction.
(d) On removing CH3OH, the equilibrium will shift in the forward direction.

Question 7.30:
At 473 K, equilibrium constant Kc for decomposition of phosphorus
pentachloride, PCl5 is 8.3 ×10-3. If decomposition is depicted as,
ΔrH° = 124.0 kJmol–1

a) Write an expression for Kc for the reaction.
b) What is the value of Kc for the reverse reaction at the same temperature?
y
c) What would be the effect on Kc if (i) more PCl5 is added (ii) pressure is
em
increased? (iii) The temperature is increased?
 Answer
ad
(a)
(b) Value of Kc for the reverse reaction at the same temperature is:
Ac
s
(c) (i) Kc would remain the same because in this case, the temperature remains the
er
same.
(ii) Kc is constant at constant temperature. Thus, in this case, Kc would not change.
ev
(iii) In an endothermic reaction, the value of Kc increases with an increase in

temperature. Since the given reaction in an endothermic reaction, the value of Kc
hi
will increase if the temperature is increased.

Ac
Question 7.31:
Dihydrogen gas used in Haber’s process is produced by reacting methane from
natural gas with high temperature steam. The first stage of two stage reaction

involves the formation of CO and H2. In second stage, CO formed in first stage is
reacted with more steam in water gas shift reaction,
If a reaction vessel at 400°C is charged with an equimolar mixture of CO and
steam such that 4.0 bar, what will be the partial pressure of H2 at
equilibrium? Kp= 10.1 at 400°C
 Answer
y
Let the partial pressure of both carbon dioxide and hydrogen gas be p. The given
em
reaction is:
ad
It is
Now,
Ac
s
er
ev
Hence, at equilibrium, the partial pressure of H2 will be 3.04 bar.

hi
Question 7.32:
Ac
Predict which of the following reaction will have appreciable concentration of

reactants and products:
a)
b)
c)

 Answer
If the value of Kc lies between 10–3 and 103, a reaction has appreciable
concentration of reactants and products. Thus, the reaction given in (c) will have
appreciable concentration of reactants and products.
Question 7.33:
The value of Kc for the reaction
y
3O2 (g) 2O3 (g)
is 2.0 ×10–50 at 25°C. If the equilibrium concentration of O2 in air at 25°C is 1.6
em
×10–2, what is the concentration of O3?
 Answer
ad
Ac
Then, we have,
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
Hence, the concentration of
Question 7.34:
The reaction, CO(g) + 3H2(g) CH4(g) + H2O(g) is at equilibrium at 1300 K

in a 1L flask. It also contain 0.30 mol of CO, 0.10 mol of H2 and 0.02 mol of
H2O and an unknown amount of CH4 in the flask. Determine the concentration

of CH4 in the mixture. The equilibrium constant, Kc for the reaction at the given
temperature is 3.90.
 Answer
Let the concentration of methane at equilibrium be x.
It is given that Kc = 3.90.
y
Therefore,
em
ad
Ac
s
Hence, the concentration of CH4 at equilibrium is 5.85 × 10–2 M.

er
Question 7.35:
ev
What is meant by the conjugate acid-base pair? Find the conjugate acid/base for
the following species:
hi
 Answer
Ac
A conjugate acid-base pair is a pair that differs only by one proton.

The conjugate acid-base for the given species is mentioned in the table below.
Species Conjugate acid-base
HNO2
CN– HCN (acid)

HClO4
F– HF (acid)
OH– H2O (acid) /O2– (base)
S2– HS– (acid)
Question 7.36:
y
Which of the followings are Lewis acids? H2O, BF3, H+, and
em
 Answer
Lewis acids are those acids which can accept a pair of electrons. For example, BF3,
H+, and are Lewis acids.
ad
Question 7.37:
What will be the conjugate bases for the Brönsted acids: HF, H2SO4 and HCO3?
Ac
 Answer
The table below lists the conjugate bases for the given Bronsted acids.
Bronsted acid Conjugate base
s
HF F–
er
H2SO4
ev
Question 7.38:
Write the conjugate acids for the following Brönsted bases: NH2–, NH3 and
hi
HCOO–.
Ac
 Answer
The table below lists the conjugate acids for the given Bronsted bases.
Bronsted base Conjugate acid
NH3
NH3
HCOO– HCOOH

Question 7.39:
The species: H2O, , and NH3 can act both as Brönsted acids and
bases. For each case give the corresponding conjugate acid and base.
 Answer
The table below lists the conjugate acids and conjugate bases for the given species.
Species Conjugate acid Conjugate base
H2 O H3 O+ OH–
y
H2CO3
em
H2SO4
NH3
ad
Question 7.40:
Classify the following species into Lewis acids and Lewis bases and show how
these act as Lewis acid/base: (a) OH– (b) F– (c) H+ (d) BCl3.
Ac
 Answer
(a) OH– is a Lewis base since it can donate its lone pair of electrons.
(b) F– is a Lewis base since it can donate a pair of electrons.
s
(c) H+ is a Lewis acid since it can accept a pair of electrons.

er
(d) BCl3 is a Lewis acid since it can accept a pair of electrons.

ev
Question 7.41:
The concentration of hydrogen ion in a sample of soft drink is 3.8 × 10–3 M.
what is its pH?
hi
 Answer
Ac
Given,
pH value of soft drink

Question 7.42:
The pH of a sample of vinegar is 3.76. Calculate the concentration of hydrogen
y
ion in it.
em
Question 7.43:
The ionization constant of HF, HCOOH and HCN at 298K are 6.8 × 10–4, 1.8 ×
ad
10–4 and 4.8 × 10–9 respectively. Calculate the ionization constants of the
corresponding conjugate base.
 Answer
Ac
It is known that,
s
Given,
Ka of HF = 6.8 × 10–4
er
Hence, Kb of its conjugate base F–

ev
hi
Ac
Given,
Ka of HCOOH = 1.8 × 10–4
Hence, Kb of its conjugate base HCOO–

Given,
Ka of HCN = 4.8 × 10–9
Hence, Kb of its conjugate base CN–
y
em
Question 7.44:
ad
The ionization constant of phenol is 1.0 × 10–10. What is the concentration of
phenolate ion in 0.05 M solution of phenol? What will be its degree of ionization
Ac
if the solution is also 0.01M in sodium phenolate?
 Answer
Ionization of phenol:
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

Now, let α be the degree of ionization of phenol in the presence of 0.01 M

C6H5ONa.
Also,
y
em
ad
Ac
Question 7.45:
The first ionization constant of H2S is 9.1 × 10–8. Calculate the concentration of
s
HS– ion in its 0.1 M solution. How will this concentration be affected if the
er
solution is 0.1 M in HCl also? If the second dissociation constant of H2S is 1.2 ×
10–13, calculate the concentration of S2– under both conditions.
ev
 Answer
(i) To calculate the concentration of HS– ion:
hi
Case I (in the absence of HCl):

Let the concentration of HS– be x M.
Ac

y
em
ad
Case II (in the presence of HCl):
In the presence of 0.1 M of HCl, let be y M.

Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
(ii) To calculate the concentration of :

Case I (in the absence of 0.1 M HCl):

(From first ionization, case I)
Let
Also, (From first ionization, case I)
y
em
Case II (in the presence of 0.1 M HCl):
Again, let the concentration of HS– be X' M.
ad
(From first ionization, case II)
(From HCl, case II)

Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
Question 7.46:
The ionization constant of acetic acid is 1.74 × 10–5. Calculate the degree of
dissociation of acetic acid in its 0.05 M solution. Calculate the concentration of
acetate ion in the solution and its pH.
 Answer

Degree of dissociation,
c = 0.05 M
Ka = 1.74 × 10–5
y
em
ad
Thus, concentration of CH3COO– = c.α
Ac
s
er
ev
Hence, the concentration of acetate ion in the solution is 0.00093 M and its Ph is
hi
3.03.
Ac
Question 7.47:
It has been found that the pH of a 0.01M solution of an organic acid is 4.15.
Calculate the concentration of the anion, the ionization constant of the acid and
its pKa.
 Answer
Let the organic acid be HA.

Concentration of HA = 0.01 M
pH = 4.15
Now,
y
em
Then,
ad
Ac
s
Question 7.48:
er
Assuming complete dissociation, calculate the pH of the following solutions:

(a) 0.003 M HCl (b) 0.005 M NaOH (c) 0.002 M HBr (d) 0.002 M KOH
ev
 Answer
(i) 0.003MHCl:
hi
Since HCl is completely ionized,

Ac
Now,
Hence, the pH of the solution is 2.52.

(ii) 0.005MNaOH:
y
em
(iii) 0.002 HBr:
ad
Ac
s
(iv) 0.002 M KOH:

er
ev
hi
Ac
Question 7.49:
Calculate the pH of the following solutions:
a) 2 g of TlOH dissolved in water to give 2 litre of solution.

b) 0.3 g of Ca(OH)2 dissolved in water to give 500 mL of solution.

c) 0.3 g of NaOH dissolved in water to give 200 mL of solution.
d) 1mL of 13.6 M HCl is diluted with water to give 1 litre of solution.
 Answer
(a) For 2g of TlOH dissolved in water to give 2 L of solution:
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
(b) For 0.3 g of Ca(OH)2 dissolved in water to give 500 mL of solution:

ev
hi
Ac

(c) For 0.3 g of NaOH dissolved in water to give 200 mL of solution:
y
em
ad
Ac
(d) For 1mL of 13.6 M HCl diluted with water to give 1 L of solution:
13.6 × 1 mL = M2 × 1000 mL
(Before dilution) (After dilution)
13.6 × 10–3 = M2 × 1L
s
M2 = 1.36 × 10–2
er
[H+] = 1.36 × 10–2

pH = – log (1.36 × 10–2)
ev
= (– 0.1335 + 2)
hi
Question 7.50:
The degree of ionization of a 0.1M bromoacetic acid solution is 0.132. Calculate
Ac
the pH of the solution and the pKa of bromoacetic acid.

 Answer
Concentration, c = 0.1 M
Thus, the concentration of H3O+ = c.
= 0.1 × 0.132

= 0.0132
Now,
y
em
Question 7.51:
The pH of 0.005M codeine (C18H21NO3) solution is 9.95. Calculate its ionization
constant and pKb.
ad
 Answer
c = 0.005
Ac
pH = 9.95
pOH = 4.05
pH = – log (4.105)
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
Question 7.52:

What is the pH of 0.001 M aniline solution? The ionization constant of aniline

can be taken from Table 7.7. Calculate the degree of ionization of aniline in the
solution. Also calculate the ionization constant of the conjugate acid of aniline.
 Answer
Kb = 4.27 × 10–10
c = 0.001M
pH =?
α=?
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
Thus, the ionization constant of the conjugate acid of aniline is 2.34 × 10–5.
hi
Question 7.53:
Calculate the degree of ionization of 0.05M acetic acid if its pKa value is 4.74.
Ac
How is the degree of dissociation affected when its solution also contains (a)
0.01 M (b) 0.1 M in HCl?
 Answer

When HCl is added to the solution, the concentration of H+ ions will increase.
y
Therefore, the equilibrium will shift in the backward direction i.e., dissociation of
em
acetic acid will decrease.
Case I: When 0.01 M HCl is taken.
Let x be the amount of acetic acid dissociated after the addition of HCl.
ad
Ac
As the dissociation of a very small amount of acetic acid will take place, the values
i.e., 0.05 – x and 0.01 + x can be taken as 0.05 and 0.01 respectively.
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
Case II: When 0.1 M HCl is taken.

Let the amount of acetic acid dissociated in this case be X. As we have done in the
first case, the concentrations of various species involved in the reaction are:

y
em
ad
Ac
Question 7.54:
The ionization constant of dimethylamine is 5.4 × 10–4. Calculate its degree of
ionization in its 0.02 M solution. What percentage of dimethylamine is ionized if
s
the solution is also 0.1 M in NaOH?

er
 Answer
ev
hi
Ac
Now, if 0.1 M of NaOH is added to the solution, then NaOH (being a strong base)
undergoes complete ionization.
And,

y
em
It means that in the presence of 0.1 M NaOH, 0.54% of dimethylamine will get
dissociated.
ad
Question 7.55:
Calculate the hydrogen ion concentration in the following biological fluids
whose pH are given below:
Ac
(a) Human muscle-fluid, 6.83
(b) Human stomach fluid, 1.2
(c) Human blood, 7.38
s
(d) Human saliva, 6.4.

er
 Answer
(a) Human muscle fluid 6.83:
ev
pH = 6.83
pH = – log [H+]
6.83 = – log [H+]
hi
[H+] =1.48 × 10–7 M

Ac
(b) Human stomach fluid, 1.2:

pH =1.2
1.2 = – log [H+]
[H+] = 0.063
(c) Human blood, 7.38:
pH = 7.38 = – log [H+]

[H+] = 4.17 × 10–8 M

(d) Human saliva, 6.4:
pH = 6.4
6.4 = – log [H+]
[H+] = 3.98 × 10–7
Question 7.56:
y
The pH of milk, black coffee, tomato juice, lemon juice and egg white are 6.8,
5.0, 4.2, 2.2 and 7.8 respectively. Calculate corresponding hydrogen ion
em
concentration in each.
 Answer
The hydrogen ion concentration in the given substances can be calculated by using
ad
the given relation:
pH = –log [H+]
Ac
(i) pH of milk = 6.8
Since, pH = –log [H+]
6.8 = –log [H+]
log [H+] = –6.8
s
[H+] = anitlog(–6.8)
er
=
ev
(ii) pH of black coffee = 5.0

5.0 = –log [H+]
hi
log [H+] = –5.0

Ac
=
(iii) pH of tomato juice = 4.2
4.2 = –log [H+]
log [H+] = –4.2

=
(iv) pH of lemon juice = 2.2
2.2 = –log [H+]
log [H+] = –2.2
y
=
em
(v) pH of egg white = 7.8
7.8 = –log [H+]
ad
log [H+] = –7.8
Ac
=
Question 7.57:
If 0.561 g of KOH is dissolved in water to give 200 mL of solution at 298 K.
Calculate the concentrations of potassium, hydrogen and hydroxyl ions. What is
s
its pH?
er
 Answer
ev
hi
Ac

y
em
Question 7.58:
ad
Ac
The solubility of Sr(OH)2 at 298 K is 19.23 g/L of solution. Calculate the
concentrations of strontium and hydroxyl ions and the pH of the solution.
 Answer
s
Solubility of Sr(OH)2 = 19.23 g/L

er
Then, concentration of Sr(OH)2

ev
hi
Ac

Question 7.59:
The ionization constant of propanoic acid is 1.32 × 10–5. Calculate the degree of
ionization of the acid in its 0.05M solution and also its pH. What will be its
degree of ionization if the solution is 0.01M in HCl also?
 Answer
Then, representing propionic acid as HA, we have:
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Question 7.60:
Ac
The pH of 0.1M solution of cyanic acid (HCNO) is 2.34. Calculate the ionization
constant of the acid and its degree of ionization in the solution.
 Answer
c = 0.1 M
pH = 2.34

y
em
Question 7.61:
ad
Ac
The ionization constant of nitrous acid is 4.5 × 10–4. Calculate the pH of 0.04 M
sodium nitrite solution and also its degree of hydrolysis.
 Answer
s
NaNO2 is the salt of a strong base (NaOH) and a weak acid (HNO2).
er
ev
hi
Now, If x moles of the salt undergo hydrolysis, then the concentration of various
species present in the solution will be:
Ac

y
em
Therefore, degree of hydrolysis
= 2.325 × 10–5
ad
Ac
Question 7.62:
A 0.02 M solution of pyridinium hydrochloride has pH = 3.44. Calculate the
ionization constant of pyridine
s
 Answer
er
pH = 3.44
We know that,
ev
pH = – log [H+]
hi
Ac

Question 7.63:
Predict if the solutions of the following salts are neutral, acidic or basic:
NaCl, KBr, NaCN, NH4NO3, NaNO2 and KF
 Answer
(i) NaCl:
y
Therefore, it is a neutral solution.
em
(ii) KBr:
ad
Therefore, it is a neutral solution.
(iii) NaCN:
Ac
Therefore, it is a basic solution.
(iv) NH4NO3
s
er
Therefore, it is an acidic solution.

ev
(v) NaNO2
hi

Ac
(vi) KF

Question 7.64:
The ionization constant of chloroacetic acid is 1.35 × 10–3. What will be the pH
of 0.1M acid and its 0.1M sodium salt solution?
 Answer
It is given that Ka for ClCH2COOH is 1.35 × 10–3.
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

ClCH2COONa is the salt of a weak acid i.e., ClCH2COOH and a strong base i.e.,
NaOH.
y
em
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac
Question 7.65:
Ionic product of water at 310 K is 2.7 × 10–14. What is the pH of neutral water at
this temperature?
 Answer
Ionic product,

y
em
Hence, the pH of neutral water is 6.78.
ad
Question 7.66:
Calculate the pH of the resultant mixtures:
Ac
a) 10 mL of 0.2M Ca(OH)2 + 25 mL of 0.1M HCl
b) 10 mL of 0.01M H2SO4 + 10 mL of 0.01M Ca(OH)2
c) 10 mL of 0.1M H2SO4 + 10 mL of 0.1M KOH
 Answer
s
er
(a)
ev
Thus, excess of = .0015 mol

hi
Ac
(b)

Since there is neither an excess of or , the solution is neutral. Hence, pH

= 7.
(c)
Excess of = .001 mol
y
em
= 1.30
ad
Question 7.67:
Determine the solubilities of silver chromate, barium chromate, ferric hydroxide,
Ac
lead chloride and mercurous iodide at 298K from their solubility product
constants given in Table 7.9 (page 221). Determine also the molarities of
individual ions.
 Answer
s
(1) Silver chromate:

er
ev
Let the solubility of be s.

hi
Ac
Molarity of = 2s = 2 × 0.65 × 10–4 = 1.30 × 10–4 M

Molarity of = s = 0.65 × 10–4 M

(2) Barium chromate:
Let s be the solubility of
Thus, = s and =s
y
em
Molarity of = Molarity of
ad
(3) Ferric hydroxide:
Ac
Let s be the solubility of
s
er
ev
hi
Molarity of
Ac
Molarity of
(4) Lead chloride:
Let KSP be the solubility of

Molarity of
y
Molarity of chloride =
em
(5) Mercurous iodide:
ad
Let s be the solubility of Ac
s
Molarity of
er
Molarity of
ev
Question 7.68:
The solubility product constant of Ag2CrO4 and AgBr are 1.1 × 10–12 and 5.0 ×
hi
10–13 respectively. Calculate the ratio of the molarities of their saturated

solutions.
Ac
 Answer
Let s be the solubility of Ag2CrO4.

Let s´ be the solubility of AgBr.
Therefore, the ratio of the molarities of their saturated solution is
y
Question 7.69:
em
Equal volumes of 0.002 M solutions of sodium iodate and cupric chlorate are
mixed together. Will it lead to precipitation of copper iodate? (For cupric iodate
Ksp = 7.4 × 10–8).
ad
 Answer
When equal volumes of sodium iodate and cupric chlorate solutions are mixed
Ac
together, then the molar concentrations of both solutions are reduced to half i.e.,
0.001 M.
Then,
s
er
ev
Now, the solubility equilibrium for copper iodate can be written as:
hi
Ionic product of copper iodate:

Ac
Since the ionic product (1 × 10–9) is less than Ksp (7.4 × 10–8), precipitation will not
occur.
Question 7.70:

The ionization constant of benzoic acid is 6.46 × 10–5 and Ksp for silver benzoate
is 2.5 × 10–13. How many times is silver benzoate more soluble in a buffer of pH
3.19 compared to its solubility in pure water?
 Answer
Since pH = 3.19,
y
em
Let the solubility of C6H5COOAg be x mol/L.
ad
Then,
Ac
s
er
ev
Thus, the solubility of silver benzoate in a pH 3.19 solution is 1.66 × 10–6 mol/L.
Now, let the solubility of C6H5COOAg be x’ mol/L.
hi
Ac

Hence, C6H5COOAg is approximately 3.317 times more soluble in a low pH

solution.
Question 7.71:
What is the maximum concentration of equimolar solutions of ferrous sulphate
y
and sodium sulphide so that when mixed in equal volumes, there is no
precipitation of iron sulphide? (For iron sulphide, Ksp = 6.3 × 10–18).
em
 Answer
Let the maximum concentration of each solution be x mol/L. After mixing, the
volume of the concentrations of each solution will be
reduced to half i.e., .
ad
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
If the concentrations of both solutions are equal to or less than 5.02 × 10–9 M, then
Ac
there will be no precipitation of iron sulphide
Question 7.72:

What is the minimum volume of water required to dissolve 1g of calcium

sulphate at 298 K? (For calcium sulphate, Ksp is 9.1 × 10–6).
 Answer
Let the solubility of CaSO4 be s.
y
em
Molecular mass of CaSO4 = 136 g/mol
Solubility of in gram/L = 3.02 × 10–3 × 136
ad
= 0.41 g/L
This means that we need 1L of water to dissolve 0.41g of CaSO4
Ac
Therefore, to dissolve 1g of CaSO4 we require of water.
Question 7.73:
s
The concentration of sulphide ion in 0.1M HCl solution saturated with hydrogen
er
sulphide is 1.0 × 10–19 M. If 10 mL of this is added to 5 mL of 0.04 M solution of

the following: FeSO4, MnCl2, ZnCl2 and CdCl2. in which of these solutions
ev
precipitation will take place?

 Answer
hi
Ac
For precipitation to take place, it is required that the calculated ionic product
exceeds the Ksp value.
Before mixing:
After mixing:

y
em
This ionic product exceeds the Ksp of ZnS and CdS. Therefore, precipitation will
occur in CdCl2 and ZnCl2 solutions.
ad
********************************* THE END************************
Ac
s
er
ev
hi
Ac

Study Material Chemistry-1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Study Material Chemistry-1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Study Material Chemistry-1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Achievers Academy Chemistry XI

Study Notes and VBQ

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

Chapter Chapter Name Page No Weightage

8 Redox Reactions 101-108 3

10 The s-block elements 122-132 5

11 The p-block Elements 133-146 5

12 Organic Chemistry- Some Basic 147-162 7

Principles and Techniques

14 Environmental Chemistry 186-190 3

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

categories – physical properties and chemical properties.

The measurement or observation of chemical properties requires a chemical change

include acidity or basicity, combustibility etc.Many properties of matter such as

The International System of Units (SI)

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

significant figures. For example, 0.00045 isexpressed as 4.5 x 10 -4 in terms of

scientific notations. The number of significant figures in this number is 2,

Retention of Significant Figures - Rounding off Figures

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

preceding digit remains unchanged. 8.375 is rounded off to 8.38 while8.365 is

then, 5 feet and 2 inch = 62 inch

8. Expansion on Very little Very little Highly expand

9. Fluidity Can’t flow Can flow Can flow

energy of very fast very fast

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

Mixtures are of two types, homogeneous and heterogeneous.

powder in water etc.

Law of Conservation of Mass (Given by Antoine Lavoisier in 1789).

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

existence is called an atom, while the smallest particle of a substance which is

Atomic Mass Unit

Gram Atomic Mass

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

For example, the atomic mass of oxygen = 16 amu

its percentage composition

Molecular mass of the compound

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

A 5 % (v/v) solution of ethyl alcohol contains 5 cm3 of alcohol in 100 cm3 of

Molarity of the solution = No. of moles of the solute =n

Volume of the solution in litre V

Molarity of the solution = Mass of the solute

In terms of weight, molarity of the substance can be expressed as:

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

Mole fraction of the solvent = Moles of the solvent

Mole fraction of the solute + Mole fraction of solvent = 1

formed is known as limiting reagent

8. Define one mole?

9. Calculate the formula mass calcium chloride.

Two Marks questions with answers

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

Homogeneous mixture Heterogeneous mixture

with oxygen to form two compounds CO and CO2.

Achievers Academy F-165 Aakriti Ecocity,8411930000,07554924027

8. State the number of significant figures in each of the following:

Three Marks questions with answers-

miles (distance between earth and sun)

93 million miles = 93 x 106 miles